JP2023138701A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of stabilizing displacement of displacement means.SOLUTION: A front transmission member 440 is provided with a groove forming part 442 and a transmission projection part 446, both of which are configurated to transmit driving power to a projection part 432 of a contact member 430 and a projecting thread part 414 of a direct mobile member 410 respectively, thus transmission of driving power to the projection part 432 and the projecting thread part 414 may be automatically synchronized and displacement of the contact member 430 and the direct mobile member 410 may be stabilized. Herein, the timing of the transmission of driving power is not limited. For example, a mode may be applied, where driving power is transmitted to the projection part 432 and the projecting thread part 414 simultaneously, the driving power may be transmitted at an individual timing, and combination thereof (partial simultaneous transmission) may be applied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine that is used to displace the displacement means and includes a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means (Patent Document 1) ).

JP2016-202210A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can stabilize the displacement of the displacement means.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members, and a driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement means. a first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target portion of the displacement means in a first aspect; and a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the second target section of the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the driving force transmission to the first target part and the driving force transmission to the second target part occur at different times. be done.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the displacement means moves a first member having the first target part and a second member having the second target part. The displacement locus of the first member and the displacement locus of the second member are configured to partially intersect, the first member is configured to be able to abut on the second member at a predetermined position, and In the state of contact, driving force can be transmitted to the second member via the first member.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the timing of driving force transmission to the displacement means can be shifted.

According to the game machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, the route of driving force transmission can be switched.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. 10 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9. FIG. (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulation device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. (a) is a rear view of the abutting member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operating member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 25. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutment member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. As the front transmission member and rear transmission member rotate, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion of the transmission arm member FIG. 2 is a diagram showing changes over time. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a rotary plate. It is a side view of a rotary plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a functional board part. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the presentation member. It is a rear view of a production member. (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). 76 is a sectional view of the effect member taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a route forming member of the wiring guide member. (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front enlarged view of the first decorative member in range XCVII of FIG. 2; It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotary plate. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the game board and firing unit in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2; It is a back view of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board|substrate box in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the board box. (a) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the box cover. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the box cover. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as seen in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (a) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 112(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a). (a) is a front view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116(a). It is a diagram. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box taken along cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1) on the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden board member. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate, which has a rotating shaft at its lower end and is rotatably displaced to tilt or stand up toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second prize opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate is configured to move between the gaming area and the second prize opening 640. By closing the space between the second winning hole 640 and the second winning hole 640, the ball is configured to become difficult to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win are not changed, and the second symbol Only the winning probability may be changed to be higher than the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display unit 80 is disposed at a position (behind the window of the base board 60) that can be seen through the central portion of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second prize opening 640 can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second prize opening 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Incidentally, the arrangement of the second winning hole 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be located below the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be located to the left of the left and right center of the gaming area.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter a prize in the second winning hole 640, so the first winning hole 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, and the player wins the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640.

Note that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, if the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first prize opening 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second prize opening by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim for the prize opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the player cannot aim at the first prize opening 64 when playing with the right hand, and the ball fired when playing with the left does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can request that the game be changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed." Therefore, by adding the gameplay of changing the way the ball is hit, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, For example, it may be on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the front and back direction. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening/closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has rails 61 and 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60, which can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball falling unit 150 configured to allow balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) fired toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is constructed by assembling a firing performance unit 300 etc. that can be configured to be able to perform a firing performance, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral portion is arranged facing and fixed to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily seen by the player from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the base board 60 is transparent and the back side can be seen, so the balls flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In this embodiment, the ball flow lowering unit 150 is designed taking into consideration the effect produced by the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

Note that if there is a part that you do not want the player to see, you can take measures such as pasting a seal member with low light transmission (or non-light transmission).

The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The firing production unit 300 receives the granular members 320 (see FIG. 54), and a partitioning member 310 that divides the range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, so that the granular members 320 are separated from the center frame. It is said that it can be fired towards the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who views the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window of the center frame 86 to effectively see the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. Note that details of the firing effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a back case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed inside the upper part of the back case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 symmetrically arranged inside the left and right parts of the back case 510. Equipped with

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is disposed above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed on the left and right positions of the opening 511a, respectively, on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 7, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 8, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in an extended state and the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a production standby state, In FIG. 9, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state are illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 10, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in an effect standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect upper end state are illustrated, and in FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in an effect upper end state, and the right displacement rotation unit The unit 800 is in the lower end state of presentation.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the performance upper end state (see FIG. 10) and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the By controlling the state change from the effect standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from overlapping in a front view. It can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is configured to be able to move downward in a state where the production members 700 are arranged in one place, and after the downward displacement, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state in which the operation is controlled so that the area that can be viewed from the front becomes larger (see FIG. 9).

Thereafter, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward in a state where they are assembled in one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG. 7.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the performance standby state in a direction having not only an up-down component but also a left-right component.

In this embodiment, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described below. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left and right outside.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left side horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, while the right The horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, if the left side horizontal slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced downward and the right side horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. The player can visually perceive it as if it were being rotated and displaced about the center point C1, which is located closer to the center.

In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of a rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, FIGS. 12 to 14 show the game board 13 assembled to the front side of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

Furthermore, in FIGS. 12(a) and 13(a), an example of a state in which the granular members 320 are retained downward is illustrated, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular members 320 are ejected and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

In the performance standby state shown in FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the production member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has a central part of the collective arrangement located above the division member 310 of the firing performance unit 300, and the division member Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is placed close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden from view.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, the firing production unit 300 is configured to perform the motion production of ejecting the granular material 320 at the partitioning member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 is disposed below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is ejected in a path that slopes upward toward the front. , hits the front wall of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

This allows the player to see the granular members 320 as if they are coming toward the player, thereby increasing attention to the performance using the granular members 320.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the area in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be moved closer to the player, and the components disposed in the gaming area, such as the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), can be scattered. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front may be adopted as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning hole 64, it is difficult to secure a space for installing a guide path for the ball that enters the first winning hole 64. This may become difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged diagonally backward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation where the first prize opening 64 cannot be freely arranged can be prevented from occurring.

When the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired in the state shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 scattered inside the partition member 310 and the third symbol display device 81 are This can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This allows the player to visually recognize a combination of a two-dimensional display and the three-dimensionally displaced movement of the granular members 320.

When the firing control of the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13(a), as shown in FIG. This can be shown to the player together with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the scattering timing of the granular member 320 with the timing at which the effect member 700 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is displaced in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 It is possible to visually recognize the state of the images scattering, and the impact of the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

Here, as a method of producing the effect in conjunction with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may also be considered.

However, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, as in this embodiment, Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to effectively produce the effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the position of the partitioning member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce the motion in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult for the player to see the granular members 320.

Furthermore, by forming the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from becoming more difficult to see than when the granular member 320 is formed with a large member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, the presentation effect of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be improved.

Furthermore, the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be used as is for the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800 can be used in a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which it is disposed in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed depending on the state. , performs an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 are combined to be visually recognized, and an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 are combined to be visually recognized. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can effectively create an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the displacement of the effect member 700 in a manner that disperses them. By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like member 854 disposed in the It can be visually recognized as if the displacement rotation unit 800 is rotating at high speed, and the presentation effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular member 320 is made visible in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect is made visible in combination with the enlargement/reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. It can be used for both.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, if the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the advance/retreat route portion S1b is set as a route that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path section S1b as a path passing through the gap provided diagonally between the ejection device 400 of the ejection production unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom in setting, it is configured to be able to be displaced upwardly beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement range of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 are arranged to the extent that a space can be secured between them, but it is necessary to ensure a space between the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 even during transportation. It's not something I'm considering. Therefore, during transportation, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being disposed close to each other.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIG. 6. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured such that its state can be changed by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the regulating state, it regulates the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the production standby state.

By employing the displacement regulating device 180, even if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported.

To explain in detail, conventionally, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by filling the area where the movable accessory moves with cushioning material (cushion material such as cotton), and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents movable accessories from being displaced during shipping or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 The cushioning material cannot be removed unless it is disassembled, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the present embodiment employs a displacement forming device 180. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulation state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated and a regulation release state in which the regulation is released, without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the back case 510. Can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be explained first, and then the details of the state change will be explained.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a diagram.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) show the displacement regulating device 180 in a deregulated state, and FIG. 15(c) shows the displacement regulating device 180 in a regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement regulating device 180 is switched between a regulating state and a regulating state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding and retracting from the abutment member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to protrude to the inside of the back case 510 and engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, but the details will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18(a) is a rear view of the abutting member 181. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operating member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 that is placed in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a contact member that is placed on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operating member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and a guide member 183 disposed between the operating member 183 and the abutment member 181. It mainly includes a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply a biasing force toward the rear side to the operating member 181.

As the operating member 183 is formed into a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and guide member 182 that accommodate the operating member 183 are also formed from an approximately elliptical shape from which is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear. Therefore, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear.

The abutting member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and the contact member 181 is designed to have a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510. The wall part is extended, and there is an insertion hole 181a drilled at the left and right ends into which a fastening part protruding from the back case 510 is inserted, and a double cylindrical back wall with a shape that allows the coil spring 184 to be placed in the gap. It includes a cylindrical holding portion 181b that protrudes to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

The guide member 182 includes a main body part 182a that has an elliptical annular shape along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and extends in the front-rear direction, and a screw into which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening part inserted into the insertion hole 181a. The insertion part 182b, the fastening part 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the abutment member 181 is screwed, the retaining part 182d that projects radially inward at the back end of the main body part 182a, and the fastening part 182c of the main body part 182a. It includes a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction on the upper and lower inner parts.

With this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so that it cannot fall off. In the embodiment, the situations in which the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the abutting member 182 (the side covered by the back case 510). Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

Note that the fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted into the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). (see), making it easy to remove the displacement regulating device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operating member 183 has a main body part 183a formed in a cup shape with an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining part 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear and an open front side, and a front edge of the main body part 183a. a flange portion 183b extending radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; a cylindrical portion 183d projecting cylindrically from the bottom center of the main body portion 183a toward the front side; An arc-shaped protruding portion 183e that has a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 and projects toward the front side with the portion 183d as the center, and a position where it can engage with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. The engaging portion 183f is provided in a protruding manner to form a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical sticker is pasted on the back surface of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the transverse direction (see Figure 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent incorrect vertical orientation during assembly. can do.

By forming the main body portion 183a into an elliptical shape, rotational displacement of the operating member 183 can be easily prevented. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotated, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in rear view, thereby preventing the operating member 183 from falling off from the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 is movable in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has the role of smoothly displacing the operating member 183 back and forth. In this embodiment, since the protrusions 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side, the groove portions 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect assembly in which the operating member 183 is placed in the wrong upper or lower position.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be able to be inserted into the center opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutment member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 to regulate the vertical movement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arcuate protruding portion 183e is disposed to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is disposed to face the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped protruding portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so the load generation area can be increased and a large load can be locally applied. Load can be prevented from occurring.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc shape with an interrupted circle, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. This can prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far away from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operating member 183 will be explained. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this biasing force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is pushed in beyond the minimum stroke at which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and restricted state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the latch mechanism is configured so that the state can be changed, the operation member 183 changes to the above-mentioned minimum value not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated but also when a large external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a risk that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if a state change occurs in the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally due to shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the production standby state (the production member 700 is located at the upper displacement end). When the performance member 700 displaced from the performance standby state is placed close to the division member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the performance member 700 will displace the division member of the firing performance unit 300. 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position away from the position (center position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183 (position eccentric to the right), and the engaging portion 183f The gap size between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set to be large, so that the posture maintaining ability of the operating member 183 is deliberately reduced.

Thereby, since the attitude of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined in advance, the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-back direction due to unintended external force can be suppressed.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21(a) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the opening/closing proximal end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and allows the operator to extend his/her hand by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured so that it can be touched easily. This position is on the opposite side to the side (opening/closing tip side, right side) where the worker who opens the inner frame 12 and performs the work enters, so when the worker opens the inner frame 12, the displacement regulating device may be unintentionally removed. 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, the entire load pushing the operating member 183 is not used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the attitude of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed in enough.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the displacement regulating device 180 to produce the necessary displacement by pushing in the forming part of the latch mechanism with pinpoint accuracy. It can be said that the state switching of the regulating device 180 is likely to be successful.

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to regulate the displacement. By operating the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movements. Therefore, the operator can easily press the forming portion of the latch mechanism with pinpoint precision.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the proximal end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed toward the pushed side. Therefore, as the amount of pushing increases, the pushing load of the operator can be more easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21(a), the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotation direction around the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction (the longitudinal direction) of the operating member 183 are perpendicular to each other, the operating member 183 receives the load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Thereby, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated without requiring a strong structure for the forming part of the latch mechanism.

In this way, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state, the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained, so the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, by maintaining the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state during maintenance after installation in a game machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800 described later can be performed safely and easily.

That is, in the case where the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement regulating device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, thereby preventing the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from colliding. I can do it.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, pressing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 switches the displacement regulating device 180 to the regulating state. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 becomes movable, and the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can perform a performance operation that involves a change in state.

Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and by looking into the open end side (right side), the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state. This section explains how the system is configured to allow confirmation of whether or not the user is present.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the operating member 183 is disposed in front of the shaped part of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, so when viewed from the right side, In this case, the operating member 183 is hidden in the shape of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the non-restricted state, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to protrude toward the rear side beyond the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operating member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, but can open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 slightly relative to the outer frame 11. When opened and viewed from the right side, it can be confirmed that the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually confirming that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511.

In this embodiment, the back case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). . In this embodiment, when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 has not changed during the power-on operation. A position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk at the gaming machine store, it is possible to make the clerk aware that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not have changed. Note that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a change in the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, and not by detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in this embodiment, the alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. It can be output. This makes it possible to reduce design costs.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In some cases, the operating member 183 is configured to be unable to be pressed while the power is turned on, and the power is required to be turned off, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the configuration that disables the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which push-in operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operating member 183, or a large diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183, and the displacement of the transmission gear 650 may be Inside, the rear plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other in the front and rear to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not only possible when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 matches the cylindrical portion 183d front and back.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulating state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is placed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, when a driving force is generated and the transmission gear 650 is displaced after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is the same as that of the cylindrical portion 183d. limited to.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it can be determined that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk at the game machine store, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Note that the displacement regulating device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary to not only open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 from the inner frame 12. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. These presentation devices will be explained in order starting from the firing presentation unit 300.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the assembled state of the firing effect unit 300, the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161. That is, it is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to see the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be seen by the player, and the player who sees the area surrounded by the center frame 86 can see the particulate member 320 scattered inside. In this way, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular members 320 are visually recognized as being superimposed on each other.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing performance unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inside a center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and has a box shape with an open bottom; A plurality of granular members 320 disposed so as to be displaceable inside the member 310, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the open portion on the lower side so that the granular members 320 do not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member 310. A first light irradiation device 330 is provided on the right side of the partition member 310, and a second light irradiation device 340 is provided on the left side of the partition member 310.

The partition member 310 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion disposed at the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. A bottom plate part parallel to the front plate part 311 is disposed opposite to the back side of the front plate part 311, and has a closing wall extending from the left and right sides and the top of the bottom plate part toward the front side so as to close the gap. The back partition 313 is integrally formed below the back partition 313 and communicates with the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed between the front plate 311 and the back partition 313. It includes a lower back section 314 whose path can be configured between the lower section 314 and the curved plate section 312, and an irregularly shaped penetrating section 315 formed through the lower section of the back section 314.

Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is approximately the same as the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front. It is formed as follows. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used to hide the edge of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the number of parts is reduced, and the edge of the partition member 310 is displayed by being visually recognized by overlapping the display by the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the symbol is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 will be scattered too much, and the number of granular members 320 may be too large for an impressive performance. You will need to do more. Therefore, if the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, it is possible to create a more powerful effect by making the small number of granular members 320 visible with high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular members 320 will become clogged. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-to-back width between the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314. Therefore, compared to the case where the longitudinal width is shortened, clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the lower back section 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 is smaller in the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b than in the left and right center portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left and right center portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1. It can be made easier to reach the vicinity of the center. This allows the granular member 320 to be easily recognized by the player.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches near the center of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and is scattered through the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can see as if the granular member 320 is exploding from near the center of the internal space IE1 and being scattered in all directions, so the action of the granular member 320 is more powerful. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 when the granular member 320 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the back side, and inclined downward toward the left and right center.

Thereby, irrespective of where the granular member 320 is placed in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be moved toward the left and right center and displaced downward on the back side.

Furthermore, the degree of downward inclination in the left and right parts 312a of the curved plate part 312 is configured such that the downward inclination towards the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination towards the back side. As a result, the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320 can be caused to occur toward the left and right center side, giving priority to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, the granular members 320 try to displace all at once toward the rear side at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 tend to be crowded together, resulting in a situation where the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the back side at the left and right center portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right center side at the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid crowding of the granular members 320 on the way down.

On the other hand, in the lower part of the rear section 314, the plate part disposed opposite to the rear side of the curved plate part 312 is approximately the same as the left and right center part 312b of the curved plate part 312 in side view (see FIG. 12(a)). It is formed into a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is larger.

In this embodiment, the angle of inclination of the lower part of the rear section 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (a slightly larger angle) than the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that injects the granular member 320.

Therefore, the angle of incidence of the granular members 320 on the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is the same without depending on the ejection direction of the granular members 320, which can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is almost uniform. can do.

The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and includes a short portion that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long portion that curves left and right to connect the upper ends of the short portion. Equipped with The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower part of the back section 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the lower back section 314 constituting the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the lower portion of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, when the granular member 320 is injected, the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion can be reduced, so that it is possible to avoid local loads being generated on the granular member 320 and the lower part of the back section 314, and the granular member 320 can be It is possible to prevent cracks or chips from occurring in the member 320 or the lower part of the rear section 314.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 on an enlarged scale, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively flexible (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) resin material and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). It is formed into a tridecahedron (quasi-regular polyhedron) consisting of 20 regular hexagons, and includes non-penetrating recesses 321 that are recessed without penetrating along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

This non-penetrating recess 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and also make the center of gravity of the granular member 320 deviate from the geometric center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed (see FIG. 25), making it easier to avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is oriented toward the injection direction when the injection device 400 receives a load and is injected, the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed should not collide with the front plate portion 311. I can do it. Thereby, the load upon collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation section 330 includes a fixed plate section 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illuminated board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate section 331, and a A lid part 333 is disposed on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 331, and is formed between the fixing plate part 331 and the illumination board 332 so as to be accommodating therein.

The illumination board 332 is provided with light irradiation parts 332a such as LEDs on both left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is irradiated from the light irradiation parts 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light can be visually recognized as light divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right illuminates the right path (right-handed flow path) of the gaming area where the through gate 67 etc. (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 332 is connected to the fixed plate part 331 and the lid part 333 in a range away from the light irradiation part 332a. can be shielded and avoided from being seen.

The second light irradiation section 340 includes a fixed plate section 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illumination board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate section 341, and a A lid part 343 is disposed on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 341, and is formed to be able to accommodate the illumination board 342 between the fixing plate part 341 and the fixing plate part 341.

The fixing plate part 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or is non-light permeable), while the lid part 343 is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illumination board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in this embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is configured to extend long to the left. Thereby, the player's field of view can be narrowed in advance, and it is possible to avoid seeing the left side of the illumination board 342 when viewed from the front.

Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent lid part 343 while avoiding the illumination board 342 from being seen.

The illumination board 342 is provided with light irradiation parts 342a such as LEDs on both left and right sides. A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the left side emits light having an optical axis pointing forward. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the gaming area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a of the right illumination board 332 is actively directed toward the gaming area is that the gaming performance of the present pachinko machine 10 (normally This takes into account the fact that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during probability change, time saving, and jackpot games. This will be explained below.

In the playing area of this pachinko machine 10, there is a high degree of freedom in the falling path of the ball on the left side of the playing area, so during normal play, adjust the firing strength of the ball so that the ball flows down the desired path. The player performs this operation. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the gaming area is made too high, the visibility of the ball will deteriorate, which will impede adjustment of the ball launch intensity and may cause player dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, when shooting a ball to the right side of the gaming area, the player basically shoots the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the ejected ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the downstream path of the ball is significantly reduced, and the ball exclusively follows the same path.

To be more specific, in this embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second winning opening 640 and has a width that allows one ball to pass through. All the balls that do not hit the ball pass through the guide route DL1 and head towards the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, there is little need to adjust the firing strength of the ball, so even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor on the right side of the gaming area (particularly where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of this occurring is low, effects with high luminous intensity can be performed within this range.

For these reasons, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation section 332a is arranged in the illumination board 332 disposed on the right side so as to direct the light toward the gaming area, while the illumination board 342 disposed on the left Here, the light irradiation section 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light toward the gaming area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing player dissatisfaction.

A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side emits light having an optical axis pointing rightward. A through hole 341a is bored in the fixed plate part 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation part 342a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 342 is shielded by the fixed plate part 341 in a range away from the light irradiation part 342a, You can avoid being seen. Note that the object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a disposed on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partitioning member 310 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the light irradiation unit 332a disposed on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and a light emitting unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330. and an LED through which the shaft passes.

This not only irradiates the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also irradiates light to other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to perform a lighting effect.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partitioning member 310, the intensity of light directed toward other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) disposed on the back side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partition member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the gaming area, the display on the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64. Most of the time, you are looking at the area to the left from the center of the gaming area.

In this case, when the second irradiation device 340 irradiates the inside of the partitioning member 310 with light, it shines at a position near the front of the gaming area, so it is a backlight for the player who sees the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, there is a possibility that the visibility of the gaming area may become poor for the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light irradiation section 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is placed closer to the back side, and the gaming area and the light irradiation section 342a are separated, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a is It is possible to reduce the degree of influence that this has on the visibility of the gaming area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity while reducing the degree to which the game area is illuminated. Able to perform a performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) shine without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and rear side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167, which will be described later, that irradiates light onto the light guide plate 161. As a result, it is possible to perform a light emission effect while avoiding the light from the light irradiation section 342a entering the light guide plate 161, so that the light emission effect is performed using the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a and the light guide plate 161 is made to shine. You can separate it from the performance.

When employing the light guide plate 161 as in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the irradiation path of the light, reducing the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to make the light guide plate 161 shine, there is a possibility that it will be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which will reduce the degree of freedom of production. was.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation section 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation section 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom in producing light emission around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partitioning member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partitioning member 310 rides.

28, 29, and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. Note that FIGS. 28 and 31 schematically illustrate the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side. FIGS. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 located closer to the back side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between it and the fixed member 350, and an electrical wiring or transmission arm member 470 which is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 in the center thereof.

A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted into the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove this fastening screw with a screwdriver, but it is necessary to remove the fixing member 350 when the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). In this case, the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, in preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. This prevents a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular material 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 when the firing unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the fixed member 350 so as to be linearly movable. a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed above the translation member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the translation member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface at the top; The contact member 430 is disposed below the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the translational member 410.

The injection device 400 is a member disposed displaceably between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is formed to be able to transmit a load to the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. a front transmission member 440 which is pivotally supported by the front transmission member 440 and has gear teeth formed on its outer peripheral surface; and a drive shaft which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 which is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is a member that is movably disposed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is rotatably supported on a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. It includes a transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 that is rotatably supported around a straight line facing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the direction in which the shaft portion 362 protrudes from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range where the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is applied to the front range and the rear side. As a result, each component is displaced in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, openings for driving force transmission are formed in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (approximately elliptical shape).

The transmission of driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, so the details of the configuration will be explained below in the order of the front range and the rear range, and then , the details of the configuration in the intermediate range will be explained, and the operational aspects will be explained.

First, the description will focus on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 403 that protrude from the upper end toward the front side, and the cylindrical protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported, a plurality of rod fixing parts 404 arranged in bilaterally symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal bars MB1, and a columnar shape protruding toward the front near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked onto each of a plurality of claws 411 formed at the lower end of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the biasing force causes the linear motion member 410 to be placed at the upper end position before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is disposed diagonally below the linear motion member 410, but this also aims to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 that are formed to allow the metal rod MB1 to be inserted therethrough, and a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape from an upper end portion at the left and right center. A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at approximately the center in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion 414 formed as a protrusion shorter than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414 415, and a displacement regulating portion 416 that protrudes toward the front side from the lower end portion at the left and right center.

The trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the collision member 420 when the linear motion member 410 is placed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as not to come into contact with the collision member 420. Ru.

The protrusions 414 and the lower protrusions 415 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that contacts the buffer member 352 of the fixed member 350 in the displacement direction, and this contact regulates the displacement of the linear motion member 410 (the upward displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate portion that extends from the back side end of the curved plate portion 421 in parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced. A plate portion 422 , a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422 , and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the direction in which the plate portion 422 extends, and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed at the lower end of the left and right center of the plate portion 422 in the direction of displacement of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 . A buffer member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the trapezoidal protrusion 413.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423 . That is, the cylindrical protrusion 403 serves both as a part that supports the upper end of the coil spring SP1 and as a part that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The buffer member 424 is formed from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material as a small piece with a square exterior. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the load and impact caused when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be alleviated by the characteristics of the resin material, thereby preventing the trapezoidal protrusion 413 from being damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed into a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 bored as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted. A protruding portion 432 having a circular cross section and protruding toward the back side, and a hook-shaped protruding portion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protruding portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column 405 is inserted, so that the abutting member 430 is rotatably supported by the support column 405 .

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing part 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement regulating part 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403 that can be received. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and configured to be able to be fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws inserted from the front side into through holes inside the recesses into female threads formed in the circular protrusion 403; A guide portion 354 is provided, which is configured of an inclined surface that narrows from the front side and from the left and right directions, and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The buffer member 352 is made of a highly durable and highly flexible resin material and is formed as a small piece with a square outline. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the characteristics of the resin material can reduce the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating part 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other, thereby suppressing the occurrence of damage or chipping of the displacement regulating part 416. be able to.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are provided at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 comes into contact at the end of displacement in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even if the linearly moving member 410 is upwardly displaced at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load that the linearly moving member 410 receives when stopping suddenly. can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352, 424, and the load can be distributed to multiple locations.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected to each other through the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connection recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is not possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured so that it cannot be done.

This prevents a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 becomes loose when the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300 are assembled. I can do it.

Next, explanation will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from approximately the center of the back plate toward the front side, and a back plate. A pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate, and a pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are provided below the left and right inner sides of the guiding inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protrude from the back plate portion toward the front side, and a pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends, are arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a cylindrical structure protruding from the back side at the upper left of the opening 361. cylindrical protrusion 366.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 is provided to extend from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and directs the flowing granular material 320 toward the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided towards.

The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that its protruding tip abuts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and its upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate part 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

The support column portions 365 have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the right side is formed into a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes toward the left and right outside, and the left side is formed into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that can accommodate the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw with a large diameter head to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member formed in a substantially rectangular shape in appearance, and is a support member that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and into which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical protrusion 472 that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471, and a cylindrical protrusion 472 that extends perpendicularly to the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the longitudinal direction. It includes a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along a plane.

The cylindrical protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects toward the front side, and is formed to be able to engage with the rear transmission member 460. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes. Details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is provided on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472 . That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate part 371 that covers the moving path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side, and a covering plate part 371 that suppresses the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of holding claws 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). This can prevent the cylindrical projection 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, thereby preventing the cylindrical projection 472 from disengaging from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The holding claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 between the rear side plate of the space forming member 360. This prevents fluctuations in the arrangement of electrical wiring (for example, changes in the arrangement of electrical wiring due to vibrations, etc.) and secures an entry route for other components, so as mentioned above, injection The transverse slide member 840 and wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement and rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced in a path that includes a location proximate to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable in and out of the partition member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310, and is a member formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 coaxially received with the support column portion 365 at the extending ends of the extending plate portions 485. a transmission hole 487 formed in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side and through which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted; The fastening screw is formed into a disk shape with a hole surrounding the receiving part 486, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column part 365 can be inserted. The left cover member 489 has a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are formed along the axial direction like a drill hole but are functionally formed, the details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the reciprocating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) is rotated. Although it is constructed to face the axis, it is not simply a pipe divided into pieces, but the radius and shape of the arc change depending on the left and right position. This design intention will be explained.

First, the advancing/retracting portion 481 includes a projecting portion 482 that protrudes toward the entry side at the left-right center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed such that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed to be in contact with each other), a load is applied to the component toward the left and right sides. can be given, and the constituent members can be pushed outward to the left and right.

Second, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310; Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing/retracting portion 481 is shortened at the left-right center position where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it begins to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the left and right center of the overhanging portion 482), thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem in which the advancing/retracting portion 481 is unable to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the radius of the arc is made longer near the left and right outer sides of the advance/retreat portion 481, as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right directions. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in this embodiment, the granular members 320 (see FIG. 12(a)) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 accumulate near the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

The manner in which this retention occurs is not completely uniform on the left and right sides, but may result in non-uniformity on the left and right sides. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 collide with the advance/retreat portion 481. .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is made longer in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular material 320 tends to accumulate. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing and retracting portions 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance, so that even if the granular members 320 accumulate unevenly, the granular members 320 and the retracting portions 481 can Collisions can be avoided.

Explain other design philosophies. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is recessed toward the retreat side. Thereby, the extension plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the granular members 320 that are staying.

In addition, even if the lid member 480 is placed at the end of the displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 can be removed from the concave forming portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310. By configuring the gap with the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) to be large enough to pass through, the granular material 320 can be gathered above the collision member 420.

The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the left receiving part 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving part 486b on the right side is formed in a semicylindrical shape (half pipe shape), but this is a design that takes assembly into consideration.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 28 and 31. The support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, especially on the right side, so when both the receiving parts 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 cannot support the lid member 480. In order to assemble it to the column part 365, it is necessary to divide the advancing/retracting part 481.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the cover member 480 can be moved forward and backward from the partition member 310, while being configured to be able to prevent the granular member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased in size without limit, and the degree of freedom in designing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to such an extent that it cannot pass through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, it will be impossible to move forward or backward, so accuracy is required in the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be distorted due to factors such as assembly errors.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the receiving portions 486 are made different on the left and right sides, so that it is unnecessary to divide the advancing/retracting portion 481. As for the assembly process, first, the left receiving part 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column part 365, and the cylindrical part of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving part 486a while being inserted into the support column part 365. This allows the left receiving portion 486a to be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving part 486b, the support column part 365 is arranged to face the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting the fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 is secured in the space by being supported so as not to fall off using the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column part 365. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360.

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 to 36, displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is placed at the entrance end of the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 placed at the retraction end of the displacement range. A state in which the cover member 480 is arranged is illustrated, and FIG. 35 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is oriented in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to come into contact with the left cover member 489 at a position closer to the right (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction as shown in FIG. It will be done.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c), and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmitting protrusion 473 is The left cover member 489 is designed to have a shape that allows the opening upper side surface of the left cover member 489 to come into contact with each other in the left and right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side, and a The second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and the second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in the state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the inclination in the left-right direction of the shape of the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480. Designed to.

Specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination at the abutting position of the left cover member 489 with the upper surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the abutting state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured, regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the timing at which a large load is generated, which is the timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 changes in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489 becoming smaller, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is at its maximum, which increases the possibility of overloading the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced when the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing/retracting portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is aligned with the rotation axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the dead weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the least of the biasing force is A portion of this can be offset by the own weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Specifically, the distance between the contact position of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retreating side position to the entering side position is The member 480 is configured to be longest when disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the position of contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which forms an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so that the angle of inclination is small, the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered around the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a modification of the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side toward the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressively deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), FIG. 35(b), and FIG. 36(b), the curved plate portion 312, which is arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480, is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side. be done. Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing/retracting portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction.

Note that the radius at the left-right center position of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to avoid collision of the overhanging part 482, which has the maximum entry width, with the curved plate part 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (to the extent caused by design errors for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will focus on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are engaged with each other. The transmission member 460 rotates integrally around the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. Note that, in the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is assumed to be normal rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a structure formed on the sides facing each other to ensure relative position and rigidity of each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite side. A shaped portion is formed. The details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be explained below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. . Note that the arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotational axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the front transmission member 440 includes a main body plate portion 441 having a substantially disk shape, a portion extending in the axial direction from the edge of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove on the inside thereof. A groove forming part 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening bored in the center of the main body plate part 441 to a size that allows the shaft part 362 to be inserted therethrough, and a gear formed in the main body plate part 441. A flange portion 444 covered by the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and a groove forming A transmission protrusion 446 is provided that protrudes parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side than the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming part 442 has a recessed groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding part 432 so that the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. The groove has a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates in the normal direction with the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 disposed in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove 442b in which the protrusion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove 442a with respect to the second groove 442b and having a larger diameter than the reference arc of the first groove 442a. , and a fourth groove 442d that connects the third groove 442c and the first groove 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 442b, the fourth groove part 442d has a smaller forming angle range, and the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 changes rapidly with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440. is designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a formed along the protrusion direction in a straight line connecting the center and a point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 in response to a load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction perpendicular to a straight line serving as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with the same diameter as the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440; a groove-forming part 462 that extends in the axial direction and has a groove recessed inside thereof; and a non-contact opening portion 463 formed to avoid contact with.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range where the recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the weight portion 461a and the The weight is calculated and it is formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the centers of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, so that changes in the postures of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and a rear side transmission member 460 with the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 disposed in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by normal rotation (clockwise rotation in rear view), and a first groove 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b. 462a, and a fourth groove 462d that connects the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 462b, the fourth groove part 462d has a significantly larger forming angle range (approximately 180 degrees), and the groove and the non-contact open part 463 are different from each other with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. The design is such that the distance between them changes slowly.

An example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be explained.

38, 39, 40, and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated with imaginary lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be understood.

38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows a standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. A firing standby state is illustrated in which the device 400 waits for firing timing, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state which is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes a firing effect. Although FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 immediately scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the translational member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side. Note that a state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the entry side displacement will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the performance standby state shown in FIG. 39, the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, so the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, so that the player can take his eyes off the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below it.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical protrusion 403 is in contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linearly moving member 410 is regulated by the abutting member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retraction side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole. It stops at the position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

Due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, the flow of the granular material 320 that has been splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, since the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, the guide portion 354 of the fixed member 350 (see FIG. 32) and the collision member 420 The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be accommodated unevenly.

As a result, even if, for example, a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return thereafter, the collision member 420 is Since a slope is formed on the right side that slopes downward toward the left, the granular material 320 that returns later flows to the left along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner that it rides on the granular member 320 and flows.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the left and right deviation of the granular members 320 that accumulate on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, thereby reducing the deviation in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each firing performance. can do.

Furthermore, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is placed in the middle of the displacement section, and is separated from the lower linear motion member 410 by a point with the trapezoidal protrusion 413. It's just that they are in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the amount of the gap created between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. In other words, the posture is allowed to change in a rotational manner around an axis parallel to the axis of one of the cylindrical protrusions 403.

As described above, for example, if many of the granular members 320 are biased to the right side of the collision member 420 and begin to return, the collision member 420 will change its posture in such a manner that the right side is lowered compared to the left side. However, in this case, the top of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, the granular member 320 that flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side can be easily guided to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the horizontal center position of the guide section 354 and the top position of the curved plate section 421 match when viewed from the front; It is thought that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right depends on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421, and is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right.

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the top position of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the horizontal center position of the guide part 354, and the position of the top of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right side with respect to the horizontal center position of the guide part 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left along the slope of the curved plate portion 421. This makes it easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where fewer granular members 320 remain, making it easier to distribute the granular members 320 approximately equally on the left and right sides.

Note that the change in attitude of the collision member 420 is not always allowed in the same way. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the attitude change of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is regulated, the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the production standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is a biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expands and contracts in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress changes in the posture of the collision member 420 during the period from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize the way in which the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the retention state of the granular members 320 (left and right deviation in the number of grains) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular members 320 are scattered, and then flow down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 Return to the top of the screen and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes shown in FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 to enable this state change to be performed will be described in detail below.

42(a) to 42(f) and 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, and front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the external shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutting member 430 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the external shapes are Except for the parts involved in mutual load transmission, the protruding part 414 and the lower protruding part 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, and the protruding part 432 and the hook-shaped part of the abutting member 430. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated with a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated using imaginary lines.

42 and 43, a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420, and an abutment member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) are shown as the front transmission member 440 rotates forward. ) is illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 42(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 causes the front transmission member 440 to be detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is entered, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the production standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 contacts the protrusion 414 of the translation member 410 and starts to push down the translation member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the translation member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420, causing the collision member 420 to vibrate slightly, the vibration and load will not be directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be able to be shut off.

FIG. 42(c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the translational member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the translation member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other, so that vibrations and loads caused by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 are , may be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the translational member 410, and this causes the translational member 410 to move toward the transmission point where it contacts the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

Note that the influence on the forward rotational displacement is not limited at all. Examples include an effect that causes the speed controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that impedes rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

In FIG. 42(d), the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the abutment member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The contact member 430 is not applied with a biasing force from other biasing means, and is a member whose attitude changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. From FIG. 42(d) onward, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, but the direction of displacement of the abutting member 430 is the direction in which it is displaced by its own weight. Since it is the same, the state of the load that the front transmission member 440 receives does not substantially change from the state before FIG. 42(d) in which only the translation member 410 was displaced.

FIG. 42(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position, the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 are still placed apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rotation of the abutment member 430 are The load required for changing the posture can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Thereby, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

In FIG. 42(f), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart, but from the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the attitude of the abutting member 430 is maintained (a change in attitude is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the abutment member 430, the contact between the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 will be greater than when the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 abut at speeds in opposite directions. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43(a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42(f) is illustrated for easy understanding. In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the translation member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the translation member 410 and the contact member The arrangement of each component in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to come into contact is illustrated.

Note that the state from the state shown in FIG. 43(a) to just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion portion 433 are provided with protruding portions that protrude toward the mutually opposing sides at the distal end portions of the opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress slippage at the abutment position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, and to stably bring the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 into contact. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the terminal end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this state change is caused by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Output.

That is, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the detection target of the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction. Control is performed so that it is determined that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the abutment member 430. A biasing force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in the direction of standing up the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is Displacement of the provided portion 432 is restricted by being obstructed by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (outer surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 is directed toward the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and also to restrict the displacement of the protrusion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the firing standby state, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the drive motor MT1, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1. can be improved.

For example, when driving and controlling the injection device 400 in conjunction with the display performance on the third symbol display device 81, this is a restriction on setting the length of the display performance from the firing standby state to the firing state. This is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43(c), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 starts to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 changes from the third groove part 442c, so the direction of the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is transferred to the front side. This results in deviation from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before changing from the state shown in FIG. 43(b) to the state shown in FIG. It is necessary to de-energize the

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the abutment member 430 retreats from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410, so that the restriction on the upward displacement of the translational member 410 is released. , the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is thrown upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not regulated by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the translation member 410 The biasing force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 applied via the linear motion member 410 are both Since they are configured in the same way in the upright direction, the driving force and urging force applied to the abutment member 430 can be generated in a manner that assists each other.

In FIG. 43(e), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 of the contact member 430 becomes the first groove part 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d). ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of raising the abutment member 430 during subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be inhibited due to the displacement of the abutment member 430 standing up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the abutting member 430 finishes standing up, the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is placed in the first groove part 442a, and the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is disposed in the first groove part 442a. The structure is such that the load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. This makes it easier to prevent rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being inhibited by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

From the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of forwardly rotating the front transmission member 440, and when it is detected that the detected part 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the performance standby state, and the MPU 221 ( A control program (see Figure 4) has been designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of control of the injection device 400, firing execution control is described in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated once in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state of the injection device 400. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and an effect is executed in which the granular member 320 is scattered.

Since this effect scatters the granular members 320 in the player's field of view, it is flashy and can improve the player's attention. If there is a jackpot at the timing near the end of the following long reach, the player's interest can be improved by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular members 320 to create an effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a jackpot, which is not preferable.

In addition, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (missing), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will indicate that the long reach during execution will result in a jackpot. This means that the player will be able to figure out whether the game will be a hit or a miss, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a miss, after the injection device 400 is put into the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. The injection device 400 is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. can be done.

In this case, before the abutment member 430 starts to be displaced in the direction of standing up (see FIG. 42(e)), the translational member 410 is pushed down to bring the translational member 410 and the abutment member 430 into contact. (See FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid friction between the translational member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

In addition, from FIG. 42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 prevents the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in an assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the linear motion member 410 from splashing the collision member 420, so the injection device 400 is placed in a standby state (see FIG. 42(a)) without performing the effect in which the granular member 320 is scattered. can be restored to.

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

Thereby, both the production control for scattering the granular members 320 and the production control for not scattering the granular members 320 can be executed using the same preliminary operation accompanying the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand whether the game is a jackpot or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the outcome due to differences in drive sounds.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. . This makes it difficult to determine from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the drive direction from a state where the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven. .

Therefore, the driving motor MT1 is controlled to drive in advance of the timing of notification of success or failure in the performance, and even if a driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player understands the success or failure result. be able to.

As a result, drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the success/failure notification timing without running the risk of the player being able to grasp the success or failure result from the driving sound. The stop timing can be varied. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped sufficiently before the firing state, it will not interfere with the subsequent performance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates contrary to control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, changes in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460 are shown. Illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 44(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 42(a)) is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the lid member 480 receives a biasing force toward the retracting side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is If no countermeasure is taken, the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 may be affected by the transmission to the rear transmission member 460.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the circular curved surface and the arcuate surface are in contact with each other, so the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, since the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the third groove 462c of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the attitude change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the attitude change rotationally drives the rear side transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical protrusion 472 upward. The urging force of torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of transmission arm member 470.

In this embodiment, the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are as follows. Since both have the same configuration in the clockwise direction, the driving force and biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually complementary manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contacting each other.

Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when there is no need to displace the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of fatigue accumulated in the transmission arm member 470. .

In FIG. 44(e), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the end of displacement on the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), a firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is established. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the retracting side, and is configured to avoid collision with the granular member 320 (see FIG. 41) to be injected.

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through a firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side and returns to the performance standby state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after the execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the abutment member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43(f) (see e)). Therefore, of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be extremely reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Most of the drive force can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, so that sufficient driving force can be ensured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutment member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction with the linear motion member 410 disposed at the upward displacement end position (for example, the production standby state, see FIG. 42(a)), and the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction. A state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a limit is set on the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, when driving in the forward rotational direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the front transmission member 440 can be driven continuously without being restricted in displacement, whereas when driving in the reverse rotational direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven with the displacement regulated, there is a risk that the drive motor MT1 will generate heat and be damaged, so in this embodiment, the drive control is limited to a direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the opposite direction. By providing this, damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 over time.

Note that in FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of normal rotation from the performance standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

In addition, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the performance standby state as a reference (angle is 0 degrees), and each of the above-mentioned components corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change toward the left in FIG. 46. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the opposite direction before entering the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is as follows: The displacement speed is slower than that when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Note that after the firing state is exceeded, since the collision member 420 has already risen, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted midway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees) can be determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, there is a possibility that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees). If there is, that is, if the detected part 445 is not arranged at the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of forward rotation. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to temporarily return to the performance standby state, and thereafter control the execution of each performance. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and causing the drive motor MT1 to generate heat after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. I can do it.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (the angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which the rotation speed is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized within 2 seconds after firing, by controlling the drive so that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), particles on the way down can be It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4x speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entrance side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts flowing down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is disposed in the advancing direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so the granular members 320 can be collected toward the left and right center along the shape of the lid member 480. I can do it. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the lid member 480 is displaced toward the retraction side, and the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes in which the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the ejected granular members 320 (the arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be made different. , the performance effect can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 illustrate the effect standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 illustrate the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a production member 700 configured to be able to move up and down in the center position in the left and right direction and capable of producing light emission, and hemispherical lights fixedly arranged apart to the left and right of the production member 700. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emitting performance using the performance member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) toward the player, and a performance that makes the player visually recognizable is performed. be able to.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the presentation member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is located on the front side of the rear plate 611, but in FIGS. , is conveniently arranged on the back side of the rear plate section 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated main body member 601 that is fastened and fixed to a bottom wall 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 disposed on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlock with each other in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the intermediate member. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected at the upper arm member 620 and change their posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. a transmission gear 650 which is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and rotatably supported by the main body member 601; and an annular portion is assembled to the main body member 601; It includes a torsion spring SP3 that applies an upward biasing force to the upper arm member 620, and a presentation member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed into a left and right long plate shape, and has a pair of guide holes 602 which are long holes on the left and right arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 which are cylindrical and protrude in both the front and rear directions from a left and right symmetrical position. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 protruding from the left side toward the back side, An arc-shaped hole 606 is formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove is formed in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side with the detection groove facing toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 therethrough.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted into a support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620, and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. By screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, the upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off.

The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the back side is inserted into the wound body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by the overhang 601a that extends in a dogleg shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed by the biased part 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions to push down the biased portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw with a large diameter head is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole through which the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 passes toward the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is located at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in a production standby state or at any other position. It is configured such that it can be determined whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. A front plate part 612 is formed on the left and right sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end parts and is formed to protrude to the front side from the rear plate part 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate part 612 so as to be able to emit light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613.

The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and blocks the view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. The back side of the rear plate part 611 has a dimension that is slightly longer than the front and back width of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620 and extends toward the back side, avoiding the movement locus of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620, and abuts the main body member 601 in a plane. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

As a result, it is possible to stabilize the fastened state of the rear plate part 611 to the main body member 601, and also to make it possible to displace the upper arm member 620 in the space divided by the rear plate part 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, a change in the posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such as bending with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate part 612 is a plate-shaped part that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and configured so that the structural parts of these members are not visible to the player. A pair of sliding surfaces 612a are formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate part of the board, and a wiring passageway is formed as a recessed part opened to the back side in the plate part extending from the left upper end toward the back side. A recessed portion 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed to have low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed midway in the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is approximately a semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact, the state is point contact. It is configured so that Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the front side exceeds an allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are configured to come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Ru.

In this embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set based on the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) and the presentation member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a size that the presentation member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a comes into contact with the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side, so that the presentation member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is brought into contact with the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

Note that the sliding portion 612a disposed on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, whereas the sliding portion 612a disposed on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding parts 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a planar shape, and the shape of the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of this embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portions protrude toward the back side (the design portion on the front side is The sliding portion 612a may be arranged so that it protrudes toward the back side due to the influence of being placed closer to the back side, or the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured with a similar planar shape as in the left side portion of this embodiment. good.

In addition, the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the cylindrical protrusion 654. The forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screw that is fixed. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, thereby making it possible to avoid generating a large load locally.

The wiring passage recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electric wiring to pass through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the back case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then goes to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. The user is guided and passed through the presentation member 700.

In this way, by making the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from above, the elongated lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction as the elongated lower arm member 630 is displaced. Even when the electrical wiring is displaced by a distance that is approximately half the width of the left and right width of the back case 510 (in this embodiment), it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from becoming loose and hanging downward.

The hemispherical illumination device 613 is a device that includes a hemispherical lens member and irradiates light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side of the device to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 is directed in the front-rear direction. can. For example, by making it easier for the player who is viewing the center of the third symbol display device 81 to see the light, or by shining the light onto the effect member 700 in the overhanging or enlarged state, it is made easier to make the player notice the light. You can

The upper arm member 620 has a support hole 621 formed in the shape of a long plate and configured as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear part 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be able to mesh with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at the longitudinal end. The connecting portion 623 is configured to be able to pass through the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the transmission gear 650, and the connecting portion 623 is formed only on the left upper arm member 620 as a long hole with a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650. The upper arm member 620 includes a transmission hole 624 and a biased portion 625 that protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621, and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion that interrupts the transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

The biased portion 625 is a portion that is engaged with one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3, and increases the biasing force in the direction of upwardly displacing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the biased portion 625. Arm member 620 receives.

Furthermore, the engagement between the tip hook-shaped portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 can restrict the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed of a long plate member that is substantially bilaterally symmetrical, except that the left arm has a path for passing electrical wiring, and has a circular shape that projects from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 in the front and back direction. The support hole 633 has a circular support hole 633, and a plurality of arcuate holes 634 are formed through the support hole 633 along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633.

The cylindrical protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting part 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large diameter head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 631 from the back side. Lower arm member 630 is supported by upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via a collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is inserted into the female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 632 on the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported with respect to the main body member 601 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head from the lower arm member 601.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the presentation member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker on the lower side than on the upper side. As a result, when the effect member 700 is placed at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported in a thick part so as to be held from the left and right sides, thereby effectively preventing the effect member 700 from changing its posture to a forward-leaning position. can be regulated.

In addition, the lower arm member 630 on the left side includes an arrangement portion 635 that is formed open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin lid portion 636 is provided on the side and functions as a lid for the placement portion 635.

The arrangement portion 635 includes a proximal through hole 635a that is bored in the front-rear direction at the end on the side of the cylindrical protrusion 632.

The base end side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side, is guided to the arrangement part 635, and exits from the arrangement part 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the performance standby state, a lower meat part 637 disposed below the boundary is recessed toward the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side with the tangential line as the boundary is formed as a thin plate part.

In the right lower arm member 630, this lower flesh portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction. Further, in the left lower arm member 630, the lower flesh portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring therein, and is disposed as a lid on the guide path. This is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin lid portion 636.

The electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement part 635 and the thin lid part 636) and is guided to the production member 700 side, so it is connected to the members disposed before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, This can prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to entanglement or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

In addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 that is assembled from the front side, the lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 that is made of the same material and is assembled from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 at the front and rear via this pressing member PC1. Note that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other and have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back side, they come into contact and limit the displacement. This function is similar to that of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has pressing members PC1 assembled on both its front and rear sides, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and reduce the resistance that occurs to vertical displacement when the displacement is limited.

The tip of the pressing member PC1, which is assembled from the back side, extending toward the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the end of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. Thereby, even if the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back side to such an extent that it comes into contact with the main body member 601, it is possible to avoid the upper arm member 620 coming into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front and rear.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-back direction. For example, in this embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are located in the front and back. Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 or the drive displacement of the presentation member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body part 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear part 652 carved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main body part 651, and a semicircular main body part A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft part 605 can be inserted on the central axis of the semicircular shape of the semicircular body part 651, and a support hole 653 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the outer diameter end of the semicircular body part 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical protrusion 654, a detection plate part 655 formed in the circumferential end of the semicircular main body part 651 in a plate shape with a thickness that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, and the detection plate part 655. 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side.

The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 as the transmission gear 650 rotates. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw with a large diameter head is inserted into the female thread formed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so that they cannot fall off, and forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state (see FIG. 21(a)), the transmission gear 650 is connected to the displacement regulation device 180. The structure is such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a portion that needs to be able to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, by forming the portions where engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall, it is possible to reduce the material cost required for the transmission gear 650.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the production member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production member 700. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the production member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate part 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate part 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported rotatably with respect to the functional plate part 720, and a rotating plate 730 between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate part 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 that is arranged and configured to be able to move in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate section 720 are connected to the function plate section 720. The drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function board section 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front end of the plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 and are respectively fastened and fixed to the effect standby state. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 that are combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting production device 750.

The plate-like main body 710 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 that protrude from symmetrical positions toward the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 protrude from a position on an arc centered at 711 on the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the upper arc hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions. 711, a wiring guide member 714 provided below the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing member provided on the back surface of the plate. It includes a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1 guided to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement part 635 and the thin lid part 636 to the front side through the lower arm member 630. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by a wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 will come into contact with other members or be seen by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface that slopes downward as the upper surface goes toward the back side. It also has the function of softening the contact between the two.

That is, the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610 when the production member 700 is displaced upwardly, and when the production member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even if the wire guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side during upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wire guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed to be slidable on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of upward displacement of the presentation member 700, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower part can come into contact with the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring this, the positions where the load for maintaining the posture of the presentation member 700 is generated can be separated.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional board section 720. Note that in the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate part 720 is formed from a resin material into a substantially plate shape, and includes a cylindrical part 721 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical part 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement part 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be placed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted therethrough. A motor fixing part 724 that has an opening and is formed to be able to fasten and fix the drive motor MT3, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical part 721, and a radial long hole 725a for the radial long hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (in this embodiment, 5 sets) consisting of a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b intersecting each other at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five locations) extension plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extension plate portion 726 from the back side end of the flat portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, one pair for each of the extension plate parts 726) protruding from each other, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side. 728.

The cylindrical part 721 is arranged so that its rear end comes into contact with the plate-like main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 with the internal through-hole communicating with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710. be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the threaded portion is screwed into a female thread formed at the end of the back side of the cylindrical part 721.

As a result, the functional plate part 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the center thereof, and in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor placement part 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing part 724. This allows the detection sensor SC7 and drive motor MT3 to be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole that allows the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 to project out to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 is exposed. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 to be arranged, and extends along a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole-like radial hole 725a is formed, and a long hole-like hole is formed on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole 725a along a straight line perpendicular to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b are formed.

The radial elongated hole 725a and the intersecting elongated hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the assembled arrangement state. The details will be explained later.

The columnar protruding portion 728 is configured such that its rear end can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side is screwed into a female thread formed on the tip side of the columnar protrusion 728, so that the functional plate part 720 is connected to the plate-like main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar protrusion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730. That is, the columnar protruding portion 728 serves both as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730.

56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is formed from a resin material into a substantially disk shape, and includes a cylindrical portion 731 that protrudes toward the front side in a cylindrical shape at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 are formed along a coaxial arc shape, and a long through hole is formed at a position that is on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. The guide hole 733 includes a plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in this embodiment), and an extending claw portion 734 extending radially outward in a claw shape at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733.

The cylindrical part 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical part 721 of the function plate part 720, and is extended from the front end to the front side and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate part 720 to the detection sensor SC7. The detection target portion 731a is formed to be able to enter the detection groove of the drive motor MT3, and the gear portion 731b is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar protruding portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 at a little less than about 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape, and include a small diameter circular arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731, and a small diameter circular arc portion 733a that is closer to the center of the cylindrical portion 731 than the small diameter circular arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arcuate portion 733b having a long length from the axis, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arcuate portion 733b and the small-diameter arcuate portion 733a.

Although the form of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, it is formed such that the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes in accordance with the position. Ru. In particular, in this embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle near the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

This makes it possible to reduce the resistance that occurs when transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the presentation effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extending claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise when viewed from the front, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. It includes a back side claw part 734a and a front side claw part 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw part 734a. In this embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into a rear claw portion 734a and a front claw portion 734b at a substantially midway point in the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extending claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw part 734b and the back side claw part 734a respectively correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b whose protruding tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 are different in the front and back. The guide is guided inward in the radial direction, details of which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the extending claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension length of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is longer than that of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side. is formed. In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be alleviated.

That is, even if the telescoping members 740 have the same shape, the relationship between the direction in which they can be displaced and the direction of gravity is different, so the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each telescoping member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. 740, the first guided protrusion 743b may be disposed, and the radially inward guidance by the extending claw portion 734 may fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance inward in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so that the extending claw portion 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed short, thereby reducing material costs and downsizing the rotary plate 730. I can do it.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. Note that in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), among the five sets of telescoping displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set disposed at the top is shown in a state where they are arranged collectively. 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as it would be if it were to be discretized.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of elongated members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane on which the elongated members can be displaced is also referred to as the front layer plane, and the plane on which the plurality of elongated members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as the rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 includes a pair of base end members 741 which are arranged in two layers, front and back, and are relatively rotatably supported at the lower end, and a pair of base end members 741 are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the base end member 741. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 that are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the first elongated member 742, and an upper end of the second elongated member 742. The distal end adjustment member 744 has a guide elongated hole 744a that extends linearly so as to be guided.

The proximal member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The proximal end member 741 includes a transmission protrusion 741a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side, and a circular protrusion 741a that protrudes from the back surface where the cylindrical protrusion 741a protrudes toward the front side. A guided protrusion 741b that projects in a columnar shape and is inserted through the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end of the first elongated member 742 that projects in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. A guided protrusion 741c is inserted into a through hole drilled in the guide portion 741c.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotary plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotary plate 730 rotates.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate part 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. Note that the guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is relatively rotatably supported on a longitudinal axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower end of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. A guided protrusion 742a is provided which is inserted into the upper end of the proximal end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate part 725, and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side from the upper end of the member on the front layer plane side. A pair of cylinders protrudes from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to a point flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter about the width of the member, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the protrusion toward the front side. It includes a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a substantially middle position of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed inward in the radial direction due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second elongated member 743 to be inserted. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in the shape of holes, and a second guided protrusion 744b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side.

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip disposed in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front claw part 734b of the extending claw part 734 of the rotary plate 730, Due to this guidance, a load directed inward in the radial direction is applied (see FIG. 57).

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip that is not circular in shape, and is inclined as the rotary plate 730, which has its rotation center on the transmitted protrusion 741a side, is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, the resistance at the time of contact with the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 can be avoided from becoming excessive. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged collectively and when they are arranged separately, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement members 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer ends or inner ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjustment member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (longitudinal arrangement) of the tip adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjustment member 744, extends from the fastening portion to the front side, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side that covers the telescopic displacement member 740. A generally triangular member in front view, which has a shaped portion that extends from the extending tip parallel to the plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) on which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to hide the decorative member 752 on the back side from visibility by pasting colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets on the front and back sides, and at the right end part, a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet is attached. An extended plate portion 761 is provided which extends in a plate shape to the right in such a manner that a plate surface is formed.

Like the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate part 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet pasted on its front and back sides, and is a shield placed on the right side (next in the clockwise direction) when viewed from the front. It is arranged to face the back side of the left end of the design member 760, and is configured to abut when the shielding design member 760 shifts toward the back side, thereby suppressing the shift.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be shifted toward the back side of the main body of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 move in the direction of displacement (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is arranged farther away from the main body of the shielding design member 760, but at least the dimension that the shielding design member 760 is allowed to shift in the front and back direction of the shielding design member 760 is. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body of the shielding design member 760 are brought into contact along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Moreover, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface with the normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that moves closer to the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design members 760 are assembled with the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the uppermost shielding design member 760 being slightly shifted toward the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position (see FIG. 63), the position of the shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is changed along the front slope of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. Misalignment can be corrected. Thereby, the relative positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 in the front and back direction can be easily aligned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is such that the member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , a member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate parts of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect in a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted to a posture in which it is disposed toward the front.

Since the structure of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extension plate part 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is more likely to tilt toward the front position.

By tilting the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back side of the shielding design member 760 that is disposed opposite to the extension plate portion 761 side. By displacing the shielding design member 760 to the collective arrangement position in this state, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane ) can be avoided.

In the state where five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged together (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are placed next to each other on the left (adjacent in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses displacement toward the back side.

According to this configuration, the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 is prevented from shifting toward the front side by abutting the shielding design member 760 on the right (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress positional displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking movement between the rotary plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional board section 720. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotary plate 730 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and an example of the arrangement of the external shapes of the transmitted protrusion 741a, guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is illustrated. Ru.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescoping members 740 are arranged in groups (see FIG. 58), and FIG. 61 shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated approximately 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescoping members 740 are separated. (See FIG. 59).

In this embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the guided protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by being displaced in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the member 730 .

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate section 720, so the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be able to be displaced so as to be exposed, the details will be described later.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 53 and 54. The light emitting device 750 includes an illumination board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the center of the illumination board 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape protruding toward the front side, so that an area for disposing the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. A drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged inside the opening 751a. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring, but this limits the area in which the LED as a light emitting means can be placed, so from the viewpoint of light emitting performance, the smaller the opening 751a is, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring. desirable.

Since no LED can be provided in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, this embodiment deals with this by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light transmitting member 752a made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material, and a light transmitting member 752a that is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a and has a mirror-like visible surface (for example, coated with silver plating). ) a mirror surface member 752b.

An opening is formed in the center of the light transmitting member 752a, and the center of the mirror member 752b is closed, so that the mirror member 752b can be placed at the position where the drive motor MT3 is placed when viewed from the front. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the player can see reflected light from light irradiation from other directions (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical illumination device 613). , it is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized as dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. Note that illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted in FIGS. 62 to 64 for ease of understanding.

62 shows the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extended state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Illustrated.

Note that the state in the middle of descent shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half of the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the performance standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission section 624a and the margin section 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the cylindrical protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission section 624a and is placed at a position where the downward displacement of the presentation member 700 can be started is the presentation standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600.

This performance standby state suggests, for example, that the performance member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the performance member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10. This is a state that can be switched according to the execution of the suggested effect, and before the suggested effect is executed, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged on the side of the margin 624b.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that extends continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and in the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-back direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated. Displacement of the presentation member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is a effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not ultimately displaced downward, in this embodiment, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to .

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the presentation member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. Drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

Thereby, when a performance suggesting that the performance member 700 moves downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent performance regarding the performance member 700 due to a difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The allowance portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when rotating the drive motor MT2 in the direction of raising the presentation member 700. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. The displacement is simply sliding along 624b.

No matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is placed in the margin 624b, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is lowered, so that the rotation allows the transmission gear 650 to be stopped immediately when the detected plate part 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 can be set to a large value without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set high.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 will be directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it contacts the cylindrical protrusion 654.

Further, even if the rising speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is regulated by the upper arm member 620, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the performance standby state. It is set larger from the mid-descent state to the extended state compared to the mid-descent state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 as the effect member 700 moves downward, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually perceive as if the displacement speed of the presentation member 700 is increasing rapidly, and the presentation effect of the vertical displacement of the presentation member 700 is can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the production member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, for ease of understanding, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted.

65(a) and 65(b) illustrate the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 67 illustrates, The extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, before the performance indicating that the performance member 700 is displaced downward is executed, the drive motor MT2 is stopped while the detected plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. At this point, the drive motor MT2 is drive-controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to a production standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven in the direction of upwardly displacing the production member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling to release the transmission gear 650, it is possible to stop the transmission gear 650 at a position that has even slightly entered the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the performance standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, but regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to be stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be located at the end of the margin portion 624b.

This allows the transmission gear 650 to be stopped at a position where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. In this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Note that even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly shifted, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, after pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67 to bring the displacement regulating device 180 into the regulating state (see FIG. 15(c)), the transmission gear 650 is Even if the rotation of the transmission gear 650 is controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 through drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that there is a displacement defect in the transmission gear 650 because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. I can do it.

Based on this determination, it is possible to notify the abnormality by displaying an error message indicating that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is defective in displacement on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulating state.

As a result, information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be conveyed to the clerk at the gaming machine store by utilizing notifications such as error displays regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin equal to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the upper arm member 700 upward is too high, the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be too high, causing the lower arm member 630 to displace the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), so downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. Therefore, when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620, the vertical load at the contact position can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side shape of the lower flesh portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 The contact area when the upper arm member 620 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a large load being locally applied to the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or bent.

In this way, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, so that the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the presentation member 700 upward is excessive. Therefore, even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is regulated by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above will cause the lower arm to move upward. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state by the driving force of the drive motor MT2 against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. corresponds to the situation.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are disposed at the ends of the arcuate holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the presentation member 700 (the degree to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the performance member 700 to a higher degree in the performance standby state or the extended state compared to the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation around the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, if the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the cylindrical protrusion 711 on the right side. Posture may change.

In this embodiment, the presentation member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical protrusion 711, but in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711. The displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the presentation member 700 changes its posture points in the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the production member 700 may visibly occur without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the extended state, when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. Thereby, the posture change of the presentation member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture to a discernible extent.

In addition, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the right side are disposed at the end positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side to It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630, as described above.

Similarly, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630, as described above.

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the presentation member 700 in the rotational direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the front-back direction) but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also by an auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711, Since the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 can be connected in three positions (up and down) by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the direction of tilting of the presentation member 700 can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed above the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the base side of the arcuate hole 634), the tilting of the production member 700 is prevented. The elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in posture in the direction.

Furthermore, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the pressing member PC1 is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when a load due to a change in the posture of the production member 700 is applied to the elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the direction of deflection along the elongated direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that restricts displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent changes in the posture of the presentation member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower side) of the cylindrical protrusion 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, so that the effect member 700 can be lowered. It is possible to suppress posture changes in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

In this embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-like main body 710 of the presentation member 700. In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

This makes it possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in such a manner that it falls forward centering on the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-back direction. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture centering on the connecting portion in such a manner that it falls backward.

That is, even if there is a possibility that multiple types of posture changes may occur in the presentation member 700, the front-back displacement of the presentation member 700 is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, it can respond to any change in posture.

This prevents the performance member 700 from rubbing against or colliding with the division member 310 even when the front-to-back distance between the performance member 700 and the division member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) is narrowed. Since this can be avoided, damage to the presentation member 700, deterioration of the designed portion, and reduction in visibility (reduction in transparency) due to damage or scratches on the partition member 310 can be made difficult to occur.

In a state where the presentation member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, excessive displacement of upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and production member 700 can be prevented by simply accumulating driving force in transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the extended state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force that slightly exceeds the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing upward and displacing. It's in control.

Thereby, the presentation member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, to a size that allows the presentation member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when starting to displace the effect member 700 upward, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load from being applied to the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the upward displacement, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 should not start to be displaced upward due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the drive motor MT2 starts), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement has started.

Thereby, the load placed on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced compared to the case where the production member 700 in a stopped state is upwardly displaced.

65 to 67, changes in the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electrical wiring DK1 is illustrated with hidden lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid part 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the circular arc hole 634, and is guided inside the wiring guide member 714, It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, tension in the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the production member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do that. Thereby, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, so that displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed into an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when displacing the effect member 700 upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. The arrangement is such that the DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

Thereby, the electrical wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and taken out from the wiring guide member 714, and the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably changed.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed in the arcuate hole 634, which is disposed on the front side of the thin lid part 636 and is mostly hidden by the thin lid part 636, is in an overhanging state. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided into the arcuate hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700, it is necessary to screw a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712 (or remove it).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Thereby, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 and other constituent members from being damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance with the production member 700 being placed at a halfway position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) of the telescopic displacement member 740 of the presentation member 700 due to a change in state will be explained. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

68 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the middle of descending, the effecting member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow enlarged displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the size of the presentation member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, so the amount of attitude change allowed for the presentation member 700 from the perspective of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be made larger.

In the middle of the enlarged displacement of the presentation member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700, and the light transmitting member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700. 752a is placed at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LEDs etc. arranged on the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a, and also to improve the visibility of the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror member 752b, the presentation effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

For example, when the mirror surface member 752b is not irradiated with light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the mirror surface member 752b is colored with the ground color of the shielding design member 760 (in this embodiment, red). can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is a mixture of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. It can be made in different colors. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping the shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between forward and reverse directions in small increments.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of expanded displacement up to the halfway position, as shown in FIG. 744 is set at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 744a. Thereby, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While making it possible to achieve such a displacement, when the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a group or when the shielding design members 760 are expanded and displaced to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second elongated member 743 By arranging the positions at both ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned to its original position (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position that is allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the position may be slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or it may be a position slightly before the position at which the maximum displacement occurs.

Here, in a state where the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the assembled arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized as overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely when viewed from the front), the extended plate portion 761 is Since the portions 761 play the role of filling the gaps between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to visually recognize to the players that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, like the main body of the shielding design member 760, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate part 761, so the red color of the extension plate part 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extension plate portion 761 or the shielding design member 760, it may be difficult to distinguish.

Note that, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly shifted from the assembled arrangement state by painting the extension plate portion 761 in another color (for example, gold), etc. The extension plate portions 761 that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the light transmitting member 752a is formed from a colorless and light transmitting resin material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extension plate portions 761 from the assembled arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are not shielded. Since the shielding design members 760 are visually recognized in red like the design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out, and the light emitting effect is The performance effect can be improved.

70 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is shown in an extended state and the effect member 700 is shown in an enlarged state. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the extended state, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to expand and displace until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the presentation member 700 when viewed from the front becomes maximum, and the amount of change in posture allowed for the presentation member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22) becomes the minimum. Note that the measures for suppressing changes in the posture of the presentation member 700 are as described above.

In the enlarged state of the presentation member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the appearance reflected on the mirror member 752b can be changed from the case where the presentation member 700 is disposed at a position midway through the enlarged displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760, and to make the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b easily visible to the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 can be visually recognized even in a control mode in which the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. The color of the light visible to the player can be changed over time.

To be more specific, for example, when white light is irradiated from the illuminated board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of expansion, while the color of the shielding design member 760 is visible as the expansion is displaced. The color of the character 760 becomes weaker (the range narrows), and the background color (silver) of the mirror member 752b becomes easier to see at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

In this embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, but are controlled in a state where the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , and is controlled to execute an enlarged displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect members 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect members 700 are arranged in a group. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other structural members and configuring the structure so that problems with displacement do not occur due to collisions with other structural members, the enlarged displacement may be It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for easy understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. , the rotating plate 730 is shown rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the presentation member 700 are dispersed at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. A state in which it has been expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. 72(b), , the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is disposed in the middle of the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side has started contacting the rear claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. A state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the rear claw part 734a of the rotary plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement mode of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 is different from that of the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the parts.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side are placed close to the rotating plate 730 side due to their own weight, while the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates due to its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotary plate 730 to an extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the assembled position. Therefore, the timing at which the five shielding design members 760 reach the assembled arrangement state is not simultaneous, and at least the upper three shielding design members 760 are earlier than the lower two shielding design members 760.

Thereby, the performance members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 forcefully reach the assembled arrangement state, so that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early breakage.

On the other hand, in the case where the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state as in this embodiment, Since the self-weight is generated in a direction opposing the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed and cut by the rear claw portion 734a, and is brought into the assembled state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjustment member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw part 734b.

In FIG. 75, a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the diagram shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 has been rotated counterclockwise in rear view to a terminal position where the columnar protrusion 728 of the functional plate part 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the presentation members 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear claw portion 734a abuts the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 Displacement in the outward direction is regulated.

In addition, the surface of the front claw portion 734b on the central axis side comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, thereby restricting the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b come into contact with each other in the radial direction with the front and rear width in the protruding direction, so that the arrangement of the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744 can be adjusted. It can stabilize your posture.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726. During this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 comes into contact with the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotation direction. (The closer the clustered arrangement state is, the more it is inclined so as to protrude toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjustment member 744 is sandwiched between the extension plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730, as the rotary plate 730 rotates and the production members 700 approach the assembled arrangement state, the tip The tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotary plate 730 from increasing excessively, the pinching load is applied to the tip adjustment member 744 in the front-rear direction in a manner that gradually increases, thereby improving the front-rear position and posture of the tip adjustment member 744. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design members 760 in the front-rear direction, and the shielding design members 760 can be arranged in close contact with each other without gaps in the assembled state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), it will be explained that the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configurations of the shielding design members 760 are all the same, and the configurations of the telescopic displacement members 740 that displace the shielding design members 760 are also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extension plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed at the top, the right side, FIG. 74 (b)) is configured to be easily inclined in posture so that it is placed on the rear side compared to the opposite side.

This is due to the manner in which the second elongated member 743 is formed, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjustment member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is lower than the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift toward the clockwise direction (left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 placed at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, in the rotary plate 730, the extending claw portion 734 is disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is arranged counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b or the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b is Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the presentation members 700 are arranged together.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of state changes of the presentation member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is placed at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). , the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a change in attitude can be caused to eliminate (correct) the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760.

That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate part 761 come into contact (collision). ), while eliminating (correcting) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the shielding design member 760 can be easily avoided. The plate portions disposed at the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush, making it easier to create a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the assembled arrangement state.

Note that the state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 has occurred to a maximum. Furthermore, the configuration is such that a posture shift opposite to the posture shift shown in FIG. 74(b) is unlikely to occur due to the front-back arrangement of the second elongated member 743. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduction side wall portion when the tip adjustment member 744 is enlarged or reduced. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extension plate part 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is adjusted by coming into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction side end of the displacement range. Posture deviations can be corrected.

As a result, not only can the posture be corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjustment member 744 reaches the reduced side end of the displacement range. can.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be explained.

The displacement and rotation unit 800 is a pair of units that are arranged symmetrically and are configured with mutually symmetrical shapes. Therefore, below, the configuration of the left displacement and rotation unit 800 will be described, and the description of the right displacement and rotation unit 800 will be as follows. Omitted. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and a metal plate portion 810 fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate part 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 inserted through and configured to be slidable in the left and right direction. A transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced; A wiring arm member 870 is rotatably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and a wiring guide member 880 that guides the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate part 810 has a pair of both-end fixing parts 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide part 812 formed so as to be able to guide a transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide section 813 formed in a groove shape and capable of guiding the cylindrical protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide section 813. A falling-off prevention plate 814 is provided on the back side to prevent falling off.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate part 821, a wall part 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate part 821 to the back side, and a circular movement from the approximate center of the area surrounded by the wall part 822 to the back side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 that protrudes in a columnar shape, omitted portions 824a and 824b that are large enough to allow insertion of a connector portion of electrical wiring and in which the formation of a wall portion is omitted, and a left end portion of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 are formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is provided) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod insertion portion through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted is formed at the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 are formed (or a cylindrical member is arranged) and are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. A falling-off prevention member 827 that can be configured to be able to fall off, a shaft support 828 that is formed in a columnar shape to protrude from the back side of the flat plate portion 821 and that can pivotally support the second-stage pinion 861, and A support protrusion 829 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the left side in FIG. 79 is provided.

The wall portion 822 is a portion that forms a region on the inside in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced, and is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring. The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening, and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a recessed portion opened to the back side.

The metal rod insertion part 825 has an upper part extending in a plate shape toward the back side, and has an upper detection sensor SC8 and a lower detection sensor fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be disposed in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body 831 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body 831. An insertion hole 832 is formed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that can be screwed into the plate, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed, and the rear surface is located in an area constituted by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It includes a lid-shaped part 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear part 834 in which gear teeth are formed linearly in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body part 831.

The cylindrical protrusion 823 has both the role of a part into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed, and the role of a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is moved up and down in the vertical direction. This causes the vertical slide member 820 to move up and down.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side and constitutes a guide route for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and has a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847 An illumination board 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. a wing-like member 854 rotatably supported by the shaft; and an intermediary member 857 that is fitted into the opening of the wing-like member 854 from the front side in order to match the center opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the center opening of the intermediary member 857 projects from the back side.

The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the back side, a drive gear MG5 thereof arranged on the front side, a rod arrangement part 842 where the metal rod MB3 is arranged, and a bar arrangement part 842 on the lower side of the rod arrangement part 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are carved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the horizontal displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electric wiring to detour. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other structural members, but the details will be described later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing-like member 854 and a drive gear MG5, which are formed so as to be able to mesh with each other, are assembled from different front and rear directions.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 that is recessed toward the back side and has a size that can receive the wing-like member 854, and a cylindrical receiving portion 848 that protrudes from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. cylindrical protrusion 849.

The receiving part 848 includes a through-hole part 848a that is formed in a manner that the shape overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Expose to a position that is visible when viewed from the rear.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and as the drive motor MT5 rotates, driving force is transmitted and the wing-like member 854 is rotationally controlled. This rotational drive of the wing-like member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the route forming member 882 is designed so that it can be performed even in the performance standby state.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a formed at its tip. This is a shaped portion that facilitates maintaining the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

The illumination board 850 includes a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an irregularly shaped opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and the irregularly shaped opening 851. A front light emitting means 852a is composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. are arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illumination board 850. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be placed inside the irregularly shaped opening 851, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 is arranged on the back side of the irregularly shaped opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the irregularly shaped opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thereby, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illumination board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily brought into mesh with each other.

The front light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the front side near the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 along the arrow D8a.

The back light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the light can travel toward the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, the back surface of the circular member 847 is densely formed with a plurality of elongated uneven shapes that are formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854, so that the player On the other hand, arcuate (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player can easily see the light without disposing an LED or the like whose optical axis faces in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 on the front side of the illumination board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be shifted to the radial direction. In other words, while using the illuminated substrate 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

Thereby, without increasing the size of the illumination board 850, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized on the radially outer side of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-like member 854 rotates at high speed, the back side of the wing-like member 854 becomes a shadow, which may make it difficult to effectively produce light emission in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is thought to be effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, but for this purpose, it is necessary to increase the area where the LEDs and the like are arranged. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the size of the illumination board 850 is maintained smaller than the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, and only the visible position of the light is moved radially outward from the rotation trajectory of the wing-like member 854. It can be displaced. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance without increasing the manufacturing cost.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is made of a light-opaque resin material and is coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform a production in which the appearance of the light changes between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853, with the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by emitting blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and emitting red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light can be distinguished. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the front-rear direction in the center thereof, and a circular opening 854a extending radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at intermediate positions between adjacent blade portions 854b. and.

The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-like member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing-like member 854 is not provided. The posture of the wing-like member 854 is controlled by the length of the drive time. In this configuration, the wing-like member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis and the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing idle rotation after the power supply to the drive motor MT5 is removed, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the wing-like member 854 assumed by the drive time and the actual posture of the wing-like member 854. Note that the drive motor MT5 may be configured as a stepping motor so that the attitude of the wing-like member 854 can be detected.

The intermediary member 857 is formed to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be made rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center toward the back side, a radial protrusion 858b that protrudes radially outward from the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body. A design protruding portion 858c is provided to protrude upward from the base.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 with the radial protrusion 858b entering the notch 849a, and is inserted from the back side of the circular member 847 into the female thread formed at the tip. By screwing in the inserted fastening screw, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design protruding portion 858c can also function so as to come into contact with the wing-like member 854 and adjust the rotational manner of the wing-like member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design protruding portion 858c and the front surface of the wing-like member 854 are arranged close enough to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the stopped posture of the wing-like member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increased resistance at the time of this rubbing. can be achieved.

As a result, the drive control modes of the wing-like member 854 include a drive mode in which it continues to rotate for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which it intermittently rotates about one rotation (which produces an irregular movement at the beginning of rotation). (driving mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stopping posture of the wing-like member 854 in the latter driving mode.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 79 and 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and mesh with a second-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the second-stage pinion 861. The rack member 862 includes a rack member 862 and a fall prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off the vertical slide member 820.

The second-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862, and a pinion with a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that is elongated from side to side and can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and a gear portion 862a on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the formation position of the gear portion 862a. A cylindrical protrusion 862b is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to have a ratio of 9:16. Therefore, the ratio between the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 in the left and right direction and the amount of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the left and right direction is maintained at 9:16.

The cylindrical protrusion 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. The plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the cylindrical protrusion 862b is placed in the transmission guide part 813. The thickness of the plate is such that even if the cylindrical protrusion 862b moves toward the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814, it will not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813.

Thereby, when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, the rack member 862 can be prevented from falling off from the transmission guide section 813.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear part 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement of the rack member 862 is different from that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862. Thereby, it is possible to secure a large width of horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 while keeping the horizontal width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but the details will be described later.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the route forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. Note that in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is an elongated member made of a resin material, and includes an elongated main body portion 871 formed in an elongated curved shape and having one side open. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction of the support hole 872, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 located close to and in the same direction as the support hole 872 and capable of arranging electrical wiring. , a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open end of the elongated main body 871, and a resin mold for forming the claws 874 are removable. and a circular protruding portion 876 that protrudes from near the other end in the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871 in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872 and has a circular cross section.

The elongated main body part 871 is a part in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and includes a constricted part 871a having a short width in the middle part. The electrical wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end in the longitudinal direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely pinches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the elongated main body portion 871 to the extent that no breakage occurs, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively misaligned. The constricted portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from shifting beyond the constricted portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted therethrough, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when crossing to the vertical slide member 820. In this embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the amount of displacement of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged to be accommodated on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from falling off from the elongated main body portion 871 . Further, since the space for removing the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 with a minimum area, the electrical wiring is connected to the opposite side of the open portion of the elongated main body portion 871. It can be prevented from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide section 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 includes a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. A path forming member 882 which is a member and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open part, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side at a vertically distant position. A path passing through the upper open part 883 and the lower open part 884 is configured.

That is, the route forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a extending to one side at the edge, an upper open portion 883 that forms an upper open portion of the route by chipping the wall portion 882a, and a lower end of the route forming member 882. A lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a with a size that allows the insertion of an electrical wiring connector at the lower part, and a lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a toward the upper open part 883 in a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extended portion 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in the shape of a long groove within a range that does not overlap with the extended portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a portion below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. It is provided with a cylindrical protruding portion 887 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female thread formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the left-right direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a closest to the front side. It enters the back side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is placed (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of displacement on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that forms a route along which the electric wiring is guided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the arrangement of the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap when viewed from the front.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is caused by the extension portion 885. and is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the widthwise length of the route of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total widthwise length of the elongated main body portion 871 and the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. This makes it possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open part 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion part 887 passes through to the back side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. Equipped with.

The cylindrical protruding portion 887 serves as a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the electrical wiring, and a fastening portion that fixes the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. 86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the performance standby state to the performance upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed from the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 89(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line.

In FIG. 86, the performance standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved along the displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is placed at an intermediate position between the right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is placed at the intermediate right end state and the upper end state of the effect. 89, the upper end state of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

86(a), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 88(a), and FIG. 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wiring guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and illustration of other shaped portions is omitted, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, by partially breaking the shaped portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the vertical movement.

86(b), FIG. 87(b), FIG. 88(b), and FIG. 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the horizontal slide member 840 is It is illustrated by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 for the purpose of illustrating only the horizontal displacement width.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 as the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changes is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided into the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, and after passing through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, is inserted into the wall part 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that a vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocated in the vertical direction. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be explained.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the performance standby state (see FIG. 86). In the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is placed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so the displacement rotation unit 800 is set in the performance standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

Further, in the production standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840, it is avoided that the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent to the left and right sides.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is drive-controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the production standby state, and the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the halfway right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine based on the output of the upper detection sensor SC8 that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the halfway right end state.

In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the performance standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the upward direction and maintains its posture.

That is, in the halfway right end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so it is not supported as a support point for the wiring arm member 870. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the performance standby state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rightward displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 accompanying the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the performance standby state to the halfway right end state is performed without changing the attitude of the wiring arm member 870. Ru. This makes it possible to avoid collisions between the members due to a shift in displacement timing, which tends to occur when the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced together.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical sliding member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal sliding member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide section 813, but the displacement exceeds the width of the transmission guide section 813 in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the second-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide part 813, and the gear part 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are geared to the second stage pinion 861. will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch radius of the second-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In this embodiment, since the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the second stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16, the left and right position of the transmission guide portion 813 is The horizontal slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction with a left-right width obtained by multiplying the amount of change by a constant (ie, 16/9=about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the halfway left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 does not displace to the left and right outwards as much as in the performance standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-back direction.

In such an arrangement, the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 changes as shown in FIG. 88(a). That is, in the process from the halfway right end state to the halfway left end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 contacts the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the guide recess 886 than the front vertical recess. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced compared to the standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to change its posture after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In addition, during the downward displacement, the opposite holds true (after the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 does not change, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if a shift occurs between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, a collision between the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be avoided.

The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the only displacements are vertical displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can continue to be placed at the left and right outer ends where it is difficult to attract the attention of the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 can be guided by the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of vision.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the upper end state of the effect, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 The support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 ( (see FIG. 84) is maintained at a minimum.

In this way, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and back positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 that is configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down. By configuring this to be possible, an advantageous effect is achieved in that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, the horizontal displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. To be more specific, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged to the right (inward from the left and right) in the performance standby state. In this embodiment, the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at a position to the right (inner side of the left and right) of the horizontal slide member 840, so the displacement and rotation unit 800 may be downsized to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to take measures. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is placed in a position closer to the front, sufficient horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be ensured, while the game board 13 placed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800 The degree of freedom in arranging components on the back side is reduced.

In this embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, it is particularly useful for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize opening 640 arranged on the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid etc. is likely to be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by configuring the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2 to be movable in the front-back direction by the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to avoid restricting the left-right displacement of the horizontal slide member 840, and to play the game. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal sliding member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal sliding member 840 by arranging the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 to the front side, and the horizontal sliding member 840 This prevents the displacement from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and in the upper position where the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be placed, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is placed to the rear side, so that the electrical wiring The DK2 is placed towards the back, leaving space in the front. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of members arranged on the game board 13 as a structure such as a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state changes of the electrical wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Note that the change in the state of the electrical wiring DK2 here refers to a change in the winding state of the electrical wiring DK2 in a state in which the electrical wiring DK2 is wound around a pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper part (the side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b exclusively extends vertically and is not preferably curved. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)), so the rigidity is lower than that of the portion of the lower winding portion DK2b that undergoes winding displacement. The higher the value, the better.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b, so that the cable tube exhibits a behavior with higher rigidity than the part that is wound and displaced.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is placed between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the direction of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electrical wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840, and the lower The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887.

The upper winding part DK2a of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823, can be displaced in a manner of expanding and contracting in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. It is composed of

The lower winding portion DK2b of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887, is displaced in a manner that expands and contracts in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In this embodiment, the respective planes intersect at right angles, and the plane where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is the first omitted part 824a, the second omitted part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

The displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by the portion of the wiring arm member 870 disposed inside the elongated main body portion 871 being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From this, in this embodiment, the displacement required for the electrical wiring DK2 due to a change in the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b. Therefore, they will be explained separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be explained. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise in front view around the cylindrical protrusion 823 from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and extends from the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point where it is guided to the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be able to be displaced in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as its limit, and is in the standby state where it widens most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(b)). In this case, a wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the horizontal slide member 840 displaces to the left, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 displaces to the left, pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and causing the upper winding to roll outward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, by protruding from the left end of the wiring guide member 844 a guide piece 844a that slopes downward toward the left, the upper winding portion DK2a is directed outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). This allows the upper winding portion DK2a to be properly pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be explained. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from a point hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 when viewed from the left side (viewed from the left and right outside). This refers to the part that passes through the front side and is wrapped in the forward rotation direction, and extends to the part located in the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be movable in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and is in the production standby state where it is widest in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is upwardly displaced as the vertical slide member 820 is upwardly displaced from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upwardly, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upwardly. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is supplemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b radially inward about the cylindrical protrusion portion 887. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, thereby pushing the lower winding part DK2b and moving it downward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protruding part 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in an inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, the lower winding part DK2b is formed between the cylindrical protrusion 887 and the wall 882a (the cylindrical The lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. This makes it possible to avoid the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840. (see) can be displaced using the front and back width to its full extent.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a large space below the wiring arm member 870 in which the lower winding part DK2b can be accommodated, so the length of the lower winding part DK2b can be made sufficiently long, and The allowable amount of vertical displacement can be increased.

FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of channels made of a resin member and opened on the front side. The ball flow lower unit 150 is formed in a path shape and is disposed at the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60.

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed to be able to receive the ball that has flown down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 near the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is an elongated box-shaped member whose front side is open, are fastened and fixed to the fixed plate part 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151. It includes a flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 that protrude inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the ball.

The plurality of protrusions 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right sides with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a ball between the left and right walls. Thereby, the flow of the ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 can be slowed down.

The functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be explained. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have the function of guiding the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to a ball ejection channel (not shown). It has a function of improving the presentation effect by making the subsequent game ball visible to the player. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to immediately execute the payout of the prize ball and display the hold on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice a situation where a payout is not being made due to a problem on the gaming machine parlor side.

In addition, as explained below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second prize opening 640 by visually confirming the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, so the position of the detection sensor is changed to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1, etc. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of displaying the hold may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is passed through an intermediate flow path LM1 (see FIG. (see 27).

Like the guide channel DL1, the intermediate channel LM1 is formed to be able to guide the ball vertically downward while displacing the ball in a zigzag pattern from side to side. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to have the same flowing manner, the ball on the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game. Even if the ball is visually recognized, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information about which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the player's profit, and the information about which channel the ball is flowing down is information that is directly connected to the player's profit. This is a part where individual differences occur among pachinko machines 10 depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the flesh part of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and the ball collides with this position before passing through the through gate 67, or the ball collides with this position before entering the second winning hole 640. Since nails are installed that can cause balls to collide with each other, it is determined for each pachinko machine whether the balls are likely to flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during right-handed games. different.

During the probability change or time saving period when playing a right-handed game, the ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 flows down the guide route DL1, unless it enters the general winning hole 63 located on the downstream side. The ball passes through the out port 71 and is ejected from the game area, and does not benefit the player (it becomes a wasted ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. The reason why the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when paying attention to the guide route DL1 than when paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 is because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency with which the ball flows down the guide route DL1, calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in right-handed games, etc. It is expected that players will take this into consideration when deciding whether to continue playing the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 and the ball entering the second prize opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate channel LM1. Thereby, it can be made to seem as if the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning port 640 and has been discharged from the gaming area, so it flows vertically downward and reaches the specific winning port 65a when viewed from the front. If the ball flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it will be difficult to distinguish it from the ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, and there is a possibility that the game will be hindered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible for the ball to reach a position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in front view. (See Figure 2). This makes it easy to distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning port 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning port 640 and cannot enter the specific winning port 65a. .

The first receiving channel 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down towards the left and right center position. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81, the player is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81. , it is possible to make a player who is not paying attention to the right-handed ball path aware of whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640.

This allows the player to recognize whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving his/her field of view while keeping his/her attention on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for looking at the second winning hole 640, and the player misses the display, thereby making the game more comfortable. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 flows diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first prize opening 64 when viewed from the front. Since this ball is decelerated by the protrusion portion 154, the residence time of the falling ball can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls that are visible in the game area when viewed from the front.

In addition, by ensuring a long left-right width of the downward flow path of the ball, the line of sight directed toward the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the downward flow path of the second receiving channel member 153 can easily intersect. Thereby, the ball flowing down inside the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate presentation means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 is made of an opaque resin material and aligns the light guide plate 161, and an upper support member 162 is made of a light transmissive resin material and is attached to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and formed of a light-transparent resin material and constitutes a spherical flow path; A plurality of left and right side support members 165 are formed from a resin material and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses both left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and an upper support member formed in a left and right elongated shape A horizontal board unit 166 is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 while passing over the upper side of the member 162 and extending to the front side of the center frame 86. A vertically placed board unit 167 is arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transmissive resin material and arranged at the center left and right near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transparent resin material and arranged at the left side of the first decorative member 171. , a second decorative member 174 is disposed on the front side of the left side frame of the center frame 86; A third decorative member 177 is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular center decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the center thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin for a title or the like representing the pachinko machine 10. Equipped with

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally long groove portion 171a recessed in the shape of a horizontally long groove on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows placement of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 of the light guide plate presentation means 160.

The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In this embodiment, the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, inside the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161, while the front position of the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emitting performance by the performance member 700 in the performance standby state without being blocked by the light guide plate 161.

Referring to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed board unit 166 will be described. FIG. 96 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In addition, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back sides of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is irradiated in the vertical direction along arrows D1a and D1b. On the back side of the first decorative member 171, the light reaching the reflective shaped portions 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a can be visually recognized conspicuously.

As a result, even when the light emitting means are arranged in a concentrated manner on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (the light emitting range or the light emitting shape) that is visually recognized by the player depends on the formation range or the formed shape of the reflective shaped portion 171b. The images can be visually recognized in different ways.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal board unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the lower surface in a row in which the LEDs are arranged on the upper surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows: a corresponding row above and below, and a row parallel to the corresponding row and formed on the back side. Of the rows in which the LEDs serving as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface are arranged inside the horizontally long groove 171a, and the back row on the bottom surface is located outside the horizontally long groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shaped part 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface can illuminate another light emitting target. Light can be irradiated.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface are arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light enters from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b, such as an LED, arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

Note that the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal board unit 166. Thereby, the light emitted from the two rows of front and rear LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to clearly separate the light that is irradiated onto the display area side and the light that is irradiated onto the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shaped portion 171b, and has a flat front and rear surface. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontal substrate unit 166, strong reflection of the light can be avoided and visibility can be maintained.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specs, so-called different specs). It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing pachinko machines 10 with different performance types, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate is different from the shape formed in the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, a striped groove is used). ) is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shaped portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in range XCVII in FIG. In this embodiment, when the horizontal board unit 166 is irradiated with light in the vertical direction along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shaped portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and becomes glittering. While it is visually recognized brightly, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is not mainly reflected, but is configured so that most of it is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized as slightly dark.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be seen as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction, so that light can be emitted in an arbitrary shape when viewed from the front. You can make it look like you are there. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if LEDs were arranged on the back side to produce a light-emitting effect.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 that is a thin plate member (sheet-like member) with low transparency colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Thereby, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

As a result, the gaming area formed on the front side of the base board 60 (particularly the left side) and the forming area of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front (including the area that overlaps the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being reduced due to the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped parts arranged front and back shifted on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are provided.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space between the part of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. Ru.

Thereby, instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide route DL1, a three-dimensionally visible light effect can be performed. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. The brightness changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating light to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared to the case where light is irradiated toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from a fixedly arranged light emitting means such as an LED, the types of light effects can be easily increased.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left and right directions or the upper and lower directions, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. Which position becomes brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating light from the left and right directions to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a portion of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 out of the light irradiated from the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Thereby, the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display presentation mode of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light emitting device 330 is red, the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is red. This makes it easier to avoid the color of light that a person visually recognizes being purple (a color that is a mixture of blue light and red light). That is, the light seen through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily seen independently of the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150 are configured to be visible when viewed from the front, and all the balls are configured to flow down the same path, but the ball flowing down unit 150 of the second embodiment At 2150, the descending sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 shows an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after being fired. As shown in FIG. 98, the lower ball flow unit 2150 differs from the lower ball flow unit 150 described in the first embodiment in that it is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 to the left. A third receiving channel 2155 is provided, which is a channel having a size that allows a ball to flow down.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a slope angle set to be gentler than that of the first receiving channel 152, and has an inclined portion 2155a whose lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The speed of the ball flowing down the slope 2155a is slower than the speed of the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallow angle of the slope. The ball flowing down the slope 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the slope 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the slope 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long time.

This allows the ball flowing down the slope 2155a to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without causing any discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be explained. In this embodiment, the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 in the same way, and flows along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D21 or flowing down in the second direction D22 along the third receiving channel 2155.

In this embodiment, the downward flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protruding portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, that ball will be guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur when, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 consecutively in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually observing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning a prize opening 640 in a row.

Note that the mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening/closing plate configured to be able to switch between a state of allowing the ball to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state of restricting it using a driving means such as a solenoid is disposed in the ball flow down unit 2150. Alternatively, an electromagnet capable of generating a magnetic force may be provided at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force may be used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the downward flow path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to make the ball stay or return. Unlike the ball that flows down the gaming area, changing the falling path of the ball that enters the second prize opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so the ball that uses magnetic force as described above does not affect the subsequent game results. It becomes possible to switch the downstream route of the flow.

As described above, when switching the flow path of the ball with a device that uses electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the lottery result based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of cases where the lottery by entering the second prize opening 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the expectation of a jackpot for the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down 2155.

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be drawn to the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which serves as a guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the ejected ball (game It is possible to improve attention to the ball (which has already been ejected from the area).

As mentioned above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 is due to the fact that the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, or the expected value of the jackpot in the lottery due to the ball entering the second winning hole 640. This suggests that the value is high.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in the middle of the ejection part 2155b, and control is performed so that the granular member 320 is ejected when it is determined that the ball has passed. .

As mentioned above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the production standby state (see FIG. 38) to the firing standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. it takes time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second prize opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b from there. This flow time is used to control the injection device 400 to change its state.

Thereby, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay that is expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after the ball enters the second prize opening 640. Compared to the case where the control is performed as follows, it is possible to make it easier to match the timing of the falling ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320.

For example, oil adhering to the ball may adhere to the first receiving channel 152, causing a drop in the flow speed of the ball, and in this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be ejected before the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155, which may reduce the performance effect.

In contrast, by controlling the granular member 320 to fire at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed, the player can wait until the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving channel 2155, it is possible to improve the performance effect of a series of performances in which a powerful performance that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 is performed by firing the granular members 320. can.

Note that the arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) that is visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. The above-mentioned sequence of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his/her line of sight.

Note that control may also be combined in which the granular member 320 is not ejected when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed so that the probability of the above-mentioned variable jackpot is increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of performances after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, the player who receives the ball from the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage where the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can avoid a decline in attention span.

In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, attention to the subsequent display performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Note that a detection sensor having the same function as the detection sensor SC21 may be placed at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passing timing of the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player is more advantageous when the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be symmetrically and discretely enlarged/reduced in the radial direction, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, , is configured to be able to form sections that are not bilaterally symmetrical in the radial expansion/contraction displacement. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference between the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 and the first embodiment is only in the production member 3700, and the main body member 601, front cover member 610, upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the presentation member 3700 is placed at a midway position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is similar to the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, two on the lower side and one on the upper left While the sheets are radially enlarged with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in a clustered arrangement state (not enlarged in the radial direction). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be explained.

FIG. 100 is a front view of rotary plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 in place of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 when viewed from the front. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter circular arc portion 733a, large-diameter circular arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connecting portion with the large diameter circular arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large diameter circular arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacently provided in the clockwise direction or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to rapidly approach the small diameter circular arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the assembled arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c The telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the large diameter arc portion 733b does not expand in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to cause a shift in the arrangement of the shielding design member 760. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 99, by arranging the shielding design member 760 asymmetrically, the center of gravity of the presentation member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 disposed at the upper right position remains in the grouped arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the production member 3700 is subjected to a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front due to its own weight. This load can cause the presentation member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis, so that the shielding design member 760 can be changed in the radial direction around the rotational axis of the presentation member 3700 and in the rotational direction. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, the direction (i.e., , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and other than that, the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same, and the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733c are different from each other. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 shifts in the state shown in FIG. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal and vertical center positions of the presentation member 3700. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained shifted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems.

An example of a performance using this return of the center of gravity G31 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the production member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately, but the purpose of this is to avoid collision with other components. .

In this embodiment, measures are taken to avoid collisions with other components, and the effect member 3700 is controlled to be able to be vertically displaced and radially displaced at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to expand and displace the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction while moving the presentation member 3700 downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the presentation member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 returns, so that the presentation member 3700 is It is possible to cause a posture change in the opposite direction to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radial expansion and displacement of the presentation member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction can be achieved. However, as a result, it is possible to create a complex movement that also includes displacement in the rotational direction. Thereby, the presentation effect of the presentation member 3700 can be improved.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480, is completed before the translation member 410 is displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but rather shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed before the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started with the lid member 480 placed at the displacement end position on the retracting side, so that the player's line of sight is not obstructed by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12(a) and FIG. 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear member 410 between the angle of 66 degrees and the angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (minorly displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, so when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are upwardly displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, making control easier.

In addition, in this mode in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) applied to the torsion spring SP2 is reduced compared to the case where the lid member 480 is also displaced. I can do it.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibrations may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. This makes it possible to avoid loading other vibration devices when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the production standby state, but in the fifth embodiment, After the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see around the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a portion of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained therein. Although it is possible that the rotation of the lid member 480 is inhibited by the granular member 320 colliding with the lid member 480, in this embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft side. Thereby, rotation of the lid member 480 can be made less likely to be inhibited.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven in the forward rotation direction with the granular member 320 placed on the lid member 480, the granular member 320 will collide as the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracting side (the small diameter side in FIG. 102). It falls onto member 420.

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is broken, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the translation member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the driving motor MT1 is set at high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, at the time of firing, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left and right center portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left and right direction is prevented. You can make it visible so that it becomes the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed depending on the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. Thereby, it is possible to provide variation in the firing direction of the granular member 320, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with a flat substrate and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction. An illumination board is provided on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are arranged in a bent manner. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operating unit 500 is omitted. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, in addition to the illumination board 332, the first light irradiation device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the illumination board 332, and a rear end close to the front end of the illumination board 332. A second illumination board 6334 is provided that is tilted away from 332.

The second illumination board 6334 includes light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the front side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light toward the partitioning member 310, and it is possible to improve the production effect of lighting up the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310.

In addition to the illumination board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is arranged in an inclined manner such that its back end is close to the back end of the illumination board 342 and its front end is away from the illumination board 342. A second illumination board 6344 is provided.

The second illumination board 6344 includes a light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the back side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700, displacement rotation unit 800, etc. of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

Note that the arrangement of the illumination board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illumination substrates 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the illumination substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, or the light emitting means may be configured to be able to emit light from both sides.

Furthermore, for the purpose of obliquely directing the direction of light irradiation, a device that can change the orientation of the light emitting means may be constructed without increasing the number of illumination boards. Further, a light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illumination substrates 332, 342 and the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, so as to be able to emit light.

A substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, the schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. , FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

Note that arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction of the substrate box A100. Note that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and a box cover A200 and box base A300 that are connected in an unopenable manner (caulked structure). a box cover A200 connected by the sealing unit A400 and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end of the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400, and a main controller. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a shaft that supports the board box A100 (box cover A200) in the short direction (arrows U, D). direction) and is formed as an axis perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

In addition, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the rotation axis A410 is located at one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall part A220 across the covering part A270, which will be described later); R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) opposite to one longitudinal side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main control device A110. Note that the main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary pushbutton that is operated (turned on) when the operating section A122 is pushed in from the initial position and turned off when the push is released (the operating section A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main controller A110. Note that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on), and based on the click feeling, the main control is activated. The operator can detect the completion of input to the device A110. Therefore, this is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the key A140 inserted in the off position is rotated (clockwise in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on" position). A key-operated selector switch (mode It is configured as a changeover switch).

Note that in this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Furthermore, in the off position of the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed, while in the on position, the key A140 cannot be removed.

Furthermore, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched depending on the on/off state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and When A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the winning probability value in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as described later. .

Here, as described above, since the board box A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, switch device A120 and key device A130), In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box A100, which is time-consuming.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and the effort can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121, A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the protruding portions on the back side are soldered, whereby the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is arranged on the front side of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operating part A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction)) is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R. When a force in a parallel direction is applied and the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tilted, the legs on one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and key device A130 A tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, while a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may peel off, which may lead to disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 employs means to solve this problem. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Note that since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually check the display on the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be explained.

First, with the power of the pachinko machine A10 turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and while pushing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120 to the operating position, the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. Turn on the power. This activates the setting change mode, and the settings are changed each time the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In this embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are defined as the set value, and these values are cycled (for example, by pressing the operation part A122, the set value changes from the first value to the sixth value). 6, and when the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device 81 is a liquid crystal display (display device). The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

Note that the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous setting values, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, the amount of information that can be displayed can be ensured (larger) than, for example, when using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operating state, and it is possible to improve operability and suppress operational errors. Further, by using the device (third symbol display device 81) that displays information regarding the game also, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting change mode (setting values are finalized). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Note that after changing the desired setting value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, leaving it in the ON position). However, also by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 of the key device A130 placed in the off position, the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed in the off position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pressing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120), the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (with the key A140 still in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is turned off. When the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the pachinko machine A10 placed in the off position, it will not start up in the normal mode and will be in an error state, and an error display will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third symbol display device 81, or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to check the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 to the on position, and then turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. As a result, a setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode is activated with the setting value set at that time.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, you can also turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10 and turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the setting value change in the setting change mode is completed (determined), a 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. An example of the predetermined mode is a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals.

In addition, the 7-segment display can display 4 digits by arranging 4 pieces in parallel, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2 pieces) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode) However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02" is displayed, and the sixth value is "06".)

Next, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a front wall portion A201 extending from the four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and lower wall portion A203) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, each of these wall portions A201 to A205 is formed into a box shape with an open back side. Note that the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A two-step difference is formed on the standing end surfaces (the surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The step is formed by forming a first surface (first step) on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and forming a second surface on the outer side of the first surface (opposite to the inner space). A surface (first stage) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height from the front wall A201 is smaller) and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). ).

The seat surface A206 is formed into a generally rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, with the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 being continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. A fastening hole A206a with a female screw threaded on the inner periphery is formed in four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of each wall portion A201 to A205 are connected). be done.

Therefore, the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) brings the outer edge side of the front side into contact with the seat surface A206, and inserts the screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, and is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and is fastened to the board box A100. It will be stored.

A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engagement piece A207 has a base that stands upright from the upper wall A202 and the lower wall A203 toward the back side (arrow B direction), and extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the erected tip of the base. It is formed into a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as described later.

A portion of the front wall A201 is recessed toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall A210 that is located backward from the front wall A201 (towards the main controller 110), and each side of the operation wall A210 is connected to the front wall. The front wall portion A201 is formed by plate-shaped wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 is located in a first area formed by the front wall part A201 and on a side closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall part A210 is a part that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front (the length in the arrows L and R directions is the same as the length in the arrows U and D directions). It is formed into a rectangular shape with elongated dimensions, and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the longitudinal center of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 to the front wall portion A201, and connects the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110. Therefore, a space can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall part A220, which is connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210, and the first connection wall part A220 and The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded by combining the space on the front side of the operation wall A210.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall part A220 with respect to the front wall part A201 and the operation wall part A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to both expand the space on the front side of the operation wall A210 (in the direction of arrow F) and secure the space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall A230 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the transverse direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall A240 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow R These are wall portions that connect one side of each side (direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for protruding the operation part A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and a main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are respectively formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the operation section A122 (approximately square when viewed from the front in this embodiment), and is approximately square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R direction) of the operation wall section A210. placed in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B), and also guides the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for regulating the fall (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a substantially square frame in front view surrounding the opening A250, and its inner circumferential surface is formed to be smoothly connected to the inner circumferential surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). The dimensions are set such that the tip is at a lower position (the tip of the operating portion A122 protrudes further outward (in the direction of arrow F) than the erected tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the push-in operation of the operating portion A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operating portion A122.

However, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the guide wall A251 is higher than the tip of the operation section A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). It is also possible to set the dimensions to a position where the tip of the operating portion A122 is recessed inward (in the direction of arrow B) from the erected tip of the guide wall A251. This can prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed into the operating position (turning on) due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

In addition, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the operation portion A122 that has been pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on) is approximately the same as the tip of the operation portion A210 from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set so that the height positions are the same. When pushing in the operating part A122, the operator's fingers come into contact with the upright tip of the guide wall A251, so the operator can recognize that the operating part A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on this contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is provided on the operation wall portion A210 so as to protrude from its front surface (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F). The covering part A270 is a part that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape that stands up from the operation wall part A210. It mainly includes a portion A271 and a plate-shaped end wall portion A272 that closes the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 (forms an end surface), and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is stored in the internal space. Ru.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape with a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions that protrude outward in the radial direction from two opposing locations on the base portion A271a (positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). A part A271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (direction of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall A210 has a shape that is approximately the same as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall A271 (base A271a and protrusion A271b) (i.e., a shape in which two opposing portions of the circle protrude outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the protruding tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape (cantilever beam) whose base end is fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and whose one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is formed only in an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the area necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and a first sector-shaped opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portions (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and having a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). and a square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The square portions A272b are disposed in a posture that tapers radially inward when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the rotation center and a radius of rotation of a portion of the portion on the other side of the rotation center of different dimensions. Therefore, in the opening A260, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening have different sizes (radii).

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. These first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 are protrusions that extend in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and One end of the protrusion A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions where the phases are different by approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are formed respectively. The display section is a section that shows information about the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the second protrusion A212 is placed in the off position. A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed in series (in one row) (arranged in parallel) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Upright walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall section A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed into a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are arranged to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A282 on one side and to the third erected wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of these standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (Fig. 110 (see (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first standing wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 in between, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A291.

The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are connected to the first standing wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A292 on one side and to the third erected wall A293 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 is formed in a size that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 (at a position outward from the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b on the peripheral wall A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall A203, respectively.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 are the The standing heights from the surface) are the same, and the end surfaces (faces in the direction of arrow B) of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the same as the seating surface A206. placed at the same height.

Therefore, in the standing walls A280, A290, the standing end surfaces of the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 are connected to the seating surface A206, and the standing walls A280, A290 are connected to the seating surface A206 and each of the standing walls A281, A293. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (forming the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls The erected end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimension (arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is different from the length dimension (arrow L, direction dimension) of the first standing wall A281. R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280 (second standing wall A282 and third standing wall A283), the second standing wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opposing sides of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erected wall A284 in a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume near the fourth erected wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of parts where the plate thickness is large, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects may occur in areas where the plate thickness is partially large and in the vicinity. bring about

On the other hand, the height of the fourth wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the heights of the first wall A281, the second wall A282, and the third wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, the material volume near the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced, resulting in molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, when the switch device A120 is tilted in the direction of the arrow D, the switch The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erected wall A284, and its tilting can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

The inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 have a mark on the standing tip side (arrow B Taper surfaces A280a and A290a, which are sloped surfaces that approach the outer surface side as one goes in the direction (direction), are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the erected tip of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is gradually reduced toward the erected tip side, and each erected wall A281 , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are made smaller in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are applied to the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the side of the standing ends of the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An erected wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned upright walls A280 and A290, an upright wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in the shape of a box that connects plate-like bodies on four sides and is open on the side opposite to the front wall part A201. 4)). Further, the standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). is formed at a position corresponding to . Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects, respectively, are such that the height position of the erected end surface of one or more erected walls is higher than that of the remaining erected walls. The height position is set to be different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, it is spaced apart from the printed circuit board A119). ). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), Compared to the erected wall A209, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 can be more easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to ensure that the standing wall surrounding the highly important object is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a rear wall portion A301 that stands upright from the four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It mainly includes wall parts (an upper wall part A302, a lower wall part A303, a left wall part A304 and a right wall part A305 that connect the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303) that are provided and formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. Note that the box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A plurality of engaged parts A307 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (in the direction of arrow D).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, a phase is set on the side opposite to the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 (in the direction of arrow L) by the length of the extending portion. The boxes are made to face each other in shifted positions, and the box cover A200 is pushed toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the space between the adjacent engaged parts A307, so that the box cover A200 is moved relative to the box base A300 in the extending direction ( slide in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the back side (in the direction of the arrow B) of the engaged part A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow F is restricted).

Next, the main controller A110 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112(a) is a front perspective view of the main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller A110, and FIG. 113 is a main controller in portion CXIII of FIG. 112(a). FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114(a) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, only the main components of the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and illustrations of other components are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistor, capacitor, transistor) mounted on a board made of insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is made of conductive material such as copper foil. The insertion hole A112 is formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 is attached to the board box A100 with the front side (the side on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the side in the direction of arrow F) facing the back side of the box cover A200 (front wall part A201). will be stored in.

In this case, at least areas AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 are in contact with the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114). (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In addition, in FIG. 114(a), only a portion of the area where the seat surface A206 comes into contact that is connected to the upright walls A280 and A290 is illustrated.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating portion A122 so as to be able to be displaced (pushed), and a coil spring (disposed inside the main body A123) that applies a biasing force to return the operating portion A122 to the initial position. (biasing means (not shown)), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operating part A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A123a, The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 face each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the part protruding from the bottom surface of the base A123a (part of the bottom surface of the base A123a, and the part from which the leg A121 protrudes) is abutted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a from which the legs A121 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Moreover, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a of the main body A123, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 includes a cylinder part A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a compatible key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder part A132 is arranged inside. A contact point whose contact is switched depending on the state of the main body A133 that holds the main body A133, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point thereof.

The main body A133 has a base A133a that is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder part A132 on its inner peripheral side (inside), and two locations on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). ), and an end portion A133c that forms an end surface on the tip side (in the direction of arrow F) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (on the arrow B direction side) from the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. An opening that is circular in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner tube A132a) through this opening. .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the front end side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering part A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is It is formed in a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, so that the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is placed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

In addition, in this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that it may be configured such that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 are in contact with each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a of the main body A133, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 has a base portion A134a that has an opening formed approximately in the center and through which the main body A133 (base portion A133a and protrusion portion A133b) is inserted, and a base portion A134a that extends from two opposing sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. It is equipped with a pair of extending portions A134b that extend and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c that extend from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. is formed.

The extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement part A134c from the base part A134a, and the extension end surface of the extension part A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is provided to protrude from the extending end surface of the extending portion A134b. The support body A134 is disposed on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes independent by inserting the leg A134b1 into a hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

Note that a gap may be provided between the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the extension part A134b and the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support body A134 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement part A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to abut against the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and it is possible to more firmly prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

In addition, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent in a substantially dogleg shape or a substantially S-shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 while being elastically deformed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, manufacturing costs can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement with the hole of the leg A134b1, the leg A134b1 may also be configured to be soldered. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support body A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimension in the direction of arrows L and B, dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 114(b)) set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-like body constituting the support body A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1 The hole in the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased, and when the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extension portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be approximately the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on two opposing sides of the support body A134, it is possible to restrict bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. This increases the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole and enhances the function of supporting the main body A133, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more firmly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the OFF position, and FIG. 115(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the ON position. FIG. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 in FIG. It is a partially enlarged side view of board box A100 as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb.

FIG. 117(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in a).

FIG. 119(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, the internal structure is not shown and the cross section is given a single hatch to schematically illustrate the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in the end wall portion A272 that forms the tip end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be seen by a person committing fraud due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire directly into the opening A260, insert the tip of the foreign object such as a wire into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the opening A260 is reached by sliding on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion A210).

On the other hand, since the covering part A270 protrudes from the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210, if the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210. , the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering section A270 (the outer circumferential surface of the peripheral wall section A271) to stop further advancement (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main controller A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, and the peripheral wall A271 The path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the path formed by the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c) is bent. A wall against which the tip of the foreign object abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support body A134 (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). (horizontal dimension).

Thereby, the upper surface of the support body A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b hits, that is, the support body A134) Upper surface.In addition, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support body A134, the inner surfaces of each standing wall A291, A292, A293 and the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed in the peripheral wall A271 of the covering part A270, a protrusion A133b is formed in the main body A133, and the base A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

This allows the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R) to face the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) (i.e., the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface in the direction of arrow F) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of arrow B). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (between the guide wall A251, the operation wall A210, the operation section A122, and the protrusion A123b) A wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operating part A122 hits), i.e., The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.Also, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction has been changed by hitting the upper surface of the protrusion A123b, the inner surface of each standing wall A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall A203) is used as a route. can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

This allows the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, so that tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated).

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end wall portion A272 is formed at the protruding tip (on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the covering portion A270, and this end wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and tampering with the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, square portions A272b extend radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding distal end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the covering part A270 is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140), and the protruding end surface of the covering part A270 is open. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) serve as the end wall portion A272. Therefore, the area of the opening A260 can be minimized, making it difficult for foreign objects such as wire to be inserted into the opening A260. Furthermore, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire will pass through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 have an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed and combined), the end wall part A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of square parts A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular part A272a. It is formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever beam whose base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free). Since it is formed in a shape of 1.5 mm, the shape can be simplified and its moldability can be ensured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall part A271 is formed in the covering part A270, and the end wall part A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the protruding tip side (direction of arrow F) of the peripheral wall part A271 is the opening A260. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be brought into contact. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, the tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) are made to face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) is turned into the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R). ), the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be restricted.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation section A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 may be carelessly or violently operated by the operator, or the operation section A122 may Or, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in the pushing direction or a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). If the switch device A120, key device A130, or key A140 is actuated, there is a risk that the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 will be tilted, and the box cover A200 (especially the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erecting walls A280 and A290 are arranged such that their erecting end surfaces ( 117(a) and 117(b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operation wall A210 due to the upright walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), this also improves the rigidity of the operation wall A210 and the covering section A270 (deformation prevention The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means). As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress its tilting is shared not only with the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is accordingly reduced. Can be dispersed. Also from this point of view, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of the foreign object such as a wire (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, the area AS1 where the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F) come into contact. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, a path for foreign matter such as wire to enter the inside of the board box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erected walls A280 and A290. In other words, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250, A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, its progress outside the space surrounded by the standing walls A280, A290 and the lower wall A203 is restricted. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Further, the standing walls A280, A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls A280, A290 are erected (functioning as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 be further improved by doing so, but also the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 can be further improved by Even if an external force is applied in any direction within the plane including the above-described structure, the function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the first standing wall A291 is arranged in an attitude that is perpendicular to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and The third erected wall A293 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the erected wall A290 can efficiently function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270.

That is, when an external force in the direction of arrows U and D or the direction of arrows L and R is applied to the key A140 among the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R, the standing wall While the load that A290 receives (the load capacity that the standing wall A290 should exert as a support part) is maximum, an external force is applied in a direction that is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the directions of arrows U and D or the directions of arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the external force will escape due to the rotation, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 will act as a support part) will be increased. load capacity) will be lower. As a result, by arranging the attitude of the erected wall A290 as described above, the erected wall A290 can efficiently perform its function as a support part (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270. be able to.

The standing walls A280, A290 (second standing walls A282, A292 and third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall part A203, so using the rigidity of the box cover A200, the standing walls The rigidity of A280, A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the box cover A200 as a whole can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall A210 and the lower wall A203 via the standing walls A280, A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as supporting parts (deformation suppressing means) that support the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which the electronic components are connected by soldering is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the surface of the printed circuit board A119 is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the areas AS1 and AS2 where the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abuts (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) are made to easily come into close contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and the upright walls A280 and A290 are It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 collide.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 have tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the standing tips The area of the surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). Thereby, the surface pressure on the upright end surface that is brought into contact with the printed circuit board A119 can be increased, and it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the upright ends of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the inside of the board box A100 can be suppressed.

That is, by reducing the area of the erected end surfaces by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a, A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the erected ends (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the erected walls A280, A290 is changed. The fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured by making the change gradual. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 come into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. (See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between (intrude between) the front end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the inside of the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. One end of these first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115(a) and FIG. 115( b)).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each protrusion A211, 222 is used to further prevent the switch device A120 or the key device A130 from tilting. This can be reliably suppressed, and damage to the covering portion A270 can also be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are respectively formed. Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as an instruction line for pointing to a position corresponding to predetermined information displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the off position. (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)), and one end of the second protrusion A212 is located at the same phase position as the narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A270 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, causing the key A140 to cover the end surface in the direction of arrow U (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers) on the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). ), the first protrusion A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the first protrusion A211 is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (in the direction of the arrow L) in which the end face on the arrow L direction abuts against the covering part A270 (end face wall part A272), The second protrusion A212 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface to be gripped by fingers) receives a load (the end surface of the key A140 comes into contact with the end surface of the key A140). (portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Note that the second connection wall portion A230 can suppress the external force acting on the key A140 in the off position in the opposite direction to the case described above (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a). ), the first connection wall A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the opposite direction to the above case (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) on the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115). (see (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall A210 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (no connection wall is formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key device A130 The distance to the connection wall A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, and the key A140 may be moved by the arrow D. An external force that causes a displacement in the direction or in the direction of arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side that suppresses the tilting of the key device A130 against such external force (the side that receives it), material costs can be reduced and rigidity can be ensured. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are disposed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (the outer edge, the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. With respect to the key A140, which has a longer (larger) length dimension and is in the off position, the square part A272b on the side far from the first connection wall part A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the side (outer edge) is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the length of the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the on position. is shortened (smaller), and the rectangular portion A272b located on the side far from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to collide with the key A140. According to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force is applied in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is likely to be applied. Since the length dimension (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, by suppressing the surface pressure, damage to the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 includes a first area formed by the front wall A201 and an operation wall located closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall part A220, second connection wall part A230, and third connection wall part A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), it is possible to make the distance to the openings A250 and A260 longer for those who commit fraud, and The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to visually recognize, making it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Here, considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (inner space )). On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far away from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, operability will deteriorate.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily ensured, and as described above, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A100 from A260. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) must be removed. The hands of the operator (operator) interfere with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downward inclination) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 to the operation wall A210. The space on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

When viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L, R) that extends in the other direction (arrows U, D) orthogonal to the one direction. 115(a) and 115(b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the key A140 in the off position is in the other direction (direction of arrows U and D) described above (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the OFF position has the surface gripped by fingers facing the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the OFF position when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is in a posture along the lateral direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

Thereby, a space can be secured on the side where the surface of the key A140 in the OFF position that is held by the fingers is desired (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115(a)). Therefore, when inserting the key A140 into or pulling it out from the key device A130, the fingers (e.g., thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 touch the step (first connection wall) connecting the first region and the second region. It is possible to suppress interference with the portion A220, the second connecting wall portion A230, and the third connecting wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (on the first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), as described above. As the first connecting wall portion A220 is formed with a downward slope, when the key A140 is held and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, or vice versa), the key A140 is rotated downwardly. It is possible to prevent fingers different from the gripping hand from interfering with the step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when grasping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall part A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connecting wall portion A220.

In addition, when holding the key A140 in the on position with the index finger and thumb, the operation wall A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A130 is used for operation with the little finger or ring finger. By locating the wall portion A210 (second region) on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction, the space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 is used for arrangement. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the OFF position to the ON position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In addition, in the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating part A122 in the initial position is the same as that of the protruding part of the covering part A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the tip end surface (the front surface of the end wall A272, the surface in the direction of arrow F). Therefore, interference between the operating portion A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (a first connection wall A220 and a third connection wall A connection surface (second connection wall A230) is formed on one side in the width direction (arrow U direction side), and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on the other side in the width direction (arrow D direction side). It is assumed that the connecting surface is not formed.

Thereby, the other side of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (the side in the direction of arrow D) can be opened. That is, this opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the outside space. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with fingers and operating it (inserting it into the key device A130, pulling it out from the key device A130, rotating it from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Utilize the space (external space) connected to the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger, ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). I can do it. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, considering the heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) distance (internal space)).

In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first region) and the operation wall A210 (second region) In this case, the first connecting wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connecting wall portion A230 and the third connecting wall portion A240 are connected to the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially perpendicular to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward, interference with fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connecting wall A230 and the third connecting wall A240 are tilted downward. By not tilting (by making only the first connection wall portion A220 tilt downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 to accommodate heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connecting wall part A220 was tilted downward and the others (second connecting wall part A230 and third connecting wall part A240) were not tilted, interference with fingers could be suppressed. The operation wall A210 (second region) has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the operation wall A210 (second region) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region). ), the key device A130 is arranged in close proximity to the key device A130.

In addition, by forming the third connection wall part A240 on the other longitudinal side (the opposite side to the first connection wall part A220) of the operation wall part A210 (second region), the third connection wall part A240 The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 during manufacturing can be prevented from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Note that in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, some of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) are omitted, and Only the main components are shown with reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 120, as described above, in the pachinko machine A10, the hinges 18 (rotation shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side in front view. An inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis on the side where the inner frame 12 is provided so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

Here, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side as an axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, if the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees) ), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100 and opens the switch device A120 and key device in the manner described above (as explained in FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the opening angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, if the opening angle can only be approximately 45 degrees, the opening will cause the outer frame 11 and the inner frame to move into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the board box A100 is arranged such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the direction of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation shaft). 115(a) in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation shaft), and one longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115(a)) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is disposed on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when you insert your hand into the back of the inner frame 12 (the front of the board box A100) from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are connected to the key device by forming the space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (i.e., the operation wall portion A210 (second region) into a horizontally long rectangle in front view). A space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operating wall A210 by locating A130 on one side of the longitudinal center of the operating wall A210 (second region) It can be placed using

With this arrangement, the switch device A120 can be operated (depressed) with the thumb or index finger, and the key device A130 can be operated (pushed) when the key A140 is rotated. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger that grip the key A140, the space secured by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward can be used. As a result, operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting changes (operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be located closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side as the axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, the board box A100 is further opened to the front side (toward the front side in the paper of FIG. 120) as the rotating shaft A410 is the axis for opening and closing. Also good. This allows the operator to stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 in a position that does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and to operate the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) is connected to various devices (power supply device 115, dispensing control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoids 209, The other ends (connectors) of the electrical connection lines, one end of which is connected to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol retention lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), are respectively connected.

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of multiple electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be reduced. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

Specifically, in this embodiment, at least one end of the electrical connection line (connector) of the plurality of electrical connection lines is connected to the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the other end (connector) is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected, or even if both connections and disconnections are mixed). ), the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 Since the operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are prohibited, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed, connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol holding lamp 84 to main controller A110). By allowing the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 even if the electrical connection line (electrical connection line for ).

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (toward the front side of the paper in FIG. In order for the rotation of the device A110 to be unrestricted), it is necessary to release (unplug) the electrical connections.

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is moved to a predetermined position (switch device After rotating the key device A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated, it is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection wire that was released (unplugged) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, if the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire may be used to disconnect (unplug) the main controller A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is time-consuming.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main control device A110 at a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, while reducing the labor and work involved in operating (setting changes) the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire back surface of the end wall A272 is formed as a flat surface, but in the eighth embodiment, the end wall A2272 is provided with protrusions A2273 protruding from its back surface. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A2100 along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). It is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). In addition, in FIG. 121(b), only a portion that is viewed in cross section is shown in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 121, a protrusion A2273 is provided on the end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment so as to protrude from its back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B). The protrusion A2273 is a part (protrusion) that extends in a strip shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall A2272 (the tip in the protrusion direction that protrudes radially inward from the peripheral wall A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge.

Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposed to) the end part A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position facing) along the outer edge of the square part A272b. the range between positions AP1 and AP3 including AP2, and the range between positions AP4 and AP6 including position AP5), and one side across the square part A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall part A271). In this range (range between positions AP1 and AP6), Formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the protrusion A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between position AP3 and position AP4, and from position AP3 to position AP2. It is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes toward the position AP2, and it is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and at the position AP2, it is set to the same value as the position AP3. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes from position AP4 to position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from position AP5 to position AP6, and at position AP6 it becomes the same value as position AP4. Set. Moreover, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

In this way, by providing the protrusion A2273 in a protruding manner on the end wall A2272, the rigidity of the end wall A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and as the key device A130 is tilted, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130. , when the key A140 comes into contact with the inner edge of the end wall A2272, damage to the end wall A2272 can be suppressed.

The protrusion A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposed to) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the protrusion A2273 is formed at a position that faces (opposes) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130. ) can be made smaller to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in this embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 between the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. The value is set to approximately the same value as the facing interval between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion A2273 comes into contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

This eliminates the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133), and prevents foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, so the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever) with the outer edge free is utilized. As a result, the protrusions A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be firmly brought into close contact with the front surface of key device A130 (end part A133c of main body A133). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). .

Moreover, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is in contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when inserting the key A140 into the key A140, deformation of the end wall portion A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of the arrow R) than the center in the longitudinal direction (in the directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) illustrates a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a different position in which the operation wall part A210 is formed and an opening A260 (covering part A270, key Although the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of arrow L) than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the operation wall A210 is Three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connecting wall portion A220, a second connecting wall portion A230, and a third connecting wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering part A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall part A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in this embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the side in the direction of arrow L). That is, the arrangement is opposite to that in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 is the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). position (see FIG. 120), the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) faces the front side of the Pachinko machine A3010. That is, it is set in a range of approximately 180° to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, since the user can operate while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily understand the operating states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (i.e., in a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud cannot be carried out. (Unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are arranged in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the substrate box A3100 assumes a desired posture (in this embodiment, a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel). In addition, it is preferable that the angle between the front of the operation wall part A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

That is, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping one's hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 or the key device A130 while viewing the third symbol display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes), improving operability and reducing operational errors. can be more reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200 (the side in the direction of arrow L), and the operation wall A210 is provided with the switch device A120 and the key. A device A130 is provided.

As a result, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. When the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)) It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the switch device A120 is operated more frequently than the key device A130.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220). will be placed. Thereby, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be placed at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation part A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 can also be used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (space to avoid interference between fingers and box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 reaches the above-mentioned second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fixes the substrate box A3100 in the second position). ). Thereby, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that operability can be improved.

The regulating means is one that uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of a magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 in the second position (by applying a force that exceeds the attracting force, the first position (which is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the position), has a protruding member that is disposed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (e.g., a coil spring), and is disposed in the protruding position. The protruding member engaged with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and regulating the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging member from the protruding position When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , the substrate box A3100 is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the first position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state where the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and when it is displaced to the first position. A (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated with a dashed line. Further, in FIG. 123(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (positioning position and orientation) of the rotation axis A4410 and the number of arrangement, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 that protrude from each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in a direction away from each other. A pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side (in the direction of arrows U and D) of the substrate box A4100 (on the side opposite to the operation wall A210, in the direction of arrow U), and are located in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow U) of the substrate box A4100. The substrate box A4100 is formed in such a manner that it protrudes outward from both ends (L, R directions) along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, when the board box A4100 is rotated around the rotation axis A4410, the movable range (rotatable range) is at the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). 123(b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall A210) is vertical. It is set in a range of approximately 90° to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e., a position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall A210 can be directed upward, and its open side (the side opposite to the second connection wall A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present, and the switch device A120 can be directed upward. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front side of the operation wall A210 can face the back side of another component disposed on the inner frame 12. Therefore, separate parts can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and these switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be placed in positions that are difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 will not hit another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with the substrate box A4100, the substrate box A4100 cannot be placed in the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in this embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located lower in the gravity direction (vertical direction) than the first position, so the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. If the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, then the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the operator aware that the board box A4100 is in a state where it cannot be placed in the first position.

Note that when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is located closer to the front side of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape is such that it fits into the hole. This makes it possible to reduce the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210, thereby suppressing unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusions 154 decelerate the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you can increase the flow resistance of the ball by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, you can send air into the flow path, or you can adjust the speed of the ball's flow using magnetic force. You may do so.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the production member 700, and the width of the projection toward the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the back case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated. can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring it so that the insertion into the back case 510 is released when the operating member 183 is operated to shorten the extension width. Along with the displacement, the displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, it is possible to make the displacement regulating device 180 visible to the player.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by manual operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from power-on, it is avoided that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 starts displacing while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This can prevent overload from being applied to the operating member 183.

Further, a highly cushioning material may be provided around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. In addition, if a detection sensor is provided that can detect the arrangement of the operating member 183 without driving the displacement regulation device 180, and this detection sensor determines that the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state. In this case, the zoom unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be placed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, it may be placed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630, so a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and the By configuring the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d is extended, a change in the position of the lower arm member 630 in the left-right direction is prevented. I can do it.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of a device for regulating the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed above the game area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by providing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 can displace the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the granular member 320 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partitioning member 310, breaking the granular member 320, or damaging the partitioning member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where it is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side (acting standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 that the granular members 320 can come into contact with during shipping, and since the amount of displacement of the granular members 320 can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid a situation where cracks occur due to collisions between the granular members 320. can.

In addition, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate presentation means 160, is configured to be able to extend into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in an extended state. An overhanging member configured to be able to limit displacement may be provided.

By configuring this overhanging member to be pushable from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the game board 13), and configuring it so that it can be switched between an overhanging state and a non-overhanging state each time the push-in operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game machine parlor, the front frame 14 can be opened to operate the projecting member from the front side, thereby improving the operability of the projecting member.

Note that the manner in which the state of the overhanging member changes is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similar to the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between claws.

Furthermore, as another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 with the internal air pressure increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in a game machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before operating it, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with resin, and a magnet may be placed near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet at the time of shipment. On the other hand, during operation, by removing this magnet, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

In addition, in an embodiment in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the operation is performed to generate magnetic force near the partition member 310 (for example, by moving the magnet close to the partition member 310). By arranging a performance accessory (that moves), a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) can be included in the firing performance.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an insertion hole is formed in the back case 510 that is aligned with the center axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed at a predetermined end position, and when shipped, A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulation hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with tape, etc. After arriving at the game machine store, the clerk at the game machine store can remove the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be configured to be movable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may get dirty due to the tape used to fix it, and the metal or resin rods cannot be thrown away when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to another store, so it is difficult to store them. There may be a need to do so.

Additionally, if the storage of the metal rod or resin rod is left to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rod or resin rod is shipped to another store without it, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be ensured. There is a possibility that it cannot be done. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180, which is fastened and fixed to the back case 510, is an improvement from this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 and the front-to-back width of the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the back section lower part 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the front-to-back width of the left and right center portions 312b and the lower back section 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314. In this case, the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased below the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, so the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 The probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision can be reduced.

Further, for example, the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314 may be expanded to the same extent as the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Furthermore, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 does not need to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, making it easier to avoid locally excessive loads being applied to the partitioning member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapered direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular members 320 toward the front side.

Alternatively, for example, a bump-shaped portion may be provided in a part of the front plate portion 311 where the injected granular members 320 are expected to reach in a mass, and protrude in a raised manner toward the back side. good. This bump-shaped portion may be formed by installing and fixing a separate member on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or may be formed by forming a part of the front plate portion 311 to the rear side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 has a soccer ball shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring it with members of a certain size, it is possible to create gaps between the members, so that when the firing performance is performed, the granular members 320 can be scattered violently.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and configured to emit the granular members 320 diagonally forward and upward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the injection device 400 may be placed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161, or may be placed above the light guide plate 161. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. Note that when the injection device 400 is disposed at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the production standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is formed from a monochromatic (in this embodiment, red) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be formed by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to improve the appearance of the piles. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position of the granular member 320 in a stable posture in consideration of the center of gravity position, the colored layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be used as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape comparable to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitting well or when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitting. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter and are gathered on the collision member 420 by gravity, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is configured to include a biasing means for biasing the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the performance standby state), and to return the granular member 320 to the initial position side by the biasing force of the biasing means. It's okay. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end portion is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular members 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the biasing means may be bonded to each other, or they may not be bonded but not separated, and a part of the biasing device may be disposed inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being disposed apart from the granular member 320.

Further, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, in the same way as the gravity acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, an air pressure adjusting means may be used to adjust the air pressure in the internal space IE1. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be influenced by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when increasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1. When the air pressure in the internal space IE1 is lowered in such a manner as to remove gas from the granular member 320, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side, including up, down, left, right, front, and back.

Note that in the case of causing a change in atmospheric pressure, it is preferable to close the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with a function of closing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. For example, when a flexible, thin, highly deformable deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the lower displacement end position not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, but also when it is in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right center portions of the collision member 420 have an upwardly curved curved shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a slope shape with a sharp center and descending in the left-right direction, or it may have a hipped shape. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp center portion in the left-right direction. Therefore, the deviation in the left-right arrangement of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, it may have a planar shape perpendicular to the displacement direction, or it may have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310, and is dispersed by the collision.

Note that when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward, it is preferable that the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured in a curved shape with the left and right center portions convex upward; This makes it easier to avoid collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape when viewed from the side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the location where the granular members 320 are concentrated can be moved toward the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161, but the size is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be approximately the same size or larger than the visible area where the player can view the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can also do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the edge of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display on the third symbol display device 81 and is visible, so that the visibility of the display on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is used as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 may be arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by separate drive devices.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pillar part protruding from the plate part 422 toward the back side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front transmission member 440. In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the column is formed with convexes and convexes in such a manner that the radial length changes according to the angular arrangement, so that the position of the column is adjusted as the front transmission member 440 rotates. can be changed. Utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (slightly displaced).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement, but the manner in which the lid member 480 is displaced is not limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the entry may be made by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extending plate portions 485 disposed on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape concave toward the back side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is spaced apart and accommodated below the lid member 480 in the performance standby state of the injection device 400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protrusion may be formed that protrudes from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and this protrusion may be configured to be able to come into contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally accumulated, by pushing the granular members 320 with the protrusion, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the granular members 320 are deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular members 320 being deposited, and the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken up.

Alternatively, it may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged to be inclined to both left and right outer sides as they move toward the retreating side tip of the advancing/retracting part 481, starting from the left and right center of the entrance side tip of the overhanging part 482. . In this case, as the lid member 480 is displaced on the entry side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 toward the left and right outer sides.

Furthermore, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be opposite, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction, or the protrusions may be formed with a combination of different inclination degrees, or the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions. A protrusion without a ridge (a protrusion extending on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis or a protrusion extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the rotation axis) may be used. Further, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

Note that the length of the protrusion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be protruded until it reaches a circle that is coaxial and the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or it may be configured such that the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the reciprocating portion 481 is constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protrusions has a shape that follows the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retracting portion 481, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained from the shape of the lid member 480. It can be played depending on the part.

When a protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the timing at which the protrusion acts is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is housed below the lid member 480, the front transmission member 440 is rotated by 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction based on the production standby state, and the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small steps in the forward and reverse directions. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small increments, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be moved vertically. can be moved up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collided with the protrusion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the granular members 320 can be rearranged, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be prevented from collapsing.

Furthermore, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (displaces upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, making it easier to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

Note that the small forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be caused to rotate in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate part 312 that is disposed to face the advancing/retracting part 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side, so that the lid member Although the case where the distance between 480 and the curved plate part 312 changes has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 is 480 and the curved plate part 312 may be configured to change. Further, the entrance side end of the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be configured to be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation axis O1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member that can change its posture may be disposed on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, transmission arm In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, a case has been described in which the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be employed may be slightly larger.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 transmits the driving force by coming into contact with the linear motion member 410, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated between them, the front Load can be transmitted to the translation member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the translation member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the circumferential half of the transmission protrusion 446 that is disposed opposite to the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force with the protrusion 414 is disposed. On the other hand, by arranging a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force between it and the protrusion 414 on the opposite circumferential half, the repulsive force moves the linear motion member 410 to the lower end position. Since the load can be generated on the side to be maintained, it is possible to reduce the load at the time when the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 start contacting each other.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions: the groove forming part 442 formed on the front surface of the front side transmission member 440 and the groove forming part 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear side transmission member 460. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming a groove in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460 and transmitting the driving force via this groove, the number of objects to which the driving force is transmitted may be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which there is a possibility that it is unclear whether or not it is the timing to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 due to detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection results of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 are used to detect the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is possible. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the firing state, so if the firing state has not been reached, reverse rotation is possible, and if the firing state has been exceeded, reverse rotation is not possible. It can be determined that this is possible.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, linear sliding).

In the first embodiment, by making the shapes of the extension claws 734 of the effect member 700 different on the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where the configuration is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shapes of the extending claw portions 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is different for the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 than for the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. This balances the fact that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 start displacing earlier due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 simultaneously move in all directions. It can be made to appear as if displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 by bringing the rotary plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided to apply a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotary plate 730 is used both as a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as a means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the assembled state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and is moved radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although a case has been described in which the second guided protrusion 744b that is placed receives a load from behind, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, or the load is transmitted to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, one protrusion can have a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the extending claw portion 734 disposed outside the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescoping displacement members 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, an overhang is formed on the outer circumference of the rotary plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b is configured to be able to be pushed outward in the radial direction by the overhang, so that the telescopic displacement member 740 is in the discrete state. Directed displacement can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the presentation member 700 at the lower end position of displacement, and loosens the degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 allowed at the vertical intermediate position. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of tolerance for the change in posture of the effect member 700 increases as it moves toward the lower end position of the displacement.

Further, although the degree of posture change is determined by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated on the presentation member 700, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be The contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the front surface of the main body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or on the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the presentation member 700 is easily tolerated in the front surface of the main body member 601 or in the part where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in areas where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be configured to gradually narrow as the presentation member 700 approaches the end of its descent.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase/decrease device that can increase or decrease the displacement resistance of relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increase/decrease device may be a brake device that can increase/decrease frictional resistance, a device that increases/decreases displacement resistance using magnetic force, or a device that extends the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily constructed by disposing a magnetic material in a portion disposed close to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 (for example, the auxiliary arm portion in which the arcuate hole 634 is formed). be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the presentation member 700 goes downward, a large displacement in the expansion direction is allowed, and after the vertical position of the presentation member 700 is fixed, the expansion direction of the presentation member 700 is Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed such that the effect member 700 is displaced in the enlargement direction during its displacement in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of reducing the production member 700 (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the production member 700 is being displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 can be moved from side to side. The effect of changing from a vertically elongated posture to a vertically elongated posture can be offset, and a change in posture of the presentation member 700 in the forward tilting direction can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 is displaced up and down, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center of the center frame 86, and the presentation members 700 extend to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collective arrangement state, and change to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening the opening. The configuration may be such that the state changes to a state larger than that of the current state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the presentation member 700, it is preferable to make an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16, separate from the glass unit 16 that covers the front side of the gaming area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17, the second layer glass unit is tilted from the same front and back position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 to the front side toward the top. It is preferable.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to be inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is controlled by the biasing force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be formed intentionally, the effect of the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily produced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wrapped around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by wrapping the cable tube around the portion disposed above the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be changed appropriately.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing device such as a binding band, or the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 may be limited.

Furthermore, the position at which the electrical wiring DK2 is fastened can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 that is disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the constriction part 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. , a fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the connecting position.

Moreover, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed, the arrangement may be such that the electrical wiring DK1 is sandwiched and the displacement is limited, or the inner side of the arrangement portion 635 may be narrowed. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixing device such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 serving as a wiring route for the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the object to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the arrangement portion 635, or the presentation member 700 disposed on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction toward and away from the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes (front-back direction) corresponding to the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 on the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes. Although a case has been described in which this is the case, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the direction of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-rear, left-right, left-right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction; The direction may be inclined and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through these arm members. In this way, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be configured to be changeable by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by providing a drive device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the wing-like member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the extended state or enlarged state occurs when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, in a case where the wing-like members 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 whose positions in the front and back direction are the same with respect to the presentation member 700 are arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the presentation members 700 in a discrete state, the presentation member 700 It may be configured such that the state can be changed to an enlarged state.

In this case, a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is also possible to avoid predicting a change in the state of the effect member 700 based on the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing-like member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide route DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a curved channel with a longer left-right width than the guide route DL1, it may be curved in the front-back direction, or it may be formed as a channel that extends vertically without bending. .

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 flows down, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for the ball that enters the general winning port 63, or as a path for the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a, or may be used for both purposes. good. Furthermore, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path for the ball that has passed through the out port 71.

Moreover, since the arrangement of each winning a prize opening 63, 64, 640, 65 is set at an arbitrary position within the gaming area, the arrangement of the intermediate passage LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the gaming area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the gaming area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the gaming area, or may be arranged in front of the gaming area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along the path of the ball flowing down the game area in a front view.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center side of the gaming area. Therefore, a route that does not reach inside the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 is arranged with the thickness direction matching the vertical direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Furthermore, the entire range of the illumination board is not limited to being hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination board may be configured so that the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED can be directly recognized without being shielded.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the guide hole 733 may be formed into a step-like shape so that sections in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and sections in which it stops occur alternately.

Further, by fixing the guide holes 733 formed in a step-like shape to some of the guide holes 733, it is possible to displace the shielding design member 760 so as to approach or come into contact with it at different displacement trajectories or at different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illumination boards, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate presentation means 160 may be configured with a plurality of illuminated boards. In addition, the portions (left and right long portions) of the decoration means 170 corresponding to the horizontally long grooves 171a are configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long grooves 171a are used as intersection positions of a plurality of illumination boards, and the intersections are By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the structure may be such that light can be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing the number of light irradiation directions, the use is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illumination substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by wrapping the flexible substrate or fixing it in sections. As a result, the optical axes of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of directions in which light can be irradiated can be increased. Moreover, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the embodiments described above, regardless of whether the number of configurations is single or plural, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations on the key device A130, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formed protrusions) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one key device A130 is installed in the main control device A110, but the number of key devices A130 (number of installed keys) may be increased to two or more. .

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each structure with respect to other structures, the arrangement direction (direction, attitude, phase) of each structure with respect to other structures, or the arrangement of each structure with respect to other structures You may change the order of each. The arrangement order may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall A210 (second region). Although the case where the opening A260 (key device A130) is arranged in the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) is explained, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (on the third connection wall A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering part A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall part A210 (second region). , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the direction in which the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) is parallel to the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the operation wall A210 (second region) The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle (greater than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A260 (covering part A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. For example, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments (that is, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. ), or the order of only a part of the arrangement may be changed (for example, the arrangement order in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. ).

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering part A270 (end wall part A272), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other It may be formed in the part. That is, it does not need to be formed at a lower part of the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, i.e., the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. Examples include A204 or the right wall A205, the back wall A301, the upper wall A302, the lower wall A303, the left wall A304, or the right wall A305 of the box base A300. Similarly, other portions include, for example, the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, or the third connection wall portion A240.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length of the operating portion A122 to a position where it protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating wall portion A210. In addition, with the extension of the length dimension of the operation part A122, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall part A210.

In each of the above embodiments, when a recess is formed on the outer surface (front) of the box cover A200, A3200, and the part forming the recessed bottom of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, from the front wall A201) Although the case where the operation wall A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main controller A110) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A protrusion may be formed, and the portion forming the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be used as the operation wall A210 (that is, the operation may be performed at a position one step higher than the front wall A201 (on the opposite side from the main controller A110). positioning wall A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100, but this is not necessarily the case. The stored items are arbitrary as long as the operator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a storage item, for example, has a connecting part that is connected to an opening/closing lid that opens and closes an outlet for discharging the balls from the ball flow path, and when the connecting part is operated as an operator, the opening/closing lid can be opened and closed. Examples include members (structures, devices) that open and close.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed as the operating means (switch device A120, key device A130), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other types may be used. The operating means may also be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, and toggle switches.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation mode of the operator (operation part A122, key A140) is pushing and rotation, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw when both ends are pressed alternately, like the operation button of a rocker switch), and tilting (for example, toggle). An example is a mode in which the operating lever is tilted to one side with the proximal end as a fulcrum, such as the operating lever of a switch.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced operator, and the direction in which the tilting operator falls are in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable that the operating means be arranged in a parallel orientation. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the above-mentioned operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is a shape formed only in the area corresponding to the displacement locus of the operator (the area necessary to allow displacement). Also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 held by fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and when no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or end surface of the key A140 gripped with a finger and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (circular ring) The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact with each other. That is, at least one of the surfaces or end surfaces of the key A140 in the OFF position or the ON position that is held by fingers is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When the key A140 is (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be configured to slide against the end wall parts A272, A2272 (outer edge of the annular part A272a).

Note that there is a gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be held with fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), and a gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the key device A130 can be tilted at a specified angle with respect to the printed circuit board A119 (an angle that allows the key device A130 to be tilted). In other words, the angle is set to such a value that at least one of the gaps disappears (the key A140 or the key device A130 comes into contact) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is difficult to come off or be damaged or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one location, or may be formed at three or more locations. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those positions (phases) in the circumferential direction are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering part A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are provided to protrude outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is provided to protrude radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protrusion is provided radially inwardly on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may also be adopted in which a recessed portion is provided and the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, in order to cover the key device A130 with the covering part A270 (insert the protrusion into the recess), it is possible to continue the recess to the end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A133a (the protrusion). It is sufficient if an opening is formed in the end surface for inserting the part into the recess.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. may be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering part A270 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such protrusions is , may be one, or may be three or more. When forming a plurality of pieces, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions that are different in phase by approximately 180 degrees from the first protrusions A211 and the second protrusions A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the OFF position and the ON position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211, the second protrusion A212, and other protrusions, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) ) and width dimension (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the cross-sectional disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination thereof. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (the vertical dimension from the front (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210) is along the extending direction. Although a case has been described in which the distance is constant, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

Note that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are set. It may also be set to (phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A272) is an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position. It is preferable that it be formed only in the area necessary to allow displacement. That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140; A second sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (opposite side to one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the embodiments described above, the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the center of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) and In this example, the rotation radius of the other side is different from the rotation radius of the other side, but this is not necessarily the case. The distance to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface may be substantially the same. That is, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be formed. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, substantially circular, substantially elliptical, substantially triangular, substantially polygon of pentagon or more, and a combination thereof.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is approximately parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200), but this is not necessarily the case. They are not limited to this, and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge (in each of the above embodiments, three sides) of the operation wall A210 is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A230). A240), and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200, A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 matches a part of the outer edge of the box cover A200, A3200. is arranged (formed), however, the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200, A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other arrangements may also be used. Other examples of the arrangement include a staggered arrangement, an irregularly distributed arrangement, a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually perpendicular lines), and the like. In addition, when disposed substantially in series (substantially in one row), the serial direction may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (box cover A200, A3200), or may be disposed substantially orthogonally. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the end wall portions A272, A2272 is formed as a flat surface, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is formed on the end wall when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). It is preferable to extend radially straight from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271) radially outward. Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such protrusions (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end walls A272, A2272, and the end walls A272, A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F). This is because the rigidity of the ribs can be used to suppress damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ribs may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front. A plurality of such ribs may be provided with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). Note that it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (i.e., from the printed circuit board A119). Although a case has been described in which the walls A208, A280, and A290 are located on the side separated from each other, the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Furthermore, the amount of retreat of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may change.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat of the erected end surface from the reference plane. The further the printed circuit board A119 is from the fastening hole A206a, the weaker the regulation by the screw ASC is compared to the closer area. By making the distance of the upright end surface smaller from the reference plane, the farther the upright wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat from the reference plane. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the erected walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, if the erected end surface of the erected wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is assumed to be the reference surface, the erected wall A280, the erected wall A290, and the erected wall A208 are arranged in the order of the fastened hole A206a ( Since the distance from the standing wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (i.e., the standing end face of the standing wall A208). It is preferable to minimize the amount of retreat from the reference plane.

Furthermore, each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may also be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may each be inclined with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box cover A200 and A3200, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol holding lamp 84.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the set value is not displayed on either the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when starting the setting change mode, regardless of the setting value before starting, update the setting value to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value), and press the operation part A122 of the switch device A120. A configuration may also be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent setting values from being illegally acquired by illegal means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Furthermore, when changing settings during a game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting values. Note that in this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description has been omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided, and the inner frame with respect to the outer frame 11 is If the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is allowed, and the inner frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the configuration may be configured such that setting changes are prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Further, a second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions with the rotation axis A410 as the rotation center). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device If the input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by the second detection sensor, the settings cannot be changed. It may be configured to be permissible. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). In the case where both are provided, the first detection sensor detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more, and also detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect an opening (rotation) of more than an angle. Note that examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened and closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have described a case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected), , even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the configuration may be such that operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. In this case, the setting value accompanying the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have explained cases in which the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (i.e., setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., even if they are connected or disconnected), operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (i.e., when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) It may also be configured such that setting changes are prohibited. Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being operated illegally and paying out game balls.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion A2273 is extended in a stripe shape as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 and AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be formed intermittently from the position AP1 to the position AP6, including the positions AP2 to AP5.

Note that the range in which the protrusion A2273 or a plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from position AP1 to position AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5, and this range may be reduced or expanded. . This range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is in the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. 122). Although a case has been described in which the displacement structure is arranged in b), it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the board box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrows L and R), and the board box is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (in the direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is placed in the second position, and the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F and B) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). An example is a mode in which the substrate box is disposed at the second position by being displaced (rotated) about A410 as the rotation center.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating shaft A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and at least one or both rotating shafts A4410 are It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300 is formed with a divided body of the rotating shaft A4410, and with the box covers A200, A3200 connected to the box base A300, one rotating shaft is formed from each divided body. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and although the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described, it is also possible to form the rotation axis A410 in the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. It's okay. Further, similarly to the case described above, one rotating shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed on each of the box covers A200 and A3200 connected to the box base A300.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Production that incorporates randomness>
A gaming machine comprising an action means, a displacement means configured to be able to be displaced by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured such that the displacement means has a plurality of displacement modes. A1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a displacement means that is displaceably disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and is displaced as a drive device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095 ). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the movement pattern of the displacement means is poor, the presentation on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention level gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary means changes the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention at a high level.

Note that the specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacing means can be displaced, or a pushing device that changes the displacement mode of the displacing means by displacing and pushing the displacing means by a drive device separate from the acting means. It can also be a means. Further, the drive device for the pushing means may also be used as a drive device for driving the action means.

In gaming machine A1, the acting means is capable of configuring a first state in which a first acting part can act on the displacing means and a second state in which a second acting part can act on the displacing means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the portions at which the action means act on the displacement means can be made different, so even if the action of the action means is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be varied.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the acting means includes abutting means that applies a load by abutting against the displacing means, and is configured to be able to generate loads in a plurality of ways via the abutting means. A gaming machine A3 featuring:

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of load modes generated through the contact means, so that the displacement mode of the displacement means can be made into a plurality of types.

In gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable and includes a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means. and a second abutting part different from the first abutting part, and the angle between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the first abutting part (or the tangent line of the first abutting part) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4 characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent to the second contact portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made in multiple types. It can be generated in the direction of

In gaming machine A4, the abutting means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first abutting part and the second abutting part, which are parallel to each other, are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the abutting means. A gaming machine A5 comprising:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, it is possible to apply a load to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with less energy loss. can be done. This makes it possible to ensure a large amount of displacement of the displacement means.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A5 is provided with a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacing the acting means, and the load generating means generates a load at a position where the displacing means are more densely arranged. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A5, it is possible to efficiently transmit the load to the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a supporting manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on a side where it is easier to maintain a balance in arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A gaming machine A7 featuring:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by changing the posture of the action means, so that local overload of the action means is prevented. This can be avoided.

Note that the cause of the change in posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, this may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When changing the posture of the acting means by balancing the load from the displacement means, it is possible to easily change the posture of the acting means by providing multiple lengths from the part facing the displacement means to the supporting position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of nuisance.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guiding means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacing means, and the guiding means is capable of guiding the displacement of the displacing means in one direction. and a second guide part capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction, and the first guide part and the second guide part are arranged on a surface facing the displacement means. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied depending on the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the acting means is configured to be displaceable, and is configured such that the ease of maintaining balance of the displacing means changes depending on its arrangement, and is arranged at a position where it is easy to maintain balance of the displacing means. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A gaming machine A10 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or more members, and the members are configured not to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together and becoming a lump. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making holes in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing/retracting means that move back and forth within the range of displacement of the displacement means>
The arrangement means is configured to be able to be placed in a predetermined range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to be displaceable in an advance/retreat direction with respect to the range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to move into a predetermined part of the range, thereby displacing the range. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the width of the gaming machine B1 is configured to be changeable, and the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a first movable member that displaces left and right, and a second movable member that enters into a range created between the first movable members as the first movable member is displaced. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing/retracting means has a plurality of ways in which the width of the range changes when it enters the range, it is possible to configure the displacement means in a plurality of ways. It is possible to improve the displacement mode.

Note that the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, there is no limitation on the method of configuring a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing/retracting means. For example, the entrance side of the advancing/retracting means may be formed of an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by having parts with different widths entering the range, or the width of the range may be changed by changing the displacement width of the advancing/retracting means. The width may be made variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means configured to prevent the placement means from going in and out, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retracting means enters the range when it is in a non-changing state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the box-shaped means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that the advancing and retracting means can be inserted thereinto, and the box-shaped means is provided with an opening formed in such a manner that the positioning means cannot be inserted therethrough.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, it is possible to allow the advance/retreat means to enter the range through the opening, while preventing the arrangement means from falling out of the range.

Note that the arrangement of the openings is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the placement means will accidentally drop out of the range. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, on the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to avoid that the load from the placement means is applied to the advancing/retracting means during displacement, and that the displacement of the advancing/retreating means is obstructed or damage occurs in the advancing/retracting means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, wherein the advancing/retracting means is configured to guide the arranging means in different directions depending on the direction in which it comes into contact with the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing and retreating means. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of performances, thereby improving the performance effects of performances using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance/retreat means is configured such that, in a state in which it enters the range, a gap between it and the opposing surface of the range is shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A game machine B4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even if the arranging means is disposed on the side far from the advancing/retracting means, the advancing/retracting means can be moved to the arranging means in the entered state. It can be made to work.

Note that it may be configured such that there is no gap between the advancing/retracting means and the opposing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and there is no gap in another part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing/retracting means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured such that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip, where the positional deviation from the axis is likely to be the largest, enters the range first, so that the deviation from the axis can be improved. It is possible to quickly respond to positional deviations and reduce the resistance to subsequent entry operations.

In the gaming machine B5, the representative tip portion includes a predetermined protruding portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the side receding from the range as the distance from the protruding portion increases along the axial direction. Game machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion during the approach process of the advancing and retracting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retracting means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhang in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing/retracting means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means displaced by the overhanging part It is possible to secure a location for the installation.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape where the range side is open. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is open before the advancing/retracting means enters, or the shape may be such that the range side is open when the advancing/retreating means enters.

Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the advance/retreat means, the transmitter and the advance/retreat means This means that the driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retracting means is configured to be changeable, and the contact area is determined by the approach of the advancing/retracting means into the range. A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured such that it reaches a maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is configured such that the contact area is maximized at the beginning of the approach where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing/retracting means starts contacting the arrangement means. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the advancing/retracting means and the transmission means can be improved.

Note that the mode of the advancing/retracting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for displacing outside the gaming area or a means for displacing within the gaming area.

<Synchronized operation of two members using transmission cam>
A drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and made up of one or more members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising: A first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target section of the displacement means in a first aspect; A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to a second target section.

A drive device used for displacing a displacement means in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There are gaming machines (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-202210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement devices in order to execute the motion performance of the displacement devices, the drive timings are shifted. There is a problem in that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with a first transmission section and a second transmission section, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target section or the second target section of the displacement means, respectively. With this structure, transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the second target part can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

Note that the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted simultaneously) may be used.

Moreover, when transmitting the driving force to the first target part and the second target part at the same time, it is preferable to arrange the driving force such that at least a part of the driving force is generated along the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight for driving force transmission.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target section and the driving force transmission to the second target section occur at different times in the gaming machine C1.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, by keeping the maximum value of the drive resistance low, it is possible to suppress the driving force required of the drive means.

Note that driving force transmission here may mean a load in the traveling direction where the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or it can mean a load transmission caused by a displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target part and a second member having the second target part, and the displacement means has a displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The displacement locus of A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to transmit driving force to the second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, the driving force can be directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means, and the driving force can be indirectly transmitted to the second member via the first member.

In the game machine C3, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member when the first member is displaced toward the predetermined position. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3, it is possible to avoid the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches a predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be smoothly switched. can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3 or C4, the driving force transmission mode can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. This makes it possible to avoid unintentional collision or contact of each member.

Any one of gaming machines C3 to C5 includes a biasing means configured to bias the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the biasing force. A game machine C6 in which the first member is arranged on the side in the predetermined direction with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is placed in a predetermined position while the second member is placed on the opposite side in a predetermined direction with respect to the first member. I can do it. This makes it possible to determine the timing for displacing the second member against the urging force as the transmission means is displaced, and the timing for stopping the second member against the urging force.

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting section of the transmitting means is displaced toward the predetermined direction. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the biasing force can be used supplementarily.

In any one of gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the second transmission section is configured to control the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the movement of the user.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member is a displacement state in which it is pushed by the second transmission part and a displacement state in which it is separated from the second transmission part. can be configured.

In any of gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel to the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating section.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the regulating portion blocks the biasing force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member, so that the biasing force reaches the driving means. can be prevented (to a lesser extent).

Note that the mode of the regulating section is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits displacement to sliding displacement by regulating displacement, or a shaft support that limits displacement to rotational displacement.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means is in a first state in which it is displaced or stopped by receiving the driving force of the drive means, and in a first state in which it receives a load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced and stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting load generation to times when the device is far away.>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the abutment abutting against the displacement means. and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means, the first means being configured to be able to change its state between the state and the non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the displacement means, and an object to which a load applied from the outside is transmitted to the first means is configured to be switchable. A game machine D1 characterized by:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the displacement means consisting of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means comes into contact with another movable body at the displacement terminal position (upper end position) and can receive a load. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the load from another movable body may be transmitted to the drive means via the displacement means, and the state of the drive means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) due to control, Since there is a possibility that there will be a difference in the state of the actual driving means, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

It is also conceivable that the load applied to the drive means may cause the operating resistance of the drive means to increase or decrease unstably, leading to accelerated deterioration of the drive means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. Furthermore, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the drive means, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, or the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to absorb the load. It may be configured so that this occurs only in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine D2 in the gaming machine D1, wherein the load that the displacement means receives from the first means and the driving force that the displacement means receives via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the game machine D2, the load applied to the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 is provided with a placement means arranged so as to collide with the first means, and is configured such that the collision of the placement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that:

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1 or D2, since the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, the load transmission between the transmission means and the displacement means is prevented. Can be blocked.

Note that the collision of the arrangement means may occur when the first means is in contact with the first means, or may occur when the first means is not in contact with the first means. If a collision of the arrangement means occurs in a non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and the contact portion is bent in the direction of the load generated by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is configured flexibly to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second abutting part configured to be able to come into contact with each other, and the second contact part of at least one of the first means or the displacement means The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the contact portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb shock, so that it is possible to suppress load transmission to the driving means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is characterized in that it includes a biasing means for biasing the displacement means, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of a displacement range in a biasing direction of the biasing means. A gaming machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where it waits for load generation from the transmission means). It is easy to set the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the first means and the displacement means are separated. Thereby, the driving means can be controlled easily and appropriately.

Furthermore, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7 in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, wherein the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used to change the attitude of the first means, so that load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. and the transmission means is in contact with the displacement means, displacing the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first biasing force of the biasing force is A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to the means is disabled and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the position of the arrangement means changes in response to a collision).

<Regulating one of the forward and reverse rotations with conditions>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point from which the displacement mode changes, and from the reference position, a plurality of types of displacement means are provided. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced to the predetermined position.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in multiple performances (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, different operations correspond to whether or not the drive direction of the drive device is switched, so the type of performance can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the performance that will be executed from now on. There is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the perspective of increasing player interest because the player can predict what will happen.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the determination participation means can make it difficult for the player to determine the performance that will be executed from now on. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a hit performance and a miss performance may be different performances that involve displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if the displacement means is displaced to the predetermined position in one manner, it will be known whether the displacement from the predetermined position is correct (for example, a driving sound is generated). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, even if a displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), it can be difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not.

Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement velocity, or a displacement velocity pattern.

The gaming machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and a regulating means for regulating displacement of the displacing means, and the regulating means is configured such that the driving means generates a driving force. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E2 is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the displacement means when the displacement means is not in use.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, the driving sound of the drive means can be suppressed when the displacement means is regulated, so that when the displacement means is regulated, it is possible to eliminate whether the driving direction is the forward direction when the game machine E2 is driven again after that. This can make it difficult to determine whether the direction is the opposite direction.

Moreover, unlike the case where the drive means continues to generate driving force when performing a long-time performance (long reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means regulated, generation of heat by the drive means can be suppressed.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the regulating means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced compared to the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is provided separately.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a determination involvement means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to determine in which mode the displacement is occurring among the plurality of types of modes. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the discriminating means can be configured so that it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode of the displacing means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode only in this case, it is easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means while the displacement mode is difficult to discriminate.

A gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming machine E4 is configured such that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E4, it is possible to switch the drive direction of the drive means while maintaining the displacement means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the propriety.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 is provided with a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that it also serves as a determining means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used both, so that the detection sensor is The number of devices installed can be reduced.

<Sense of unity of multiple parts>
A gaming machine in which a first member and a second member are configured to be displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-231434 ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, so depending on the speed at which the first member and the second member approach each other, there is a risk that the first member and the second member may move back after contacting each other. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of maintaining the performance mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not to make them approach each other on the same straight line, but to change the direction and approach each other after approaching each other on a different straight line, so that the first member and the second member It is possible to avoid reversion and maintain the presentation mode easily.

In the game machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for coming into contact with each other; The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3, which is the gaming machine F1 or F2, and includes a load generating means capable of generating a load directed toward maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

Note that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that the player is likely to receive (for example, the performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (for example, the gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generation means may be changed accordingly.

Further, the load by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, generation of a load and elimination of the load may be switched in accordance with the above-mentioned changes in the situation. Note that the load generating means may be external.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and the load generating means A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the timing of load generation by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member, thereby eliminating the deviated timing. This can prevent loads from occurring.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In gaming machine F4, gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined state is a contacting state in which at least a portion of the first member is in contact with the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F4, it is possible to easily perform a performance in which the gap between the first member and the second member is filled.

A gaming machine F6 characterized in that in the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, in any one of gaming machines F3 to F6, wherein the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, so that the state is not limited to maintaining the state against displacement in one direction. It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even if the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid noticeable deviations in their arrangement.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded parts that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded parts include a first loaded part and a first loaded part. a second loaded part having a larger displacement relative to the load generating means than the loaded part, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded part before the second loaded part. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Furthermore, the role of the load applied to the first loaded section and the second loaded section can be separated. For example, the first loaded part can be used to arrange the position at a predetermined position, and the second loaded part can be used to adjust the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating means has a portion that applies a load to the first member or the second member toward the side opposite to gravity, compared to other portions of the first member. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the opposing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, in other parts, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A gaming machine F10 characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F3 to F9, the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated during the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembly work is performed in a state of contact, it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member, so the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the first and second members with contact surfaces as designed, thereby preventing situations where the load from the load generating means is more likely to cause misalignment, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in attitude of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a displacement means configured to enable displacement consisting of a change in position and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, although the part that supports the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed with a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap to ensure displacement, so the position of the displacement means is There was a problem in that measures against changes were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the perspective of suppressing changes in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the configuration of the action means can suppress the change in the posture of the displacement means. Thereby, even if the space in which displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the displacement means and the wall member forming the space.

Note that the direction of the attitude change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or it may be oscillated about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

The gaming machine G1 in the gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force for suppressing a change in the posture of the displacing means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the change in posture of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for disposing the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the end of the displacement where the direction of displacement is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

In addition, for example, when the displacement means itself is scaled/contracted or rotated by the driving force installed in the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so the driving force generation position By increasing the number of acting force generation positions, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that in the gaming machine G0 or G1, the acting means is configured to support the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0 or G1, since the operating means supports the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacing means, the displacing means is prevented from tilting. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machine G2, the acting means includes an auxiliary supporting means that supports the displacing means at a position different from the horizontal plane where the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the displacing means is supported by the main supporting means and the auxiliary supporting means at three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line, so that the displacing means is improved. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as a guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added with a function not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means is capable of being displaced in such a manner that the area as viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is at a maximum at a displacement end position of the displacement means. The game machine G5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacing means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacing means is most effective. , it is possible to effectively suppress changes in the posture of the displacement means.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smoother. In other words, while the displacement means is displacing, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases. , the problem is that the drive device becomes larger.

On the other hand, by configuring to reduce the number of acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid excessive displacement resistance of the displacement means and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Propeller unit wiring guide>
The electric wiring displacement means includes a displacement means, an electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and an electric wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to be able to be displaced to a side that avoids the displacement means when the gaming machine H1 is displaced toward a side that approaches the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member that interlocks with the displacement means, thereby limiting the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474 (see official bulletin). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue displacing beyond the electric wiring in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electric wiring outside, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the electric wiring displacement means is configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacement means, contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is actively prevented. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

Note that there is no limitation in the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion. For example, it may be possible that there is a risk of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion if the predetermined portion remains stationary, or it may be the case that the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be movable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is movable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction can be avoided from being limited by the electric wiring.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H2, wherein the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined directional view, so that the displacement of the electric wiring causes the displacement in the predetermined directional view. The effect on visibility can be reduced.

Any one of gaming machines H1 to H3 includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stop means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stop means.

Note that the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stop means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stop means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer circumference of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be arranged in a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the stopping means is disposed outward from a displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is disposed outward from the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, the stopping means is extended to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the amount of electrical wiring that can be accommodated in the stopping means can be increased, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means can be increased to compensate for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is configured integrally with the displacing means, and includes a corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence change means.

<Flow path of the ball passing through the electric tube>
It is characterized by comprising a gaming area and a flowing down means for causing game balls ejected from the gaming area to flow down, and the flowing down means including a section configured to allow the gaming balls ejected from the gaming area to be visually recognized. A gaming machine I0.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is made of a plywood board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game balls discharged from the game area flow toward the back side of the base plate, they are hidden by the base plate, and the game ball cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, he or she may get the impression that the game ball has suddenly disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often placed close to each other, so even though the ball actually entered the out hole, it did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, the player may feel distrustful that the prize ball is not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine had a problem in that there was room for improvement in the ejection of game balls from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the falling means is configured with a section where the game balls ejected from the gaming area can be visually recognized, so the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down the section. By doing so, it is possible to check how the game balls are arranged from the game area. This makes it possible to improve the ejection of game balls from the game area.

Note that the ejection of game balls from the game area refers to all manners in which game balls are ejected from the game area. For example, the ball may be ejected through a prize ball opening, or it may be discharged through an out port where there is no prize ball.

The gaming machine I0 is arranged such that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass therethrough, and includes a benefit giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passing of the gaming ball, The means includes a first component that is configured to be able to guide a game ball toward a side that approaches the profit giving means above the profit giving means, and a first component that is disposed downstream of the first component and that is configured to guide the game ball toward the profit giving means. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming balls flowing down the flowing means, the player can grasp how the gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area, and It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been ejected from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that players can play games comfortably. You can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined benefit is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a payout of a prize ball, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol or a second symbol, or other profits.

The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes an attention means formed inwardly of the gaming area, and a frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flowing means is arranged within the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is configured to cause game balls to flow down inside the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing means allows the game ball ejected from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to make the player understand that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means that displays a variable pattern, a movable accessory that can be moved by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I2, wherein the downstream means includes a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Improvements to the board design and around the light guide plate>
The predetermined substrate includes a predetermined substrate including a light emitting means, and a disposed means disposed on the near side of at least a portion of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction, and the predetermined substrate has an area that is visually recognized as viewed in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine J0 characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated board having light emitting means such as an LED is placed on the back side of a base board with a gaming area on the front, and the surface of the illuminated board and the surface of the base board are arranged on the back side of the base board. There is a gaming machine in which the players are arranged substantially parallel to each other (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the area of the illuminated board that is visible when viewed from the front is large, so when irradiating LED light to a decorative member placed on the front side of the illuminated board, the field of view is illuminated. The decorative board may get in there, and the decorative member and the illumination board may appear to be overlapping in the front and back.

On the surface of the illumination board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and it usually does not have a high design quality. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illumination board are visually recognized as overlapping in the front and back, the appearance is poor and there is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of a predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area visible when viewed from the area of the gaming machine J0 is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. It is possible to configure a region where only light can be seen without overlapping the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the predetermined board.

Note that the arrangement of the predetermined substrates is not limited at all. For example, it may be partially hidden so that the visible area is reduced, or it may be entirely covered so that no visible area is present.

Note that the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of a given substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the given substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between the two. It may be something that can be done.

Note that the light transmittance of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be configured to have good light transmission, or may be configured to have low light transmission, or the degree of light transmission may be varied from part to part.

In the gaming machine J0, the placement means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surfaces of the predetermined substrate and changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. is provided with a low transmittance means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means, and the predetermined substrate is at least partially disposed inside the low transmittance means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined board can be hidden by the low-transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

Note that the direction changing means is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, it may be a movable accessory configured to be able to be displaced by a drive device, it may be a gaming area or channel through which game balls flow, or it may be a case member or decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

In the game machine J1, the game machine J2 is characterized in that the low-transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion that constitutes a predetermined pattern or figure shape.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1, the low-transmission means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer circumference, or it may be a bone that is composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns and has a series of meanings. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3, in any of the game machines J0 to J2, wherein the predetermined board is arranged with an end surface of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined board when viewed in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that is visible when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means, and the predetermined board is configured to cover the display area of the display means and the display area of the display means. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a gaming area in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, unlike the case where light is irradiated from the back of the gaming area to the front side and performing a light effect as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board is emitted. It is possible to perform a production in which light is irradiated on the player's side, or a production in which light is irradiated only on the gaming area side.

In the gaming machine J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board that forms the gaming area on the front side.

According to the game machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light emitting means is easier than when the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case where movable accessories etc. are arranged, for example. The degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electrical wiring that supplies electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back side of the game board to the outside of the back case, even when the back case side is visible from the window of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see all the way to the back of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, if the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the back case, the space for placing the specified board will be limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but there is a method of placing the specified board on the back side of the game board. If so, the predetermined substrate can be placed at any position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrates can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
It includes a displacement means and a restriction means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means, and the restriction means has a first state in which it can act on the displacement means and a second state in which it cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 is configured to be able to change states, and is configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a movable accessory (displacement means) that moves downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

In other words, while gaming machines are configured to be able to operate normally after they have been installed, it is difficult to secure movable accessories even in situations where large vibrations or external forces may be applied to the gaming machine, such as during shipping. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to secure the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning material in the area where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be canceled by changing the state of the restriction means, so that the arrangement of the displacement means can be fixed and released easily.

On the other hand, unlike when the cushioning material is removed, the limiting means is not removed, so it is difficult to continue the game if the state easily changes due to external forces that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems during the game.

A gaming machine K2 in the gaming machine K1, wherein the limiting means is configured to be able to change its state between the first state and the second state when power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, since the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the worker from having difficulty in performing the work during a power outage state or during recovery work from a power outage state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to displace the operating section by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operating portion is configured to be able to be displaced away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by a biasing force of the biasing means, and in the second state, the operating portion is configured to change its state away from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a separate position apart from the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operating section is placed at a separate position away from the reference position in the second state, there are no effects on the gaming machine after installation, such as opening and closing of the door. It is possible to avoid causing a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change of the limiting means due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the second state.

A gaming machine K4, which is any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, wherein the operating section of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means that forms the area in which the displacing means can be displaced.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, since the operating section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacing means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means, The displacement means can be prevented from coming into contact with the worker.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to move the operating section from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The limiting means is configured to change its state as it is displaced, and the limiting means includes guiding means that guides the displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure a permissible displacement width (posture change width) of the portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, since the operating means is configured to be able to be displaced in a direction that intersects with a predetermined direction, the operating unit has a direction. When an unknown load is applied, it can be prevented from easily displacing in a predetermined direction, and it can be easily prevented from displacing the operating portion by a predetermined amount. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a change in the state of the restricting means due to unintended external force caused by opening/closing a door or the like.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be able to engage with the guiding means, the urging means is disposed at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is configured to engage with the guiding section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is placed at a position away from the center of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, even if an external force in an unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating section does not displace with the engaging section as the fulcrum. (posture change) and can prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means which is configured to be rotatable on a support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging part is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall can open the front door. This makes it easier to operate the control means. That is, since the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width becomes larger when the front door is opened (opposite side of the support shaft), the operating position of the restricting means can be moved closer to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7, since the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side, it is possible to prevent an operator who works with the front door open from accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, compared to the case where it is placed on the opposite side of the support shaft, the load applied to the restricting means when opening and closing the front door can be reduced, so that the restricting means is not in a state due to the impact caused by opening and closing the front door. Changes can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9, which is one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, characterized in that, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide displacement of the limiting means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means is reduced with the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone reduced. can be improved.

A gaming machine K10, characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with a prevention notification means for notifying that when electricity is applied in the first state, the continuation of the electricity-carrying state is to be prevented.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify that the state of the restriction means should be switched from the first state.

Note that the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by displaying an error message on a liquid crystal display device, notification may be made by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means may be turned on (or kept in an off state). You may also notify us by doing so.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, and an opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operating means. A game machine L0 characterized by:

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent unauthorized access to the control board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the control board is provided with an operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was time-consuming.

According to the game machine L0, the operating means is provided on the object and is operable, and the housing is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means, so that the operating means can be operated through the opening. can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the effort can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering parts A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the opposing portion covers at least a portion of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element. A gaming machine M2 is characterized in that some of the gaming machines are arranged facing each other.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the opposing part is arranged to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the container from the opening. Insertion can be suppressed.

A gaming machine M3 in the gaming machine M1 or M2, wherein the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing part is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, a gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protruding part is provided on the opposing part.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, since the opposing part is provided with a protruding part, the rigidity of the opposing part can be increased and damage to the opposing part can be suppressed.

Note that the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion that extends in a stripe shape.

The gaming machine M5 in the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the protrusion protrudes from a surface of the facing portion on a side opposite to the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M4, since the protrusion is provided protruding from the surface of the facing portion on the side opposite to the first surface of the operating means, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By reducing the gap between the container and the surface, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the protrusion comes into contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, since the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means, at such a contact point, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By eliminating the gap between the containers, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container.

In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element when inserting the operating element into the operating means, the opposing part will not move in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the proximal end side of the facing portion can be suppressed.

In addition, since the facing part is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, the elastic deformation of the facing part can be used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact with the protrusion. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires.

In any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the opposing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the opposing portion has an edge abutting the operating element inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object) increases. Additionally, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means will also be displaced in the direction of the displacement, resulting in a large load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object). Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing part is formed so that the edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. By bringing the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) into contact with the edge of the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating element. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the housing includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be reduced. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

Here, if the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, if the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, if the operator carelessly moves the operating element) (If the operator is pressed in the lateral direction by colliding with another member, such as by inadvertently opening or closing the member on which the housing is installed, the operating means will also be tilted and the operation The load on the root of the means (the part that connects it to the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M10 in the gaming machine M9, wherein an external shape of the operating means at a base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than an internal shape of the covering part.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape at the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering part, so that the outer shape at the base end side of the operating means The gap between the cover and the cover can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means includes a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering part or the operating means is provided with a bulging part formed to bulge, and the other of the covering part or the operating means is Since the receiving part that receives the bulging part is provided, the gap between the bulging part and the receiving part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine M11.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M11, the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging part and the receiving part are brought into contact with each other, and the operating means can be operated. Excessive displacement (especially displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M13 in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the housing includes an erected wall that is erected from its inner surface and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M14 in the gaming machine M13, wherein the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine M13, since the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, it is possible to block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface of the control board on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit by solder is the side on which the operating means is disposed. A gaming machine M15 characterized in that is set on the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit of the control board by solder is the operating means. Since it is set on the opposite side to the side on which the wall is installed, it is easy to bring the tip of the standing wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the connection between the object (control board) and the wall is It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening hits, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the interior of the container.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, a gaming machine M16 is characterized in that the upright wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the upright tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines M13 to M15, the upright wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness of the upright tip is reduced, so that it does not come into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the object and the erected tip. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In the game machine M16, the thickness of the upright end of the upright wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface facing the operation means.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M16, the thickness of the erected tip of the erected wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side. Therefore, while improving moldability, it is possible to suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the interior of the container. That is, by forming the tapered surface, the shape change is gradual and the fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erected tip of the erected wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In any of gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing has one outer surface formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion protrudes from two areas.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is separated from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface of the side is formed and the covering portion is provided protruding from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Gaming machine M19, in any one of gaming machines M9 to M12, wherein the covering section projects from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering section.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering part projects from the outer surface of the container and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering part, so that wires, etc. This makes it difficult for the tip of the foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, if it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening because the opening cannot be seen due to a shield, etc., the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the game machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire hits the outer surface of the covering part, and no further damage is caused. progress can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering part can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

<About the concept of the invention using the board box A100 (erected walls A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. Game machine N1.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so that it can come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator, so the operating means or the operator can be held in the housing. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating means by receiving it. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N1, the game machine N2 is characterized in that the storage body is provided with an upright wall that stands up from its inner surface and whose upright tip comes into contact with the object.

Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operating means, there is a risk that the container will be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object. serves as a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, since deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine N2, the gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, so that the standing wall is protected against tilting of the operating means in any direction. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the erected wall can block a path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, since the standing wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected, the rigidity of the container is improved. By utilizing this, the rigidity of the standing wall can be increased, and by connecting the inner surfaces with each other, the rigidity of the entire container can be increased. Therefore, the function of the upright wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that suppresses deformation of the container when the operating means is tilted can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the housing includes a covering part that covers one end of the operating means, so that the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part. Therefore, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering section covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering section can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing, the housing includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a striped manner, and one end of the protrusion extends from the outer surface of the housing. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that it is connected to a covering part.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion that projects from the outer surface and extends in a stripe shape. Since one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part, the protrusion can function as a rib and the covering part can be supported by the protrusion. Therefore, by bringing the operating means into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, it is possible to suppress tilting of the operating means, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress damage to the covering part at that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, since the covering portion is provided to protrude from the outer surface of the container, the height of the protruding portion of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

In gaming machine N6, gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the container is provided with a display section formed on the outer surface thereof to display predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display section formed on the outer surface of the container and displaying predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an instruction line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display section. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and when an operator is inserted into the first surface and displaced, the operating means is operated and the housing is opened. A game characterized in that the body includes a facing part facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing part is formed such that an edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In addition, since the opposing part is formed so that its edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means, the operating element (i.e., the position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be placed on the edge of the opposing part. It is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operator by making it come into contact with the part. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N9 in the gaming machine N8, wherein the opposing portion is disposed to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed in at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator from being inhibited, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Further, by increasing the area of the opposing portion that contacts the displaced operator, excessive displacement (particularly displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operator can be easily suppressed. As a result, excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed to be able to displace the operating element to a first position, and the operating means is configured such that a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing part are in a position where they are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is the second position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to the second position is in a position where the opposing part comes into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part. Since the position where the operator is displaced to the first position or the second position is in contact with the opposing part, the operator displaced to the first or second position is in contact with the opposing part. By using the protrusions, it is possible to effectively suppress damage to the facing part and the covering part when they come into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that: is formed.

Here, by being able to operate the operating means through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the effort can be reduced. However, there is a possibility that fraud may be committed by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the housing has one outer surface formed by a first area and a second area located closer to the object than the first area, and the second area Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This increases the distance to the opening and makes it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening. In other words, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is sloped downward from the first area to the second area. O2.

Here, in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board), it is necessary for the container (board box) to ensure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far away from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming an opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container through the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first region and the second region, which hinders the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability when operating the operating means may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, so the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second area can be expanded by the amount of the downward slope, thereby improving the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction perpendicular to the one direction, and the operation means is configured to operate the second area. A gaming machine O3, which is operated by inserting and displacing a child, and wherein the attitude of the operator when inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is a posture along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, where the length along one direction is larger than the length along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, the attitude of the operating element is along the other direction. By orienting the child-gripping surface in the longitudinal direction of the second region, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the child-gripping surface. Therefore, when inserting the operator into or pulling out the operator from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operator from interfering with the container. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the second area with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second area is connected from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward the area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connecting surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second region is located on the second region. Since the operator is tilted downward from the first area to the second area, when the operator is gripped and displaced, it is possible to prevent fingers different from the one gripping the operator from interfering with the container. For example, when the operator is grasped with the index finger and thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface and the space on the other longitudinal side in the second region are This can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O4, since the connecting surface is formed on the other longitudinal side of the second area, the operation can be performed using the connecting surface (first area) on the other longitudinal side. Means can be protected. For example, damage to the operating means can be suppressed by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. Further, by making the position of the opening difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening.

In addition, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly, that is, the area of the first region can be increased by that amount, that is, the area of the first region can be expanded to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any of gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. The gaming machine O6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the operation means, pulled out from the operation means, or displaced (e.g. rotated)), the gripped fingers (e.g. thumb and index finger) The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region. A gaming machine O7, which is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is tilted downward from the first region toward the second region, and the other Since the connecting surface is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, the container is designed to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of descending the connecting surface. The volume of internal space can be secured. That is, the reduction in volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward slope of the connecting surface can be minimized.

The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft rotatably supporting the base body, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. The two regions are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the transversal direction thereof is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is located farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Game machine O8.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 is provided with a base body on which a storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal axis in the second area is The direction is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body about the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, a space for allowing the operator's hand to access the operating means can be secured by the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for accommodating a target object, comprising a display device disposed in a gaming area, and an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is disposed on the control board (object), there is a problem in that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P1 includes a display device disposed in the gaming area and an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and information regarding the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, the operating state of the operating means can be easily understood based on the display on the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the gaming area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information regarding the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, operations can be performed while checking the display (information), so operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the housing is movable to a position where the surface of the housing where the operating means is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P2, the container can be moved to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the operation means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, it is possible to more reliably improve operability and suppress operational errors.

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed at a side farther from the center of the housing from the position where the housing is supported.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on the side farther from the center of the container than the position where it is supported. When the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time, the operating means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means includes a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is located on the side farther from the pivoted position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in a.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, there are a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, has a higher frequency than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is pivoted, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the frequently operated operating means (first operating means), it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the target object, A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line to the object.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operating means can be operated. In other words, if the operation is allowed regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, there is a risk that the operating means will be easily manipulated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the work efficiency associated with the operation of the operating means will be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q1 is provided with an operating means that is disposed on the object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the connection of the electrical connection lines with the object is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the state, fraud can be suppressed and work efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, since the container is formed to be displaceable, the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operating means is allowed to be operated while at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection wire to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means may be disconnected even if other electrical connection wires are disconnected (unplugged) from the object. By allowing operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, in order to allow operation of the operating means, for example, an extension line is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection line, and the other electrical connection line is released (pulled out). This avoids the trouble of reconnecting the target to the target object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operation of the operating means is prohibited in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections are (If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so it is possible to suppress unauthorized operation of the operating means.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (unplugged) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be permitted, work by operating the operation means is possible. <About the concept of the invention using board boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and disposed during a game. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that the operating means is movable to a position where it is easier to operate.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is a problem in that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the storage body is formed to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position where it is disposed during the game. Since it can be moved to any position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

A gaming machine R2 in the gaming machine R1, wherein the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted portion as the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted part as the center of rotation, so that the housing is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the housing body has a separate member facing the operating means at a position where it is disposed during the gaming.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, since a separate member of the housing faces the operating means at the position where it is disposed during a game, the operating means cannot be operated illegally. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and in the state where the operating element is inserted, the operating element is brought into contact with the separate member, so that the operating means A gaming machine R4 characterized in that the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element touches another member. By being in contact with it, the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game, so forgetting to remove the operator can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A gaming machine X1 characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A gaming machine X2 characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A game characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine X3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specified winning slot (part of profit granting means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 First receiving channel (first component, second component)
153 Second receiving channel member (second component)
154 Projection (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 Horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decoration means (placed means)
171a Horizontal groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement regulating device (limiting means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guide means)
183 Operation member (operation section)
183f Engaging portion 184 Coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 Partitioning member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-like means)
312 Curved plate part (first guide part)
314 Lower part of rear compartment (second guide part)
315 Irregular-shaped penetration part (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 Shaft part (regulating part)
410 Linear member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protruding part (second contact part)
414 Projection part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Buffer member (second contact part)
430 Contact member (part of displacement means, first member, regulating means)
432 Projection part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, means involved in discrimination)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of operating means, contact means, advance/retreat means)
482 Overhang (representative tip)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Back case (part of area configuration means)
630 Lower arm member (part of action means)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Performance member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generation means, displacement generation means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b First guided protrusion (first loaded part)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded part)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Lateral slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall part (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (correspondence change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electrical wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 Intermediate channel (part of flow means, first component)
MT1 Drive motor (drive means)
IE1 Internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 Coil spring (part of load generation means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotation axis)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Board box (container)
A110 Main control device (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch device (operating means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b Protrusion (first surface)
A130 Key device (operation means)
A133b Projection (receiving part)
A133c end (first side)
A140 Key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposing part)
A211 First protrusion (protrusion)
A212 Second protrusion (protrusion)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surfaces)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering portion A271 Peripheral wall portion (covering portion)
A271a Base (covering part)
A271b Projection (bulge)
A272, A2272 End wall part (covering part, opposing part)
A272a Annular part (opposing part)
A272b Square part (opposing part)
A2273 Projection (protrusion)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine that is used to displace the displacement means and includes a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means (Patent Document 1) ).

JP2016-202210A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can stabilize the displacement of the displacement means.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members, and a driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement means. a first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target portion of the displacement means in a first aspect; and a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the second target section of the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. 10 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9. FIG. (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulation device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulation device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. (a) is a rear view of the abutting member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operating member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a game board and an operation unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and a firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 25. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the injection device. (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (f) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutting member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, an abutment member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. (a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. As the front transmission member and rear transmission member rotate, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion of the transmission arm member FIG. 2 is a diagram showing changes over time. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a rotary plate. It is a side view of a rotary plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a functional board part. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the enlarging/reducing unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the enlarging/reducing unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production member. (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). 76 is a sectional view of the effect member taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a route forming member of the wiring guide member. (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate presentation means, and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a partial front enlarged view of the first decorative member in range XCVII of FIG. 2; It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotary plate. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protrusion of the abutment member, and the circle of the transmission arm member FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the arrangement of columnar protrusions over time. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and a firing unit in a sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2; It is a back view of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board|substrate box in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the board box. (a) is a front view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the box cover. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the box cover. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as seen in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (a) is a front perspective view of the box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 112(a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a). (a) is a front view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a). It is a diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116(a). It is a diagram. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box taken along cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1) on the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden board member. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate, which has a rotating shaft at its lower end and is rotatably displaced to tilt or stand up toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second prize opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate is configured to move between the gaming area and the second prize opening 640. By closing the space between the second winning hole 640 and the second winning hole 640, the ball is configured to become difficult to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win are not changed, and the second symbol Only the winning probability may be changed to be higher than the normal winning probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display unit 80 is disposed at a position (behind the window of the base board 60) that can be seen through the central portion of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second prize opening 640 can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second prize opening 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Incidentally, the arrangement of the second winning hole 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be located below the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be located to the left of the left and right center of the gaming area.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, a state can be created in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter a prize in the second winning hole 640, so the first winning hole 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, and the player wins the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640.

Note that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, if the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first prize opening 64 by "hitting the right hand" and aiming at the second prize opening by "hitting the left hand". You can also aim for the prize opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the player cannot aim at the first prize opening 64 when playing with the right hand, and the ball fired when playing with the left does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can request that the game be changed to "left-handed" or "right-handed." Therefore, by adding the gameplay of changing the way the ball is hit, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, For example, it may be on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, on the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out ports 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a in the front and back direction. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening/closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500. Note that in FIGS. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has rails 61 and 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60, which can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball falling unit 150 configured to allow balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) fired toward the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is constructed by assembling a firing performance unit 300 etc. that can be configured to be able to perform a firing performance, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that its peripheral portion is arranged facing and fixed to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily seen by the player from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the base board 60 is transparent and the back side can be seen, so the balls flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In this embodiment, the ball flow lowering unit 150 is designed taking into consideration the effect produced by the visually recognized ball, but the details will be described later.

Note that if there is a part that you do not want the player to see, you can take measures such as pasting a seal member with low light transmission (or non-light transmission).

The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The firing production unit 300 receives the granular members 320 (see FIG. 54), and a partitioning member 310 that divides the range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, so that the granular members 320 are separated from the center frame. It is said that it can be fired towards the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who views the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window of the center frame 86 to effectively see the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. can. Note that details of the firing effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a back case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed inside the upper part of the back case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 symmetrically arranged inside the left and right parts of the back case 510. Equipped with

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is disposed above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed on the left and right positions of the opening 511a, respectively, on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 7, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 8, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in an extended state and the displacement rotation unit 800 is in a production standby state, In FIG. 9, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 10, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 in the performance standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the performance top end state are illustrated, and in FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the performance top end state, and the right displacement rotation unit The unit 800 is in the lower end state of presentation.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the performance upper end state (see FIG. 10) and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the By controlling the state change from the effect standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from overlapping in a front view. It can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is configured to be able to move downward in a state where the production members 700 are arranged in one place, and after the downward displacement, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state where the effect member 700 is disposed in a state in which the operation is controlled so that the area that can be viewed from the front becomes larger (see FIG. 9).

Thereafter, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward in a state where they are assembled in one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG. 7.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the performance standby state in a direction having not only an up-down component but also a left-right component.

In this embodiment, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described below. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left and right outside.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left side horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the upper end position of the common arc part S1a, while the right The horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

Therefore, if the left side horizontal slide member 840 is controlled to be displaced downward and the right side horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. The player can visually perceive it as if it were being rotated and displaced about the center point C1, which is located closer to the center.

That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the degree of freedom of performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 taken along the line XIV-XIV in FIG.

Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, FIGS. 12 to 14 show the game board 13 assembled to the front side of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

Furthermore, in FIGS. 12(a) and 13(a), an example of a state in which the granular members 320 are retained downward is illustrated, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular members 320 are ejected and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

In the performance standby state shown in FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the production member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has a central part of the collective arrangement located above the division member 310 of the firing performance unit 300, and the division member Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310.

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is placed close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is blindfolded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is hidden from view.

Since the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, the firing production unit 300 is configured to perform the motion production of ejecting the granular material 320 at the partitioning member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 is disposed below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is ejected in a path that slopes upward toward the front. , hits the front wall of the partition member 310, and rises while bouncing within the range formed by the partition member 310.

This allows the player to see the granular members 320 as if they are coming toward the player, thereby increasing attention to the performance using the granular members 320.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the area in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be moved closer to the player, and the components disposed in the gaming area, such as the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2), can be scattered. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front may be adopted as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment. However, in this case, since the firing effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first winning hole 64, it is difficult to secure a space for installing a guide path for the ball that enters the first winning hole 64. This may become difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged diagonally backward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide path of the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation where the first prize opening 64 cannot be freely arranged can be prevented from occurring.

When the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired in the state shown in FIG. 12(a), the granular member 320 scattered inside the partition member 310 and the third symbol display device 81 are This can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. This allows the player to visually recognize a combination of a two-dimensional display and the three-dimensionally displaced movement of the granular members 320.

When the firing control of the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13(a), as shown in FIG. This can be shown to the player together with the changes. In this case, for example, by matching the scattering timing of the granular member 320 with the timing at which the effect member 700 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is displaced in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 It is possible to visually recognize the state of the images scattering, and the impact of the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

Here, as a method of producing the effect in conjunction with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may also be considered.

However, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, as in this embodiment, Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to effectively produce the effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the position of the partitioning member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce the motion in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is scattered is provided on the front side of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult for the player to see the granular members 320.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small-sized member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from becoming more difficult to see than when the granular member 320 is configured with a large-sized member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlarging/reducing unit 600, the presentation effect of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be improved.

Furthermore, the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can be used as is for the effect of making the scattering of the granular members 320 visible in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

That is, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800 can be used in a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed depending on the state in which it is disposed in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower end state of the effect, the upper end state of the effect, see FIGS. 10 and 11), the state can be changed depending on the state. , performs an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 are combined to be visually recognized, and an effect in which the scattering granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 are combined to be visually recognized. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can effectively create an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the displacement of the effect member 700 in a manner that disperses them. By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like member 854 disposed in the It can be visually recognized as if the displacement rotation unit 800 is rotating at high speed, and the presentation effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular member 320 is made visible in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect is made visible in combination with the enlargement/reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. It can be used for both.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is a part of the firing effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, if the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the advance/retreat route portion S1b is set as a route that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path section S1b as a path passing through the gap provided diagonally between the ejection device 400 of the ejection production unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are In addition to being able to improve the degree of freedom in setting, it is configured to be able to be displaced upwardly beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement range of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 are arranged to the extent that a space can be secured between them, but it is necessary to ensure a space between the presentation member 700 and the division member 310 even during transportation. It's not something I'm considering. Therefore, during transportation, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being disposed close to each other.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIG. 6. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement regulating device 180 is configured such that its state can be changed by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the regulating state, it regulates the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the production standby state.

By employing the displacement regulating device 180, even if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported.

To explain in detail, conventionally, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by filling the area where the movable accessory moves with cushioning material (cushion material such as cotton), and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents movable accessories from being displaced during shipping or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in this embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 The cushioning material cannot be removed unless it is disassembled, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the present embodiment employs a displacement forming device 180. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulation state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated and a regulation release state in which the regulation is released, without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the back case 510. Can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be explained first, and then the details of the state change will be explained.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. It is a diagram.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) show the displacement regulating device 180 in a deregulated state, and FIG. 15(c) shows the displacement regulating device 180 in a regulated state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement regulating device 180 is switched between a regulating state and a regulating state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding and retracting from the abutment member 181. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to protrude to the inside of the back case 510 and engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, but the details will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18(a) is a rear view of the abutting member 181. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operating member 183.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 that is placed in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a contact member that is placed on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operating member 183 whose displacement is guided by the guide member 182, and a guide member 183 disposed between the operating member 183 and the abutment member 181. It mainly includes a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply a biasing force toward the rear side to the operating member 181.

As the operating member 183 is formed into a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and guide member 182 that accommodate the operating member 183 are also formed from an approximately elliptical shape from which is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear. Therefore, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is elongated from side to side when viewed from the rear.

The abutting member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and the contact member 181 is designed to have a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510. The wall part is extended, and there is an insertion hole 181a drilled at the left and right ends into which a fastening part protruding from the back case 510 is inserted, and a double cylindrical back wall with a shape that allows the coil spring 184 to be placed in the gap. It includes a cylindrical holding portion 181b that protrudes to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183.

The guide member 182 includes a main body part 182a that has an elliptical annular shape along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and extends in the front-rear direction, and a screw into which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening part inserted into the insertion hole 181a. The insertion part 182b, the fastening part 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the abutment member 181 is screwed, the retaining part 182d that projects radially inward at the back end of the main body part 182a, and the fastening part 182c of the main body part 182a. It includes a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction on the upper and lower inner parts.

With this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so that it cannot fall off. In the embodiment, the situations in which the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the abutting member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the abutting member 182 (the side covered by the back case 510). Therefore, when the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

Note that the fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted into the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). (see), making it easy to remove the displacement regulating device 180 from the rear case 510.

The operating member 183 has a main body part 183a formed in a cup shape with an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining part 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear and an open front side, and a front edge of the main body part 183a. a flange portion 183b extending radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; a cylindrical portion 183d projecting cylindrically from the bottom center of the main body portion 183a toward the front side; An arc-shaped protruding portion 183e that has a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 and projects toward the front side with the portion 183d as the center, and a position where it can engage with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. The engaging portion 183f is provided in a protruding manner to form a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical sticker is pasted on the back surface of the operating member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the transverse direction (see Figure 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is easy to prevent incorrect vertical orientation during assembly. can do.

By forming the main body portion 183a into an elliptical shape, rotational displacement of the operating member 183 can be easily prevented. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotated, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182.

The flange portion 183b is formed to be larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 in rear view, thereby preventing the operating member 183 from falling off from the guide member 182. That is, the operating member 183 is movable in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has the role of smoothly displacing the operating member 183 back and forth. In this embodiment, since the protrusions 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side, the groove portions 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect assembly in which the operating member 183 is placed in the wrong upper or lower position.

The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be able to be inserted into the center opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutment member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the regulated hole 657 of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 to regulate the vertical movement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

The arcuate protruding portion 183e is disposed to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is disposed to face the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped protruding portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so the load generation area can be increased and a large load can be locally applied. Load can be prevented from occurring.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc shape with an interrupted circle, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. This can prevent the engaging portion 183f from being too far away from the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184.

The state change of the operating member 183 will be explained. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by a coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed toward the front side against this biasing force, it is composed of an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is pushed in beyond the minimum stroke at which the latch mechanism acts, the above-mentioned restricted state and restricted state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the latch mechanism is configured so that the state can be changed, the operation member 183 changes to the above-mentioned minimum value not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated but also when a large external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a risk that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if a state change occurs in the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally due to shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the production standby state (the production member 700 is located at the upper displacement end). When the performance member 700 displaced from the performance standby state is placed close to the division member 310 (see FIG. 13) and receives shock during shipping or vibration during transportation, the performance member 700 will displace the division member of the firing performance unit 300. 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position away from the position (center position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183 (position eccentric to the right), and the engaging portion 183f The gap size between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set to be large, so that the posture maintaining ability of the operating member 183 is deliberately reduced.

Thereby, since the attitude of the operating member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined in advance, the displacement resistance of the operating member 183 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-back direction due to unintended external force can be suppressed.

The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

Note that FIG. 21(a) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates a restricted state of the displacement regulating device 180.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the opening/closing proximal end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and allows the operator to extend his/her hand by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is configured so that it can be touched easily. This position is on the opposite side to the side (opening/closing tip side, right side) where the worker who opens the inner frame 12 and performs the work enters, so when the worker opens the inner frame 12, the displacement regulating device may be unintentionally removed. 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the above-mentioned latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, the entire load pushing the operating member 183 is not used for moving the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used for changing the posture of the operating member 183.

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the attitude of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed in enough.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement regulating device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the displacement regulating device 180 to produce the necessary displacement by pushing in the forming part of the latch mechanism with pinpoint accuracy. It can be said that the state switching of the regulating device 180 is likely to be successful.

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to regulate the displacement. By operating the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movements. Therefore, the operator can easily press the forming portion of the latch mechanism with pinpoint precision.

Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the proximal end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed toward the pushed side. Therefore, as the amount of pushing increases, the pushing load of the operator can be more easily transmitted to the operating member 183.

In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21(a), the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotation direction around the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction (the longitudinal direction) of the operating member 183 are perpendicular to each other, the operating member 183 receives the load in the displacement direction from the transmission gear 650. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Thereby, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively regulated without requiring a strong structure for the forming part of the latch mechanism.

In this way, by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state, the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained, so the use of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, by maintaining the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 with the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulating state during maintenance after installation in a game machine store, maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800 described later can be performed safely and easily.

That is, in the case where the displacement locus of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the displacement regulating device 180 can maintain the state (arrangement) of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, thereby preventing the enlarging/reducing unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 from colliding. I can do it.

If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, pressing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 switches the displacement regulating device 180 to the regulating state. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 becomes movable, and the enlarging/reducing unit 600 can perform a performance operation that involves a change in state.

Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and by looking into the open end side (right side), the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state. This section explains how the system is configured to allow confirmation of whether or not the user is present.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the operating member 183 is disposed in front of the shaped part of the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, so when viewed from the right side, In this case, the operating member 183 is hidden in the shape of the bottom wall portion 511.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the non-restricted state, the operating member 183 is arranged so as to protrude toward the rear side beyond the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operating member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511.

Therefore, as a confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator does not have to fully open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, but can open the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 slightly relative to the outer frame 11. When opened and viewed from the right side, it can be confirmed that the displacement regulating device 180 is in the deregulated state by visually confirming that the operating member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511.

In this embodiment, the back case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operating member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operating member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). . In this embodiment, when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 has not changed during the power-on operation. A position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

By showing this position detection error display to the clerk at the gaming machine store, it is possible to make the clerk aware that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not have changed. Note that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of a change in the state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, and not by detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

That is, in this embodiment, the alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. It can be output. This makes it possible to reduce design costs.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In some cases, the operating member 183 is configured to be unable to be pressed while the power is turned on, and the power is required to be turned off, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the configuration that disables the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which push-in operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operating member 183, or a large diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183, and the displacement of the transmission gear 650 may be Inside, the rear plate of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other in the front and rear to limit the displacement of the operating member 183.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operating member 183 is not only possible when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 matches the cylindrical portion 183d front and back.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement regulating device 180 changes to the regulating state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is placed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, when a driving force is generated and the transmission gear 650 is displaced after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is the same as that of the cylindrical portion 183d. limited to.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it can be determined that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by displaying an error (notifying an abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk at the game machine store, but the details will be described later.

Thereby, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Note that the displacement regulating device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary to not only open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 from the inner frame 12. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. These presentation devices will be explained in order starting from the firing presentation unit 300.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the assembled state of the firing effect unit 300, the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161. That is, it is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to see the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be seen by the player, and the player who sees the area surrounded by the center frame 86 can see the particulate member 320 scattered inside. In this way, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular members 320 are visually recognized as being superimposed on each other.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing performance unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing performance unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing performance unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inside a center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and has a box shape with an open bottom; A plurality of granular members 320 disposed so as to be displaceable inside the member 310, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the open portion on the lower side so that the granular members 320 do not fall off from the partition member 310, and a partition member 310. A first light irradiation device 330 is provided on the right side of the partition member 310, and a second light irradiation device 340 is provided on the left side of the partition member 310.

The partition member 310 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-shaped portion disposed at the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. A bottom plate part parallel to the front plate part 311 is disposed opposite to the back side of the front plate part 311, and has a closing wall extending from the left and right sides and the top of the bottom plate part toward the front side so as to close the gap. The back partition 313 is integrally formed below the back partition 313 and communicates with the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed between the front plate 311 and the back partition 313. It includes a lower back section 314 whose path can be configured between the lower section 314 and the curved plate section 312, and an irregularly shaped penetrating section 315 formed through the lower section of the back section 314.

Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is approximately the same as the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front. It is formed as follows. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used to hide the edge of the partition member 310. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not required, and the number of parts is reduced, and the edge of the partition member 310 is displayed by being visually recognized by overlapping the display by the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the symbol is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 will be scattered too much, and the number of granular members 320 may be too large for an impressive performance. You will need to do more. Therefore, if the space is formed as a narrow space to some extent, it is possible to create a more powerful effect by making the small number of granular members 320 visible with high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular members 320 will become clogged. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-to-back width between the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314. Therefore, compared to the case where the longitudinal width is shortened, clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the lower back section 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 is smaller in the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b than in the left and right center portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left and right center portions 312b, and the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1. It can be made easier to reach the vicinity of the center. This allows the granular member 320 to be easily recognized by the player.

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches near the center of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and is scattered through the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can see as if the granular member 320 is exploding from near the center of the internal space IE1 and being scattered in all directions, so the action of the granular member 320 is more powerful. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 when the granular member 320 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the back side, and inclined downward toward the left and right center.

Thereby, irrespective of where the granular member 320 is placed in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be moved toward the left and right center and displaced downward on the back side.

Furthermore, the degree of downward inclination in the left and right parts 312a of the curved plate part 312 is configured such that the downward inclination towards the left and right center side is steeper than the downward inclination towards the back side. As a result, the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320 can be caused to occur toward the left and right center side, giving priority to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, the granular members 320 try to displace all at once toward the rear side at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 tend to be crowded together, resulting in a situation where the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the back side at the left and right center portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right center side at the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid crowding of the granular members 320 on the way down.

On the other hand, in the lower part of the rear section 314, the plate part disposed opposite to the rear side of the curved plate part 312 is approximately the same as the left and right center part 312b of the curved plate part 312 in side view (see FIG. 12(a)). It is formed into a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b becomes slightly wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is larger.

In this embodiment, the angle of inclination of the lower part of the rear section 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (a slightly larger angle) than the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that injects the granular member 320.

Therefore, the angle of incidence of the granular members 320 on the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is the same without depending on the ejection direction of the granular members 320, which can change from side to side, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the lower part 314 of the rear compartment is almost uniform. can do.

The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and includes a short portion that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long portion that curves left and right to connect the upper ends of the short portion. Equipped with The penetrating direction is formed so as to be inclined diagonally upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the lower part of the back section 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the lower back section 314 constituting the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the lower portion of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) is not arranged to face the injection direction of the granular member 320.

As a result, when the granular member 320 is injected, the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion can be reduced, so that it is possible to avoid local loads being generated on the granular member 320 and the lower part of the back section 314, and the granular member 320 can be It is possible to prevent cracks or chips from occurring in the member 320 or the lower part of the rear section 314.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 on an enlarged scale, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively flexible (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) resin material and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). It is formed into a tridecahedron (quasi-regular polyhedron) consisting of 20 regular hexagons, and includes non-penetrating recesses 321 that are recessed without penetrating along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

This non-penetrating recess 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and also make the center of gravity of the granular member 320 deviate from the geometric center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed (see FIG. 25), making it easier to avoid damage or chipping of the granular member 320. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is oriented toward the injection direction when the injection device 400 receives a load and is injected, the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed should not collide with the front plate portion 311. I can do it. Thereby, the load upon collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation section 330 includes a fixed plate section 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illuminated board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate section 331, and a A lid part 333 is disposed on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 331, and is formed between the fixing plate part 331 and the illumination board 332 so as to be accommodating therein.

The illumination board 332 is provided with light irradiation parts 332a such as LEDs on both left and right sides, and light having an optical axis is irradiated from the light irradiation parts 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light can be visually recognized as light divided into granules.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right illuminates the right path (right-handed flow path) of the gaming area where the through gate 67 etc. (see FIG. 2) are arranged. It serves one purpose. The light emitted to the left side will be described later.

The fixing plate part 331 and the lid part 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation part 332a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 332 is connected to the fixed plate part 331 and the lid part 333 in a range away from the light irradiation part 332a. can be shielded and avoided from being seen.

The second light irradiation section 340 includes a fixed plate section 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition section 313, an illumination board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate section 341, and a A lid part 343 is disposed on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate part 341, and is formed to be able to accommodate the illumination board 342 between the fixing plate part 341 and the fixing plate part 341.

The fixing plate part 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid part 343 is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the illumination board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in this embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is configured to extend long to the left. Thereby, the player's field of view can be narrowed in advance, and the left side surface of the illumination board 342 can be prevented from being viewed from the front.

Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent lid part 343 while avoiding the illumination board 342 from being seen.

The illumination board 342 is provided with light irradiation parts 342a such as LEDs on both left and right sides. A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the left side emits light having an optical axis pointing forward. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the gaming area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a of the right illumination board 332 is actively directed toward the gaming area is that the gaming performance of the present pachinko machine 10 (normally This takes into account the fact that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during probability change, time saving, and jackpot games. This will be explained below.

In the playing area of this pachinko machine 10, there is a high degree of freedom in the falling path of the ball on the left side of the playing area, so during normal play, adjust the firing strength of the ball so that the ball flows down the desired path. The player performs this operation. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the gaming area is made too high, the visibility of the ball will deteriorate, which will impede adjustment of the ball launch intensity and may cause player dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, when shooting a ball to the right side of the gaming area, the player basically shoots the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the ejected ball is suppressed by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom in selecting the downstream path of the ball is significantly reduced, and the ball exclusively follows the same path.

To be more specific, in this embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second winning opening 640 and has a width that allows one ball to pass through. All the balls that do not hit the ball pass through the guide route DL1 and head towards the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

In this way, there is little need to adjust the firing strength of the ball, so even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor on the right side of the gaming area (particularly where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of this occurring is low, effects with high luminous intensity can be performed within this range.

For these reasons, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation section 332a is arranged in the illumination board 332 disposed on the right side so as to direct the light toward the gaming area, while the illumination board 342 disposed on the left Here, the light irradiation section 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light toward the gaming area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective light emission effect while suppressing player dissatisfaction.

A light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side emits light having an optical axis pointing rightward. A through hole 341a is bored in the fixed plate part 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation part 342a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the illumination board 342 is shielded by the fixed plate part 341 in a range away from the light irradiation part 342a, You can avoid being seen. Note that the object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a disposed on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as seen in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 as seen in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partitioning member 310 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the light irradiation unit 332a disposed on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and a light emitting unit 332a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330. and an LED through which the shaft passes.

This not only irradiates the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310, but also irradiates light to other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is possible to perform a lighting effect.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the light irradiation unit 342a is arranged on the back side of the partition member 310. It is composed only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partitioning member 310, the intensity of light directed toward other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) disposed on the back side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the intensity of light emitted into the interior of the partition member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the gaming area, the display on the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64. Most of the time, you are looking at the area to the left from the center of the gaming area.

In this case, when the second irradiation device 340 irradiates the inside of the partitioning member 310 with light, it shines at a position near the front of the gaming area, so it is a backlight for the player who sees the left side of the gaming area. Therefore, there is a possibility that the visibility of the gaming area may become poor for the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light irradiation section 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is placed closer to the back side, and the gaming area and the light irradiation section 342a are separated, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a is It is possible to reduce the degree of influence that this has on the visibility of the gaming area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 illuminates the inside of the center frame 86 with high intensity while reducing the degree to which the game area is illuminated. Able to perform a performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) shine without lowering the visibility of the game area.

FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and rear side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertical substrate unit 167, which will be described later, that irradiates light onto the light guide plate 161. As a result, it is possible to perform a light emission effect while avoiding the light from the light irradiation section 342a entering the light guide plate 161, so that the light emission effect is performed using the light irradiated from the light irradiation section 342a and the light guide plate 161 is made to shine. You can separate it from the performance.

When employing the light guide plate 161 as in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the irradiation path of the light, reducing the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to make the light guide plate 161 shine, there is a possibility that it will be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which will reduce the degree of freedom of production. was.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation section 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation section 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom in producing light emission around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 24 and 25. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partitioning member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partitioning member 310 rides.

28, 29, and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. Note that FIGS. 28 and 31 schematically illustrate the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side. FIGS. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 located closer to the back side. Further, in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixing member 350 that is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between it and the fixed member 350, and an electrical wiring or transmission arm member 470 which is fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 in the center thereof.

A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted into the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove this fastening screw with a screwdriver, but it is necessary to remove the fixing member 350 when the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). In this case, the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, in preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. This prevents a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular material 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 when the firing unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

The injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the fixed member 350 so as to be linearly movable. a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed above the translation member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the translation member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface at the top; The contact member 430 is disposed below the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the translational member 410.

The injection device 400 is a member disposed displaceably between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is formed to be able to transmit a load to the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. a front transmission member 440 which is pivotally supported by the front transmission member 440 and has gear teeth formed on its outer peripheral surface; and a drive shaft which is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 which is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. It includes a gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 that is disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and is fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

The injection device 400 is a member that is movably disposed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is rotatably supported on a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. It includes a transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 that is rotatably supported around a straight line facing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the direction in which the shaft portion 362 protrudes from the space forming member 360. Within the arrangement range divided in this way, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range where the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is applied to the front range and the rear side. As a result, each component is displaced in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, openings for driving force transmission are formed in the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, respectively. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (approximately elliptical shape).

The transmission of driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, so the details of the configuration will be explained below in the order of the front range and the rear range, and then , the details of the configuration in the intermediate range will be explained, and the operational aspects will be explained.

First, the description will focus on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 403 that protrude from the upper end toward the front side, and the cylindrical protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported, a plurality of rod fixing parts 404 arranged in bilaterally symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal bars MB1, and a columnar shape protruding toward the front near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked onto each of a plurality of claws 411 formed at the lower end of the linear motion member 410.

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 when the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the biasing force causes the linear motion member 410 to be placed at the upper end position before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is disposed diagonally below the linear motion member 410, but this also aims to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 that are formed to allow the metal rod MB1 to be inserted therethrough, and a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape from an upper end portion at the left and right center. A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at approximately the center in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion 414 formed as a protrusion shorter than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414 415, and a displacement regulating portion 416 that protrudes toward the front side from the lower end portion at the left and right center.

The trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the collision member 420 when the linear motion member 410 is placed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed so that only the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as not to come into contact with the collision member 420. Ru.

The protrusions 414 and the lower protrusions 415 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The displacement regulating portion 416 is a portion that contacts the buffer member 352 of the fixed member 350 in the displacement direction, and this contact regulates the displacement of the linear motion member 410 (the upward displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate portion that extends from the back side end of the curved plate portion 421 in parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 is displaced. A plate portion 422 , a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422 , and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the direction in which the plate portion 422 extends, and a plurality of guide holes 423 formed at the lower end of the left and right center of the plate portion 422 in the direction of displacement of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 . A buffer member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the trapezoidal protrusion 413.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423 . That is, the cylindrical protrusion 403 serves both as a part that supports the upper end of the coil spring SP1 and as a part that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

The buffer member 424 is formed from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material as a small piece with a square exterior. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the load and impact caused when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal protrusion 413 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be alleviated by the characteristics of the resin material, thereby preventing the trapezoidal protrusion 413 from being damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

The abutting member 430 is formed into a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 bored as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column part 405 can be inserted. A protruding portion 432 having a circular cross section and protruding toward the back side, and a hook-shaped protruding portion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protruding portion 432. Be prepared.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column 405 is inserted, so that the abutting member 430 is rotatably supported by the support column 405 .

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other structural members during load transmission, and details will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing part 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement regulating part 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403 that can be received. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses and configured to be able to be fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws inserted from the front side into through holes inside the recesses into female threads formed in the circular protrusion 403; A guide portion 354 is provided, which is configured of an inclined surface that narrows from the front side and from the left and right directions, and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The buffer member 352 is made of a highly durable and highly flexible resin material and is formed as a small piece with a square outline. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, etc. can be used. In this case, the characteristics of the resin material can reduce the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement regulating part 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact with each other, thereby suppressing the occurrence of damage or chipping of the displacement regulating part 416. be able to.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are provided at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 comes into contact at the end of displacement in the urging direction. As a result, as will be described later, even if the linearly moving member 410 is upwardly displaced at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load that the linearly moving member 410 receives when stopping suddenly. can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352, 424, and the load can be distributed to multiple locations.

The cylindrical protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected to each other through the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connection recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is not possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured so that it cannot be done.

This prevents a situation in which the fastening screw is accidentally loosened and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 becomes loose when the game board 13 and the firing performance unit 300 are assembled. I can do it.

Next, explanation will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-mentioned opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from approximately the center of the back plate toward the front side, and a back plate. A pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate, and a pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 are provided below the left and right inner sides of the guiding inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protrude from the back plate portion toward the front side, and a pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right ends, are arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a cylindrical structure protruding from the back side at the upper left of the opening 361. cylindrical protrusion 366.

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 is provided to extend from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. This wall portion can cover the internal front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner surfaces is flush with the left and right inner surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and directs the flowing granular material 320 toward the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided towards.

The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that its protruding tip abuts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and its upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate part 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

The support column portions 365 have different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the right side is formed into a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes toward the left and right outside, and the left side is formed into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that can accommodate the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. By fixing a screw with a large diameter head to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member formed in a substantially rectangular shape in appearance, and is a support member that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and into which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a cylindrical protrusion 472 that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 471, and a cylindrical protrusion 472 that extends perpendicularly to the axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the longitudinal direction. It includes a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along a plane.

The cylindrical protrusion 472 passes through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and projects toward the front side, and is formed to be able to engage with the rear transmission member 460. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 changes as the posture of the rear transmission member 460 changes, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes. Details will be described later.

A limiting member 370 is provided on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472 . That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate part 371 that covers the moving path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side, and a covering plate part 371 that suppresses the electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of holding claws 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). This can prevent the cylindrical projection 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460, thereby preventing the cylindrical projection 472 from disengaging from the rear transmission member 460. can.

The holding claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily fixing electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 between the rear side plate of the space forming member 360. This prevents fluctuations in the arrangement of electrical wiring (for example, changes in the arrangement of electrical wiring due to vibrations, etc.) and secures an entry route for other components, so as mentioned above, injection The transverse slide member 840 and wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement and rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced in a path that includes a location proximate to the device 400.

The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits driving force to the lid member 480.

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable in and out of the partition member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310, and is a member formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extending plate portions 485 coaxially received with the support column portion 365 at the extending ends of the extending plate portions 485. a transmission hole 487 formed in a curved elongated hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left side and through which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted; The fastening screw is formed into a disk shape with a hole surrounding the receiving part 486, and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column part 365 can be inserted. The left cover member 489 has a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487.

The left cover member 489 is not provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are formed along the axial direction like a drill hole but are functionally formed, the details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the reciprocating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) is rotated. Although it is constructed to face the axis, it is not simply a pipe divided into pieces, but the radius and shape of the arc change depending on the left and right position. This design intention will be explained.

First, the advancing/retracting portion 481 includes a projecting portion 482 that protrudes toward the entry side at the left-right center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed such that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed to be in contact with each other), a load is applied to the component toward the left and right sides. can be given, and the constituent members can be pushed outward to the left and right.

Second, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310; Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing/retracting portion 481 is shortened at the left-right center position where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it begins to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (the left and right center of the overhanging portion 482), thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem in which the advancing/retracting portion 481 is unable to enter the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. can be suppressed.

Thirdly, the radius of the arc is made longer near the left and right outer sides of the advance/retreat portion 481, as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right directions. The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in this embodiment, the granular members 320 (see FIG. 12(a)) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 accumulate near the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

The manner in which this retention occurs is not completely uniform on the left and right sides, but may result in non-uniformity on the left and right sides. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 collide with the advance/retreat portion 481. .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is made longer in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular material 320 tends to accumulate. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing and retracting portions 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance, so that even if the granular members 320 accumulate unevenly, the granular members 320 and the retracting portions 481 can Collisions can be avoided.

Explain other design philosophies. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is recessed toward the retreat side. Thereby, the extension plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the granular members 320 that are staying.

In addition, even if the lid member 480 is placed at the end of the displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has completely flowed down, the granular member 320 can be removed from the concave forming portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310. By configuring the gap with the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) to be large enough to pass through, the granular material 320 can be gathered above the collision member 420.

The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right sides. That is, the left receiving part 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving part 486b on the right side is formed in a semicylindrical shape (half pipe shape), but this is a design that takes assembly into consideration.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 28 and 31. The support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, especially on the right side, so when both the receiving parts 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the support column part 365 that supports the lid member 480 cannot support the lid member 480. In order to assemble it to the column part 365, it is necessary to divide the advancing/retracting part 481.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured so that the cover member 480 can be moved forward and backward from the partition member 310, while being configured to be able to prevent the granular member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310. That is, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 cannot be increased in size without limit, and the degree of freedom in designing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 collapses to such an extent that it cannot pass through the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, it will be impossible to move forward or backward, so accuracy is required in the shape. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be distorted due to factors such as assembly errors.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the receiving portions 486 are made different on the left and right sides, so that it is unnecessary to divide the advancing/retracting portion 481. As for the assembly process, first, the left receiving part 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column part 365, and the cylindrical part of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving part 486a while being inserted into the support column part 365. This allows the left receiving portion 486a to be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365.

At this time, in the right receiving part 486b, the support column part 365 is arranged to face the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extension plate portion 485 by inserting the fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extension plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 is secured in the space by being supported so as not to fall off using the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column part 365. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360.

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. 34 to 36, displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is placed at the entrance end of the displacement range, and FIG. 34 shows the lid member 480 placed at the retraction end of the displacement range. A state in which the cover member 480 is arranged is illustrated, and FIG. 35 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (the plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is oriented in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to come into contact with the left cover member 489 at a position closer to the right (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction as shown in FIG. It will be done.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c), and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmitting protrusion 473 is The left cover member 489 is designed to have a shape that allows the opening upper side surface of the left cover member 489 to come into contact with each other in the left and right width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side, and a The second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and the second contact surface 489b is formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in the state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the inclination in the left-right direction of the shape of the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases as it approaches the rotation axis of the lid member 480. Designed to.

Specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination at the abutting position of the left cover member 489 with the upper surface of the opening is designed to be an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the abutting state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured, regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the timing at which a large load is generated, which is the timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 changes in the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489 becoming smaller, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is at its maximum, which increases the possibility of overloading the transmission protrusion 473. be.

As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is loaded on the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced when the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing/retracting portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is aligned with the rotation axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the dead weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the least of the biasing force is A portion of this can be offset by the own weight of the lid member 480.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 when the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Specifically, the distance between the contact position of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retreating side position to the entering side position is The member 480 is configured to be longest when disposed at the displacement end position on the retracted side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the position of contact with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which forms an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so that the angle of inclination is small, the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered around the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

As a result, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 becomes longer, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a modification of the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side toward the back side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressively deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), FIG. 35(b), and FIG. 36(b), the curved plate portion 312, which is arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480, is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side. be done. Therefore, due to the shapes of the advancing/retracting portion 481 and the overhanging portion 482, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction.

Note that the radius at the left-right center position of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to avoid collision of the overhanging part 482, which has the maximum entry width, with the curved plate part 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (to the extent caused by design errors for each member). In this case, it is possible to prevent the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, the description will focus on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are engaged with each other. The transmission member 460 rotates integrally around the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. Note that, in the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is assumed to be normal rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a structure formed on the sides facing each other to ensure relative position and rigidity of each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite side. A shaped portion is formed. The details of the shaped portion used for this driving force transmission will be explained below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. . Note that the arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotational axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the front transmission member 440 includes a main body plate portion 441 having a substantially disk shape, a portion extending in the axial direction from the edge of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove on the inside thereof. A groove forming part 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening bored in the center of the main body plate part 441 to a size that allows the shaft part 362 to be inserted therethrough, and a gear formed in the main body plate part 441. A flange portion 444 covered by the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and a groove forming A transmission protrusion 446 is provided that protrudes parallel to the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side than the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming part 442 has a recessed groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding part 432 so that the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. The groove has a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates in the normal direction with the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 disposed in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove 442b in which the protrusion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove 442a with respect to the second groove 442b and having a larger diameter than the reference arc of the first groove 442a. , and a fourth groove 442d that connects the third groove 442c and the first groove 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 442b, the fourth groove part 442d has a smaller forming angle range, and the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 changes rapidly with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440. is designed to be.

The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a formed along the protrusion direction in a straight line connecting the center and a point on the outer diameter side. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 in response to a load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction perpendicular to a straight line serving as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with the same diameter as the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440; a groove-forming part 462 that extends in the axial direction and has a groove recessed inside thereof; and a non-contact opening portion 463 formed to avoid contact with.

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range where the recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the weight portion 461a and the The weight is calculated and it is formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the centers of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, so that changes in the postures of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter therein. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and a rear side transmission member 460 with the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 disposed in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by normal rotation (clockwise rotation in rear view), and a first groove 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b. 462a, and a fourth groove 462d that connects the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their formation angle ranges are not common. That is, compared to the second groove part 462b, the fourth groove part 462d has a significantly larger forming angle range (approximately 180 degrees), and the groove and the non-contact open part 463 are different from each other with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. The design is such that the distance between them changes slowly.

An example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be explained.

38, 39, 40, and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated with imaginary lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be understood.

38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, FIG. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows a standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. A firing standby state is illustrated in which the device 400 waits for firing timing, and FIG. 41 illustrates a firing state which is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes a firing effect. Although FIG. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 immediately scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the translational member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side. Note that a state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of the entry side displacement will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the performance standby state shown in FIG. 39, the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, so the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be lowered, so that the player can take his eyes off the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below it.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical protrusion 403 is in contact with the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linearly moving member 410 is regulated by the abutting member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retraction side, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole. It stops at the position where it comes into contact with the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

Due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, the flow of the granular material 320 that has been splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side. (See the arrow schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, since the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward, the guide portion 354 of the fixed member 350 (see FIG. 32) and the collision member 420 The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be accommodated unevenly.

As a result, even if, for example, a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return thereafter, the collision member 420 is Since a slope is formed on the right side that slopes downward toward the left, the granular material 320 that returns later flows to the left along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner that it rides on the granular member 320 and flows.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the left and right deviation of the granular members 320 that accumulate on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, thereby reducing the deviation in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each firing performance. can do.

Furthermore, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is placed in the middle of the displacement section, and is separated from the lower linear motion member 410 by a point with the trapezoidal protrusion 413. It's just that they are in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the amount of the gap created between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. In other words, the posture is allowed to change in a rotational manner around an axis parallel to the axis of one of the cylindrical protrusions 403.

As described above, for example, if many of the granular members 320 are biased to the right side of the collision member 420 and begin to return, the collision member 420 will change its posture in such a manner that the right side is lowered compared to the left side. However, in this case, the top of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, the granular member 320 that flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side can be easily guided to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the horizontal center position of the guide section 354 and the top position of the curved plate section 421 match when viewed from the front; It is thought that whether the flowing granular member 320 flows down to the left or right depends on the difference in the contact points between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421, and is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right.

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its attitude, the top position of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide part 354, and the position of the top of the curved plate part 421 is shifted to the right side with respect to the left-right center position of the guide part 354. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided to the left along the slope of the curved plate portion 421. This makes it easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where fewer granular members 320 remain, making it easier to distribute the granular members 320 approximately equally on the left and right sides.

Note that the change in attitude of the collision member 420 is not always allowed in the same way. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the attitude change of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical protrusions 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Since the displacement of the collision member 420 is regulated, the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the production standby state of the injection device 400.

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is a biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expands and contracts in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress changes in the posture of the collision member 420 during the period from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize the way in which the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the retention state of the granular members 320 (left and right deviation in the number of grains) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the firing effect, the granular members 320 are scattered, and then flow down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 Return to the top of the screen and return to the production standby state again. That is, in this embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes shown in FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 to enable this state change to be performed will be described in detail below.

42(a) to 42(f) and 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, and front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the external shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutting member 430 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the external shapes are Except for the parts involved in mutual load transmission, the protruding part 414 and the lower protruding part 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, and the protruding part 432 and the hook-shaped part of the abutting member 430. The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated with a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated using imaginary lines.

42 and 43, a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420, and an abutment member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) are shown as the front transmission member 440 rotates forward. ) is illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 42(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 causes the front transmission member 440 to be detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the forward rotation. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is entered, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the production standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 contacts the protrusion 414 of the translation member 410 and starts to push down the translation member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the translation member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420, causing the collision member 420 to vibrate slightly, the vibration and load will not be directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be able to be shut off.

FIG. 42(c) illustrates the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the translational member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the translation member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other, so that vibrations and loads caused by the collision of the granular member 320 with the collision member 420 are , may be indirectly transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the translational member 410, and this causes the translational member 410 to move toward the transmission point where it contacts the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

Note that the influence on the forward rotational displacement is not limited at all. Examples include an effect that causes the speed controlled as a rotational displacement to differ from the actual speed, and an effect that impedes rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

In FIG. 42(d), the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the abutment member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The contact member 430 is not applied with a biasing force from other biasing means, and is a member whose attitude changes according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. From FIG. 42(d) onward, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430, but the direction of displacement of the abutting member 430 is the direction in which it is displaced by its own weight. Since it is the same, the state of the load that the front transmission member 440 receives does not substantially change from the state before FIG. 42(d) in which only the translation member 410 was displaced.

FIG. 42(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the translation member 410 is placed at the lower end position, the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 are still placed apart from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rotation of the abutment member 430 are The load required for changing the posture can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Thereby, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

In FIG. 42(f), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart, but from the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the attitude of the abutting member 430 is maintained (a change in attitude is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the subsequent contact between the linear motion member 410 and the abutment member 430, the contact between the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 will be greater than when the translation member 410 and the abutment member 430 abut at speeds in opposite directions. The aspect can be softened.

In FIG. 43(a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42(f) is illustrated for easy understanding. In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the translation member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the translation member 410 and the contact member The arrangement of each component in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to come into contact is illustrated.

Note that the state from the state shown in FIG. 43(a) to just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion portion 433 are provided with protruding portions that protrude toward the mutually opposing sides at the distal end portions of the opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress slippage at the abutment position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, and to stably bring the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 into contact. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the terminal end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this state change is caused by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Output.

That is, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the detection target of the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate in the forward direction. Control is performed so that it is determined that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is disposed to a state in which the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is regulated by the abutment member 430. A biasing force is generated in the linear motion member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in the direction of standing up the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 is Displacement of the provided portion 432 is restricted by being obstructed by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (outer surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed toward the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 is directed toward the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and also to restrict the displacement of the protrusion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must always be energized in the firing standby state, it is possible to suppress the heat generation of the drive motor MT1, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1. can be improved.

For example, when driving and controlling the injection device 400 in conjunction with the display performance on the third symbol display device 81, this is a restriction on setting the length of the display performance from the firing standby state to the firing state. This is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

In FIG. 43(c), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 starts to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 changes from the third groove part 442c, so the direction of the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is transferred to the front side. This results in deviation from the rotation axis of the member 440.

Therefore, in order to de-energize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before changing from the state shown in FIG. 43(b) to the state shown in FIG. It is necessary to de-energize the

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the abutment member 430 retreats from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410, so that the restriction on the upward displacement of the translational member 410 is released. , the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the linear motion member 410 is upwardly displaced by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is thrown upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force thereof is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not regulated by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the translation member 410 The biasing force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 applied via the linear motion member 410 are both Since they are configured in the same way in the upright direction, the driving force and urging force applied to the abutment member 430 can be generated in a manner that assists each other.

In FIG. 43(e), the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state in which the abutting member 430 has finished standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the position of the groove forming part 442 that contacts the protruding part 432 of the contact member 430 becomes the first groove part 442a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so that the load applied from the protruding part 432 to the groove forming part 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. 43(d). ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction of raising the abutment member 430 during subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be inhibited due to the displacement of the abutment member 430 standing up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the abutting member 430 finishes standing up, the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is placed in the first groove part 442a, and the protruding part 432 of the abutting member 430 is disposed in the first groove part 442a. The structure is such that the load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. This makes it easier to prevent rotation of the front transmission member 440 from being inhibited by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

From the state shown in FIG. 43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction of forwardly rotating the front transmission member 440, and when it is detected that the detected part 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the performance standby state, and the MPU 221 ( A control program (see Figure 4) has been designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of control of the injection device 400, firing execution control is described in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated once in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state of the injection device 400. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 that rises due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and an effect is executed in which the granular member 320 is scattered.

Since this effect scatters the granular members 320 in the player's field of view, it is flashy and can improve the player's attention. If there is a jackpot at the timing near the end of the following long reach, the player's interest can be improved by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular members 320 to create an effect.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a jackpot, which is not preferable.

In addition, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (missing), the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 will indicate that the long reach during execution will result in a jackpot. This means that the player will be able to figure out whether the game will be a hit or a miss, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a miss, after the injection device 400 is put into the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. The injection device 400 is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, by controlling the drive motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. can be done.

In this case, before the abutment member 430 starts to be displaced in the direction of standing up (see FIG. 42(e)), the translational member 410 is pushed down to bring the translational member 410 and the abutment member 430 into contact. (See FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid friction between the translational member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

In addition, from FIG. 42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission protrusion 440 via the linear motion member 410 prevents the rotation of the front transmission protrusion 440. Since it works in an assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the linear motion member 410 from splashing the collision member 420, so the injection device 400 is placed in a standby state (see FIG. 42(a)) without performing the effect in which the granular member 320 is scattered. can be restored to.

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the forward direction until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

Thereby, both the production control for scattering the granular members 320 and the production control for not scattering the granular members 320 can be executed using the same preliminary operation accompanying the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand whether the game is a jackpot or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the outcome due to differences in drive sounds.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized to temporarily eliminate the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. . This makes it difficult to determine from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the opposite direction, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the drive direction from a state where the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven. .

Therefore, the driving motor MT1 is controlled to drive in advance of the timing of notification of success or failure in the performance, and even if a driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player understands the success or failure result. be able to.

As a result, drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the success/failure notification timing without running the risk of the player being able to grasp the success or failure result from the driving sound. The stop timing can be varied. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped sufficiently before the firing state, it will not interfere with the subsequent performance. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates contrary to control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28.

In FIG. 44, changes in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component" in the description of FIG. 44) due to the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460 are shown. Illustrated in chronological order. Below, they will be explained in order.

In FIG. 44(a), the arrangement of each component in the performance standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 42(a)) is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44(a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the lid member 480 receives a biasing force toward the retracting side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and this load is If no countermeasure is taken, the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 may be affected by the transmission to the rear transmission member 460.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the circular curved surface and the arcuate surface are in contact with each other, so the load generated by the contact is directed toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, since the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, the load applied to the groove forming part 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the third groove 462c of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the attitude change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the attitude change rotationally drives the rear side transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical protrusion 472 upward. The urging force of torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of transmission arm member 470.

In this embodiment, the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the attitude change direction of the transmission arm member 470 caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are as follows. Since both have the same configuration in the clockwise direction, the driving force and biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually complementary manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contacting each other.

Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 even when there is no need to displace the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of fatigue accumulated in the transmission arm member 470. .

In FIG. 44(e), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the end of displacement on the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), a firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is established. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the retracting side, and is configured to avoid collision with the granular member 320 (see FIG. 41) to be injected.

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is placed at the end position of the first groove 462a of the rear side transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still placed at the displacement end position on the retracted side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through a firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing the forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the lid member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side and returns to the performance standby state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after the execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the abutment member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43(f) (see e)). Therefore, of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be extremely reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 Most of the drive force can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that come into contact with the rear transmission member 460, so that sufficient driving force can be ensured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. Note that in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the abutment member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described in FIGS. 42 and 43. Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated with a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. is shown without being hidden.

In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction with the linear motion member 410 disposed at the upward displacement end position (for example, the production standby state, see FIG. 42(a)), and the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction. A state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the translational member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a limit is set on the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, when driving in the forward rotational direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the front transmission member 440 can be driven continuously without being restricted in displacement, whereas when driving in the reverse rotational direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven with the displacement regulated, there is a risk that the drive motor MT1 will generate heat and be damaged, so in this embodiment, the drive control is limited to a direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the opposite direction. By providing this, damage to the drive motor MT1 is avoided, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the protruding portion 432 of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 over time.

Note that in FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of normal rotation from the performance standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

In addition, in FIG. 46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the performance standby state as a reference (angle is 0 degrees), and each of the above-mentioned components corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in the arrangement of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change toward the left in FIG. 46. Respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the opposite direction before entering the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) is as follows: The displacement speed is slower than that when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

Note that after the firing state is exceeded, since the collision member 420 has already risen, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted midway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees) can be determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, there is a possibility that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are arranged between the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (the angle is 360 degrees). If there is, that is, if the detected part 445 is not arranged at the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of forward rotation. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to temporarily return to the performance standby state, and thereafter control the execution of each performance. This prevents the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 from being unintentionally restricted and causing the drive motor MT1 to generate heat after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. I can do it.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (the angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which the rotation speed is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized within 2 seconds after firing, by controlling the drive so that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), particles on the way down can be It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at 4x speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entrance side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts flowing down. In this case, the lid member 480 can be completely displaced before the granular member 320 is disposed in the advancing direction of the lid member 480.

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so the granular members 320 can be collected toward the left and right center along the shape of the lid member 480. I can do it. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the lid member 480 is displaced toward the retraction side, and the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 and the collision member 420 Get on top.

In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes in which the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the ejected granular members 320 (the arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be made different. , the performance effect can be improved.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. 47 and 49 illustrate the effect standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 illustrate the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a production member 700 configured to be able to move up and down in the center position in the left and right direction and capable of producing light emission, and hemispherical lights fixedly arranged apart to the left and right of the production member 700. A device 613 is provided.

By performing a light emitting performance using the performance member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, light is emitted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) toward the player, and a performance that makes the player visually recognizable is performed. be able to.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is an exploded rear perspective view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the presentation member 700 is shown in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is located on the front side of the rear plate 611, but in FIGS. , is conveniently arranged on the back side of the rear plate section 611.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated main body member 601 that is fastened and fixed to a bottom wall 511 of a rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 disposed on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlock with each other in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the intermediate member. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected at the upper arm member 620 and change their posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. a transmission gear 650 which is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and rotatably supported by the main body member 601; and an annular portion is assembled to the main body member 601; It includes a torsion spring SP3 that applies an upward biasing force to the upper arm member 620, and a presentation member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630.

The main body member 601 is formed into a left and right long plate shape, and has a pair of guide holes 602 which are long holes on the left and right arranged in a straight line on the left and right, and a pair of guide holes 602 which are cylindrical and protrude in both the front and rear directions from a left and right symmetrical position. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 protruding from the left side toward the back side, An arc-shaped hole 606 is formed in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove is formed in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 on the back side with the detection groove facing toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side. It includes a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 therethrough.

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted into a support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620, and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. By screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, the upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to fall off.

The portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the back side is inserted into the wound body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by the overhang 601a that extends in a dogleg shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed by the biased part 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions to push down the biased portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. A screw with a large diameter head is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, so that the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole through which the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 passes toward the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is located at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in a production standby state or at any other position. It is configured such that it can be determined whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. A front plate part 612 is formed on the left and right sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end parts, and is formed to protrude to the front side from the rear plate part 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate part 612 so as to be able to emit light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613.

The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and blocks the view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visible. The back side of the rear plate part 611 has a dimension that is slightly longer than the front and back width of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620 and extends toward the back side, avoiding the movement locus of the gear part 622 of the upper arm member 620, and abuts the main body member 601 in a plane. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

As a result, it is possible to stabilize the fastened state of the rear plate part 611 to the main body member 601, and also to make it possible to displace the upper arm member 620 in the space divided by the rear plate part 611 and the main body member 601. can. In other words, a change in the posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such as bending with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so that the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate part 612 is a plate-shaped part that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and configured so that the structural parts of these members are not visible to the player. A pair of sliding surfaces 612a are formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate part of the board, and a wiring passageway is formed as a recessed part opened to the back side in the plate part extending from the left upper end toward the back side. A recessed portion 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed to have low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed midway in the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 is a planar plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is approximately a semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact, the state is point contact. It is configured so that Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the front side exceeds an allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are configured to come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Ru.

In this embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set based on the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) and the presentation member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a size that the presentation member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partition member 310.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a comes into contact with the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side, so that the presentation member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is brought into contact with the partition member 310. It is possible to prevent contact.

Note that the sliding portion 612a disposed on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, whereas the sliding portion 612a disposed on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding parts 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a planar shape, and the shape of the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of this embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portions protrude toward the back side (the design portion on the front side is The sliding part 612a may be arranged so that it protrudes toward the back side due to the influence of being placed closer to the back side, or the periphery of the sliding part 612a may also be configured with a similar planar shape as in the left side part of this embodiment. good.

In addition, the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, and the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the cylindrical protrusion 654. The forward displacement is regulated by the fastening screw that is fixed. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, thereby making it possible to avoid generating a large load locally.

The wiring passage recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electric wiring to pass through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electrical wiring that has reached between the back case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then goes to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. The user is guided and passed through the presentation member 700.

In this way, by making the insertion path of the electric wiring into the inside of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from above, the elongated lower arm member 630 connected to the presentation member 700 is largely displaced in the left-right direction as the elongated lower arm member 630 is displaced. Even when the electrical wiring is displaced by a distance that is approximately half the width of the left and right width of the back case 510 (in this embodiment), it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from becoming loose and hanging downward.

The hemispherical illumination device 613 is a device that includes a hemispherical lens member and irradiates light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side of the device to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 is directed in the front-rear direction. can. For example, by making it easier for the player who is viewing the center of the third symbol display device 81 to see the light, or by shining the light onto the effect member 700 in the overhanging or enlarged state, it is made easier to make the player notice the light. You can

The upper arm member 620 has a support hole 621 formed in the shape of a long plate and configured as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear part 622 formed on an arc centered on the support hole 621 and configured to be able to mesh with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 formed in a circular shape at the longitudinal end. The connecting portion 623 is configured to be able to pass through the cylindrical protrusion 631 of the transmission gear 650, and the connecting portion 623 is formed only on the left upper arm member 620 as a long hole with a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650. The upper arm member 620 includes a transmission hole 624 and a biased portion 625 that protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621, and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, which will be described in detail later.

The biased portion 625 is a portion that is engaged with one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3, and increases the biasing force in the direction of upwardly displacing the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the biased portion 625. Arm member 620 receives.

Furthermore, the engagement between the tip hook-shaped portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 can restrict the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is formed of a long plate member that is substantially bilaterally symmetrical, except that the left arm has a path for passing electrical wiring, and has a circular shape that projects from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right outer positions to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and a columnar protrusion 632 that protrudes from the left and right inner positions with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 in the front and back direction. The support hole 633 has a circular support hole 633, and a plurality of arcuate holes 634 are formed through the support hole 633 along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633.

The cylindrical protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting part 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large diameter head is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 631 from the back side. Lower arm member 630 is supported by upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 via a collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is inserted into the female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 632 on the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported with respect to the main body member 601 so that it cannot fall off by screwing a screw with a large diameter head from the lower arm member 601.

The support hole 633 and the arcuate hole 634 are used for connection with the presentation member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arcuate hole 634 is formed is thicker on the lower side than on the upper side. As a result, when the effect member 700 is placed at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported in a thick part so as to be held from the left and right sides, thereby effectively preventing the effect member 700 from changing its posture to a forward-leaning position. can be regulated.

In addition, the lower arm member 630 on the left side includes an arrangement portion 635 that is formed open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin lid portion 636 is provided on the side and functions as a lid for the placement portion 635.

The arrangement portion 635 includes a proximal through hole 635a that is bored in the front-rear direction at the end on the side of the cylindrical protrusion 632.

The base end side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement part 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side, is guided to the arrangement part 635, and exits from the arrangement part 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630.

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the performance standby state, a lower meat part 637 disposed below the boundary is recessed toward the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side with the tangential line as the boundary is formed as a thin plate part.

In the right lower arm member 630, this lower flesh portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction. Further, in the left lower arm member 630, the lower flesh portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635, is configured to be able to guide electrical wiring therein, and is disposed as a lid on the guide path. This is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin lid portion 636.

The electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement part 635 and the thin lid part 636) and is guided to the production member 700 side, so it is connected to the members disposed before and after the lower arm member 630 (for example, This can prevent the upper arm member 620) from coming into contact with the electrical wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to entanglement or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

In addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 that is assembled from the front side, the lower arm member 630 includes a pressing member PC1 that is made of the same material and is assembled from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body plate-shaped portion of the main body member 601 at the front and rear via this pressing member PC1. Note that the main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not in constant contact and have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced toward the back side, they come into contact and limit the displacement. This function is similar to that of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has pressing members PC1 assembled on both its front and rear sides, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement and reduce the resistance that occurs to vertical displacement when the displacement is limited.

The tip of the pressing member PC1, which is assembled from the back side, extending toward the back side is arranged closer to the back side than the end of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. Thereby, even if the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced toward the back side to such an extent that it comes into contact with the main body member 601, it is possible to avoid the upper arm member 620 coming into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front and rear.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-back direction. For example, in this embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are located in the front and back. Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the configuration is such that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 or the drive displacement of the presentation member 700 itself.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body part 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear part 652 carved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main body part 651, and a semicircular main body part A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft part 605 can be inserted on the central axis of the semicircular shape of the semicircular body part 651, and a support hole 653 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the outer diameter end of the semicircular body part 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical protrusion 654, a detection plate part 655 formed in the circumferential end of the semicircular main body part 651 in a plate shape with a thickness that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, and the detection plate part 655. 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 formed through the thickened portion 656 in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side.

The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arcuate hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 as the transmission gear 650 rotates. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a fastening screw with a large diameter head is inserted into the female thread formed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so that they cannot fall off, and forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be engageable with the above-mentioned displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). By arranging the regulated hole 657 on the support hole 653 side (position closer to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state (see FIG. 21(a)), the transmission gear 650 is connected to the displacement regulation device 180. The structure is such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a portion that needs to be able to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, by forming the portions where engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur with a thin wall, it is possible to reduce the material cost required for the transmission gear 650.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the production member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the production member 700. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the production member 700 includes a plate-shaped main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate part 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate part 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported rotatably with respect to the functional plate part 720, and a rotating plate 730 between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate part 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 that is arranged and configured to be able to move in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 and a drive gear MG3 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate section 720 are connected to the function plate section 720. The drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function board section 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and the light emitting device 750 which is fastened and fixed to the front end of the plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 and are respectively fastened and fixed to the effect standby state. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 that are combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting production device 750.

The plate-like main body 710 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 that protrude from symmetrical positions toward the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 protrude from a position on an arc centered at 711 on the back side in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the upper arc hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions. 711, a wiring guide member 714 provided below the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressing member provided on the back surface of the plate. It includes a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1 guided to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 between the arrangement part 635 and the thin lid part 636 to the front side through the lower arm member 630. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided by a wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in the limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 will come into contact with other members or be seen by the player.

In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface that slopes downward as the upper surface goes toward the back side. It also has the function of softening the contact between the two.

That is, the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610 when the production member 700 is displaced upwardly, and when the production member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even if the wire guide member 714 comes into contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side during upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wire guide member 714.

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed to be slidable on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of upward displacement of the presentation member 700, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower part can come into contact with the rear plate part 611 of the front cover member 610. By configuring this, the positions where the load for maintaining the posture of the presentation member 700 is generated can be separated.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional board section 720. Note that in the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate part 720 is formed from a resin material into a substantially plate shape, and includes a cylindrical part 721 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical part 721. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement part 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be placed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted therethrough. A motor fixing part 724 that has an opening and is formed to be able to fasten and fix the drive motor MT3, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical part 721, and a radial long hole 725a for the radial long hole 725a. A plurality of guide holes 725 (in this embodiment, 5 sets) consisting of a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b intersecting each other at right angles, and extending radially outward on an extension of the radial elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five locations) extension plate portions 726 and both ends in the width direction of the extension plate portion 726 from the back side end of the flat portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726. A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, one pair for each of the extension plate parts 726) protruding from each other, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side. 728.

The cylindrical part 721 is arranged so that its rear end comes into contact with the plate-like main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 with the internal through-hole communicating with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710. be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the threaded portion is screwed into a female thread formed at the end of the back side of the cylindrical part 721.

As a result, the functional plate part 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the center thereof, and in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 which is fastened and fixed to the sensor placement part 723 and the drive motor MT3 which is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing part 724. This allows the detection sensor SC7 and drive motor MT3 to be energized.

The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole that allows the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 to project out to the front side, and when the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7, the detected portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 is exposed. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide hole 725 is a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 to be arranged, and extends along a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole-like radial hole 725a is formed, and a long hole-like hole is formed on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole 725a along a straight line perpendicular to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. A pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b are formed.

The radial elongated hole 725a and the intersecting elongated hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusion 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the assembled arrangement state. The details will be explained later.

The columnar protruding portion 728 is configured such that its rear end can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side is screwed into a female thread formed on the tip side of the columnar protrusion 728, so that the functional plate part 720 is connected to the plate-like main body. It is fastened and fixed to 710.

In the assembled state, the columnar protrusion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730. That is, the columnar protruding portion 728 serves both as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730.

56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is formed from a resin material into a substantially disk shape, and includes a cylindrical portion 731 that protrudes toward the front side in a cylindrical shape at the center and has the inside of the cylinder penetrated, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 are formed along a coaxial arc shape, and a long through hole is formed at a position that is on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. The guide hole 733 includes a plurality of guide holes 733 (five locations in this embodiment), and an extending claw portion 734 extending radially outward in a claw shape at a position corresponding to the guide hole 733.

The cylindrical part 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical part 721 of the function plate part 720, and is extended from the front end to the front side and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate part 720 to the detection sensor SC7. The detection target portion 731a is formed to be able to enter the detection groove of the drive motor MT3, and the gear portion 731b is formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar protruding portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 at a little less than about 120 degrees.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape, and include a small diameter circular arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731, and a small diameter circular arc portion 733a that is closer to the center of the cylindrical portion 731 than the small diameter circular arc portion 733a. It includes a large-diameter arcuate portion 733b having a long length from the axis, and a connecting portion 733c that connects the large-diameter arcuate portion 733b and the small-diameter arcuate portion 733a.

Although the form of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, it is formed such that the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes in accordance with the position. Ru. In particular, in this embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle near the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

This makes it possible to reduce the resistance that occurs when transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the presentation effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extending claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise when viewed from the front, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed closer to the back side in the thickness direction. It includes a back side claw part 734a and a front side claw part 734b formed on the front side of the back side claw part 734a. In this embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into a rear claw portion 734a and a front claw portion 734b at a substantially midway point in the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

The extending claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740. The front side claw part 734b and the back side claw part 734a respectively correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b whose protruding tip positions from the telescopic displacement member 740 are different in the front and back. The guide is guided inward in the radial direction, details of which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the extending claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension length of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is longer than that of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side. is formed. In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be alleviated.

That is, even if the telescoping members 740 have the same shape, the relationship between the direction in which they can be displaced and the direction of gravity is different, so the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each telescoping member 740. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. 740, the first guided protrusion 743b may be disposed, and the radially inward guidance by the extending claw portion 734 may fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the telescopic displacement member 740. Guidance inward in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction closer to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so that the extending claw portion 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed short, thereby reducing material costs and downsizing the rotary plate 730. I can do it.

The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. Note that in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescoping displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), among the five sets of telescoping displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set disposed at the top is shown in a state where they are arranged collectively. 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as it would be if it were to be discretized.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of elongated members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane on which the elongated members can be displaced is also referred to as the front layer plane, and the plane on which the plurality of elongated members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as the rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 includes a pair of base end members 741 which are arranged in two layers, front and back, and are relatively rotatably supported at the lower end, and a pair of base end members 741 are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the base end member 741. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 that are relatively rotatably supported at the upper end of the first elongated member 742, and an upper end of the second elongated member 742. The distal end adjustment member 744 has a guide elongated hole 744a that extends linearly so as to be guided.

The proximal member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The proximal end member 741 includes a transmission protrusion 741a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side, and a circular protrusion 741a that protrudes from the back surface where the cylindrical protrusion 741a protrudes toward the front side. A guided protrusion 741b that projects in a columnar shape and is inserted through the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end of the first elongated member 742 that projects in a columnar shape from the upper end of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. A guided protrusion 741c is inserted into a through hole drilled in the guide portion 741c.

The transmitted protrusion 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotary plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotary plate 730 rotates.

The guided protrusion 741b and the guided protrusion 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate part 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. Note that the guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is relatively rotatably supported on a longitudinal axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower end of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. A guided protrusion 742a is provided which is inserted into the upper end of the proximal end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the functional plate part 725, and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the front side from the upper end of the member on the front layer plane side. A pair of cylinders protrudes from the upper end of the member on the layer plane side to a point flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side with a diameter about the width of the member, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the tip of the protrusion toward the front side. It includes a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a substantially middle position of the member on the rear plane side toward the back side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed inward in the radial direction due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The tip adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length extending along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second elongated member 743 to be inserted. It includes a pair of guide elongated holes 744a formed in the shape of holes, and a second guided protrusion 744b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side.

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip disposed in front of the protruding tip of the first guided protrusion 743b, and is guided by the front claw part 734b of the extending claw part 734 of the rotary plate 730, Due to this guidance, a load directed inward in the radial direction is applied (see FIG. 57).

The second guided protrusion 744b has a protruding tip that is not circular in shape, and is inclined as the rotary plate 730, which has its rotation center on the transmitted protrusion 741a side, is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, the resistance at the time of contact with the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 can be avoided from becoming excessive. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 58(b) and FIG. 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged collectively and when they are arranged separately, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement members 740. Support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer ends or inner ends of the guide slot 744a of the tip adjustment member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (longitudinal arrangement) of the tip adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjustment member 744, extends from the fastening portion to the front side, and extends toward the front side from the extended tip toward the side that covers the telescopic displacement member 740. A generally triangular member in front view, which has a shaped portion that extends from the extending tip parallel to the plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) on which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to hide the decorative member 752 on the back side from visibility by pasting colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets on the front and back sides, and at the right end part, a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet is attached. An extended plate portion 761 is provided which extends in a plate shape to the right in such a manner that a plate surface is formed.

Like the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate part 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet pasted on its front and back sides, and is a shield placed on the right side (next in the clockwise direction) when viewed from the front. It is arranged to face the back side of the left end of the design member 760, and is configured to abut when the shielding design member 760 shifts toward the back side, thereby suppressing the shift.

The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be shifted toward the back side of the main body of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion and the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 move in the direction of displacement (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is arranged farther away from the main body of the shielding design member 760, but at least the dimension that the shielding design member 760 is allowed to shift in the front and back direction of the shielding design member 760 is. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extension plate portion 761 and the main body of the shielding design member 760 are brought into contact along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

Moreover, the shape of the front surface of the extending plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface with the normal line directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that moves closer to the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design members 760 are assembled with the shielding design member 760 on the right side of the uppermost shielding design member 760 being slightly shifted toward the back side with respect to the uppermost shielding design member 760. Even when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position (see FIG. 63), the position of the shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is changed along the front slope of the extension plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760. Misalignment can be corrected. Thereby, the relative positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 in the front and back direction can be easily aligned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is such that the member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the rear layer plane. , a member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the intermediate parts of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect in a manner that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily tilted to a posture in which it is disposed toward the front.

Since the structure of the telescopic displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extension plate part 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so that it is more likely to tilt toward the front position.

By tilting the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back side of the shielding design member 760 that is disposed opposite to the extension plate portion 761 side. By displacing the shielding design member 760 to the collective arrangement position in this state, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane ) can be avoided.

In the state where five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged together (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are placed next to each other on the left (adjacent in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses displacement toward the back side.

According to this configuration, the extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 is prevented from shifting toward the front side by abutting the shielding design member 760 on the right (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress positional displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking movement between the rotary plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional board section 720. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotary plate 730 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and an example of the arrangement of the external shapes of the transmitted protrusion 741a, guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is illustrated. Ru.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescoping members 740 are arranged in groups (see FIG. 58), and FIG. 61 shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated approximately 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the telescoping members 740 are separated. (See FIG. 59).

In this embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the guided protrusion 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by being displaced in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the member 730 .

In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate section 720, so the shielding design member 760 is stretched toward the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be able to be displaced so as to be exposed, the details will be described later.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 53 and 54. The light emitting device 750 includes an illumination board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the center of the illumination board 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape protruding toward the front side, so that an area for disposing the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. A drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged inside the opening 751a. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring, but this limits the area in which the LED as a light emitting means can be placed, so from the viewpoint of light emitting performance, the smaller the opening 751a is, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and electric wiring. desirable.

Since no LED can be provided in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, this embodiment deals with this by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light transmitting member 752a made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material, and a light transmitting member 752a that is assembled from the front side to the light transmitting member 752a and has a mirror-like visible surface (for example, coated with silver plating). ) a mirror surface member 752b.

An opening is formed in the center of the light transmitting member 752a, and the center of the mirror member 752b is closed, so that the mirror member 752b can be placed at the position where the drive motor MT3 is placed when viewed from the front. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the player can see reflected light from light irradiation from other directions (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical illumination device 613). , it is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized as dark.

The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 will be explained. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. Note that illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted in FIGS. 62 to 64 for ease of understanding.

62 shows the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extended state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600. Illustrated.

Note that the state in the middle of descent shown in FIG. 63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half of the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the performance standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission section 624a and the margin section 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the cylindrical protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission section 624a and is placed at a position where the downward displacement of the presentation member 700 can be started is the presentation standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600.

This performance standby state suggests, for example, that the performance member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the performance member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10. This is a state that can be switched according to the execution of the suggested effect, and before the suggested effect is executed, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is arranged on the side of the margin 624b.

As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shaped portion that extends continuously from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and in the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-back direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650, and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated. Displacement of the presentation member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the above-mentioned effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is a effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not ultimately displaced downward, in this embodiment, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. It is controlled to change the state to .

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the presentation member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. Drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

Thereby, when a performance suggesting that the performance member 700 moves downward is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent performance regarding the performance member 700 due to a difference in the drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The allowance portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when rotating the drive motor MT2 in the direction of raising the presentation member 700. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. The displacement is simply sliding along 624b.

No matter where the columnar protrusion 654 is placed in the margin 624b, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is lowered, so that the rotation allows the transmission gear 650 to be stopped immediately when the detected plate part 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 can be set to a large value without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set high.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 will be directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it contacts the cylindrical protrusion 654.

Further, even if the rising speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is regulated by the upper arm member 620, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the performance standby state. It is set larger from the mid-descent state to the extended state compared to the mid-descent state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 as the effect member 700 moves downward, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually perceive as if the displacement speed of the presentation member 700 is increasing rapidly, and the presentation effect of the vertical displacement of the presentation member 700 is can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the production member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, for ease of understanding, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted.

65(a) and 65(b) illustrate the effect standby state of the enlarging/reducing unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates the descending state where the effect member 700 has descended from the effect standby state, and FIG. 67 illustrates, The extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, before the performance indicating that the performance member 700 is displaced downward is executed, the drive motor MT2 is stopped while the detected plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. At this point, the drive motor MT2 is drive-controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled to change its state to a production standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven in the direction of upwardly displacing the production member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. By controlling to release the transmission gear 650, it is possible to stop the transmission gear 650 at a position that has even slightly entered the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the performance standby state, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, but regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The driving of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to be stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be located at the end of the margin portion 624b.

Thereby, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is located at the end of the margin portion 624b. In this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Note that even if the stopping position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly shifted, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the regulated hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657.

Therefore, for example, after pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67 to bring the displacement regulating device 180 into the regulating state (see FIG. 15(c)), the transmission gear 650 is Even if the rotation of the transmission gear 650 is controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the presentation member 700 through drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that there is a displacement defect in the transmission gear 650 because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can be done.

Based on this determination, it is possible to notify the abnormality by displaying an error message indicating that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is defective in displacement on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulating state.

As a result, information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be conveyed to the clerk at the gaming machine store by utilizing notifications such as error displays regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin equal to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the upper arm member 700 upward is too high, the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be too high, causing the lower arm member 630 to displace the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the gravity direction (upward direction), so downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. Therefore, when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620, the vertical load at the contact position can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side shape of the lower flesh portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 The contact area when the upper arm member 620 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a large load being locally applied to the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or bent.

In this way, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, so that the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the presentation member 700 upward is excessive. Therefore, even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is regulated by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above will cause the lower arm to move upward. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state by the driving force of the drive motor MT2 against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. corresponds to the situation.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are disposed at the ends of the arcuate holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

Thereby, the degree to which the lower arm member 630 holds the presentation member 700 (the degree to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the performance member 700 to a higher degree in the performance standby state or the extended state compared to the state in the middle of descent.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation around the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, if the auxiliary protrusion 712 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the cylindrical protrusion 711 on the right side. Posture may change.

In this embodiment, the presentation member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical protrusion 711, but in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711. The displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the presentation member 700 changes its posture points in the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the production member 700 may visibly occur without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the extended state, when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. The lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 630. Thereby, the posture change of the presentation member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture to a discernible extent.

In addition, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the right side are disposed at the end positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side to It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630, as described above.

Similarly, in the extended state, since the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the circular arc-shaped hole 732, the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the circular arc-shaped hole 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the presentation member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in rear view is restricted because the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630, as described above.

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the presentation member 700 in the rotational direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the front-back direction) but also in the tilting direction (rotation direction centered on an axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but also by an auxiliary protrusion 712 arranged above the cylindrical protrusion 711, Since the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 can be connected in three positions (up and down) by being connected by the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the direction of tilting of the presentation member 700 can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed above the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 (on the base side of the arcuate hole 634), the tilting of the production member 700 is prevented. The elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in posture in the direction.

Furthermore, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated main body of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the pressing member PC1 is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when a load due to a change in the posture of the production member 700 is applied to the elongated main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the direction of deflection along the elongated direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that restricts displacement, it is possible to firmly prevent changes in the posture of the presentation member 700.

Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (lower side) of the cylindrical protrusion 711 can increase the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, so that the effect member 700 can be lowered. It is possible to suppress posture changes in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

In this embodiment, the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-like main body 710 of the presentation member 700. In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

This makes it possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture in such a manner that it falls forward centering on the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630, and also to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-back direction. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the presentation member 700 changes its posture centering on the connecting portion in such a manner that it falls backward.

That is, even if there is a possibility that multiple types of posture changes may occur in the presentation member 700, the front-back displacement of the presentation member 700 is suppressed regardless of which of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, it can respond to any change in posture.

This prevents the performance member 700 from rubbing against or colliding with the division member 310 even when the front-to-back distance between the performance member 700 and the division member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) is narrowed. Since this can be avoided, damage to the presentation member 700, deterioration of the designed portion, and reduction in visibility (reduction in transparency) due to damage or scratches on the partition member 310 can be made difficult to occur.

In a state where the presentation member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 comes into contact with the shaped portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, excessive displacement of upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and production member 700 can be prevented by simply accumulating driving force in transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the extended state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force that slightly exceeds the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing upward and displacing. It's in control.

Thereby, the presentation member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to be large (for example, to a size that allows the presentation member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when starting to displace the effect member 700 upward, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load from being applied to the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting the upward displacement, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 should not start to be displaced upward due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the drive motor MT2 starts), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the displacement has started.

Thereby, the load placed on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced compared to the case where the production member 700 in a stopped state is upwardly displaced.

65 to 67, changes in the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electrical wiring DK1 is illustrated with hidden lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid part 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the circular arc hole 634, and is guided inside the wiring guide member 714, It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, tension in the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the production member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. I try to do that. Thereby, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, so that displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed into an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when displacing the effect member 700 upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shaped portion in which the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. The arrangement is such that the DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

Thereby, the electrical wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and taken out from the wiring guide member 714, and the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably changed.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed in the arcuate hole 634, which is disposed on the front side of the thin lid part 636 and is mostly hidden by the thin lid part 636, is in an overhanging state. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided into the arcuate hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700, it is necessary to screw a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712 (or remove it).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Thereby, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 and other constituent members from being damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance with the production member 700 being placed at a halfway position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) of the telescopic displacement member 740 of the presentation member 700 due to a change in state will be explained. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

68 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the middle of descending, the effecting member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow enlarged displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the size of the presentation member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, so the amount of attitude change allowed for the presentation member 700 from the perspective of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be made larger.

In the middle of the enlarged displacement of the presentation member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700, and the light transmitting member 752b is arranged at a position where it is not covered by the effect member 700. 752a is placed at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted from the LEDs etc. arranged on the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a, and also to improve the visibility of the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror member 752b, the presentation effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

For example, when the mirror surface member 752b is not irradiated with light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the mirror surface member 752b is colored with the ground color of the shielding design member 760 (in this embodiment, red). can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b and visually recognized is a mixture of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LED. It can be made in different colors. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping the shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between forward and reverse directions in small increments.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of expanded displacement up to the halfway position, as shown in FIG. 744 is set at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 744a. Thereby, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While making it possible to achieve such a displacement, when the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a group or when the shielding design members 760 are expanded and displaced to the maximum in the radial direction, the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second elongated member 743 By arranging the positions at both ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned to its original position (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b)). ).

Further, the intermediate position that is allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the position may be slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or it may be a position slightly before the position at which the maximum displacement occurs.

Here, in a state where the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the assembled arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized as overlapping with the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely when viewed from the front), the extended plate portion 761 is Since the portions 761 play the role of filling the gaps between the shielding design members 760, it is possible to visually recognize to the players that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, like the main body of the shielding design member 760, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate part 761, so the red color of the extension plate part 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extension plate portion 761 or the shielding design member 760, it may be difficult to distinguish.

Note that, unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly shifted from the assembled arrangement state by painting the extension plate portion 761 in another color (for example, gold), etc. The extension plate portions 761 that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which the light transmitting member 752a is formed from a colorless and light transmitting resin material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extension plate portions 761 from the assembled arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a that are visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are not shielded. Since the shielding design members 760 are visually recognized in red like the design members 760, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when emitting light from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make it stand out, and the light emitting effect is The performance effect can be improved.

70 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is shown in an extended state and the effect member 700 is shown in an enlarged state. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the extended state, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to expand and displace until the telescopic displacement member 740 is dispersed at its maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the presentation member 700 when viewed from the front becomes maximum, and the amount of change in posture allowed for the presentation member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22) becomes the minimum. Note that the measures for suppressing changes in the posture of the presentation member 700 are as described above.

In the enlarged state of the presentation member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the appearance reflected on the mirror member 752b can be changed from the case where the presentation member 700 is disposed at a position midway through the enlarged displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760, and to make the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b easily visible to the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 can be visually recognized even in a control mode in which the LED of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) continues to emit light of the same color. The color of the light visible to the player can be changed over time.

To be more specific, for example, when white light is irradiated from the illuminated board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of expansion, while the color of the shielding design member 760 is visible as the expansion is displaced. The color of the character 760 becomes weaker (the range narrows), and the background color (silver) of the mirror member 752b becomes easier to see at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

In this embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, but are controlled in a state where the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. , and is controlled to execute an enlarged displacement of the effect member 700.

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect members 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect members 700 are arranged in a group. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other structural members and configuring the structure so that problems with displacement do not occur due to collisions with other structural members, the enlarged displacement may be It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

72(a), FIG. 72(b), FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for easy understanding, and FIG. 72 is used as a reference. , the rotating plate 730 is shown rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the presentation member 700 are dispersed at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. A state in which it has been expanded and displaced to an intermediate position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. 72(b), , the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is disposed in the middle of the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side has started contacting the rear claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. A state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the rear claw part 734a of the rotary plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

Since the influence of gravity is different between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement mode of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 is different from that of the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the parts.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side are placed close to the rotating plate 730 side due to their own weight, while the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates due to its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotary plate 730 to an extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted protrusion 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the assembled position. Therefore, the timing at which the five shielding design members 760 reach the assembled arrangement state is not simultaneous, and at least the upper three shielding design members 760 are earlier than the lower two shielding design members 760.

Thereby, the performance members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 forcefully reach the assembled arrangement state, so that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early breakage.

On the other hand, in the case where the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state as in this embodiment, Since the self-weight is generated in a direction opposing the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to collision between the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacement member 740 is pushed and cut by the rear claw portion 734a, and is brought into the assembled state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjustment member 744 is arranged apart from the front side claw part 734b.

In FIG. 75, a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the diagram shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 has been rotated counterclockwise in rear view to a terminal position where the columnar protrusion 728 of the functional plate part 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730.

FIG. 76 is a sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the presentation members 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear claw portion 734a abuts the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 Displacement in the outward direction is regulated.

In addition, the surface of the front claw portion 734b on the central axis side comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, thereby restricting the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b come into contact with each other in the radial direction with the front and rear width in the protruding direction, so that the arrangement of the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744 can be adjusted. It can stabilize your posture.

Further, the front surface of the tip adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726. During this sliding process, the protruding tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 comes into contact with the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotation direction. (The closer the clustered arrangement state is, the more it is inclined so as to protrude toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjustment member 744 is sandwiched between the extension plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730, as the rotary plate 730 rotates and the production members 700 approach the assembled arrangement state, the tip The tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726.

Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotary plate 730 from increasing excessively, the pinching load is applied to the tip adjustment member 744 in the front-rear direction in a manner that gradually increases, thereby improving the front-rear position and posture of the tip adjustment member 744. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design members 760 in the front-rear direction, and the shielding design members 760 can be arranged in close contact with each other without gaps in the assembled state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), it will be explained that the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configurations of the shielding design members 760 are all the same, and the configurations of the telescopic displacement members 740 that displace the shielding design members 760 are also common.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extension plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed at the top, the right side, FIG. 74 (b)) is configured to be easily inclined in posture so that it is placed on the rear side compared to the opposite side.

This is due to the manner in which the second elongated member 743 is formed, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the posture of the tip adjustment member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is lower than the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift toward the clockwise direction (left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 placed at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, in the rotary plate 730, the extending claw portion 734 is disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is arranged counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. Rotationally displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b or the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b is Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the presentation members 700 are arranged together.

The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. 75. Therefore, in the process of state changes of the presentation member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is placed at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). , the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and then a change in attitude can be caused to eliminate (correct) the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760.

That is, by maintaining the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate part 761 come into contact (collision). ), while eliminating (correcting) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the shielding design member 760 can be easily avoided. The plate portions disposed at the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush, making it easier to create a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the assembled arrangement state.

Note that the state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 has occurred to a maximum. Furthermore, the configuration is such that a posture shift opposite to the posture shift shown in FIG. 74(b) is unlikely to occur due to the front-back arrangement of the second elongated member 743. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face each other.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the reduction side wall portion when the tip adjustment member 744 is enlarged or reduced. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extension plate part 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is adjusted by coming into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction side end of the displacement range. Posture deviations can be corrected.

As a result, not only can the posture be corrected by engaging with other shielding design members 760, but also the posture can be stabilized when the tip adjustment member 744 reaches the reduced side end of the displacement range. can.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 6. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described firing performance unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as performance devices that enliven the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be explained.

The displacement and rotation unit 800 is a pair of units that are arranged symmetrically and are configured with mutually symmetrical shapes. Therefore, below, the configuration of the left displacement and rotation unit 800 will be described, and the description of the right displacement and rotation unit 800 will be as follows. Omitted. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the horizontal slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and a metal plate portion 810 fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate part 810. A transmission member 830 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 inserted through and configured to be slidable in the left and right direction. A transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced; A wiring arm member 870 is rotatably fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and a wiring guide member 880 that guides the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate part 810 has a pair of both-end fixing parts 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide part 812 formed so as to be able to guide a transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide section 813 formed in a groove shape and capable of guiding the cylindrical protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide section 813. A falling-off prevention plate 814 is provided on the back side to prevent falling off.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate part 821, a wall part 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate part 821 to the back side, and a circular movement from the approximate center of the area surrounded by the wall part 822 to the back side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 that protrudes in a columnar shape, omitted portions 824a and 824b that are large enough to allow insertion of a connector portion of electrical wiring and in which the formation of a wall portion is omitted, and a left end portion of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 are formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is provided) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal metal rod insertion portion through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted is formed at the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 are formed (or a cylindrical member is arranged) and are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. A falling-off prevention member 827 that can be configured to be able to fall off, a shaft support 828 that is formed in a columnar shape to protrude from the back side of the flat plate portion 821 and that can pivotally support the second-stage pinion 861, and A support protrusion 829 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the left side in FIG. 79 is provided.

The wall portion 822 is a portion that forms a region on the inside in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced, and is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring. The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omitted portion 824a formed as an opening, and a second omitted portion 824b formed as a recessed portion opened to the back side.

The metal rod insertion part 825 has an upper part extending in a plate shape toward the back side, and has an upper detection sensor SC8 and a lower detection sensor fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be disposed in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body 831 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a female thread formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body 831. An insertion hole 832 is formed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that can be screwed into the plate, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed, and the rear surface is located in an area constituted by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It includes a lid-shaped part 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear part 834 in which gear teeth are formed linearly in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body part 831.

The cylindrical protrusion 823 has both the role of a part into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed, and the role of a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is moved up and down in the vertical direction. This causes the vertical slide member 820 to move up and down.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a main body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is restricted in the left-right direction, and a rear surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side and constitutes a guide route for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and has a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847 An illumination board 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. a wing-like member 854 rotatably supported by the shaft; and an intermediary member 857 that is fitted into the opening of the wing-like member 854 from the front side in order to match the center opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the center opening of the intermediary member 857 projects from the back side.

The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the back side, a drive gear MG5 thereof arranged on the front side, a rod arrangement part 842 where the metal rod MB3 is arranged, and a bar arrangement part 842 on the lower side of the rod arrangement part 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are carved along the left-right direction is provided.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the horizontal displacement of the electric wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electric wiring to detour. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other structural members, but the details will be described later.

The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing-like member 854 and a drive gear MG5, which are formed so as to be able to mesh with each other, are assembled from different front and rear directions.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 that is recessed toward the back side and has a size that can receive the wing-like member 854, and a cylindrical receiving portion 848 that protrudes from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. cylindrical protrusion 849.

The receiving part 848 includes a through-hole part 848a that is formed in a manner that the shape overlaps with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Expose to a position that is visible when viewed from the rear.

In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and as the drive motor MT5 rotates, driving force is transmitted and the wing-like member 854 is rotationally controlled. This rotational drive of the wing-like member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the route forming member 882 is designed so that it can be performed even in the performance standby state.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a formed at its tip. This is a shaped portion that facilitates maintaining the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

The illumination board 850 includes a circular opening formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an irregularly shaped opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the circular opening, and the irregularly shaped opening 851. A front light emitting means 852a is composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. are arranged on the back side at the outer diameter end of the illumination board 850. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be placed inside the irregularly shaped opening 851, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 is arranged on the back side of the irregularly shaped opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the irregularly shaped opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotating shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thereby, the drive gear MG5 can be brought closer to the illumination board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily brought into mesh with each other.

The front light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the front side near the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 along the arrow D8a.

The back light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces outward in the radial direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light toward the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the light can travel toward the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, the back surface of the circular member 847 is densely formed with a plurality of elongated uneven shapes that are formed along an arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854, so that the player On the other hand, arcuate (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player can easily see the light without disposing an LED or the like whose optical axis faces in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 on the front side of the illumination board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be shifted to the radial direction. In other words, while using the illuminated substrate 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854, the outside of the surface on which the illuminated substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the feathered member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

Thereby, without increasing the size of the illumination board 850, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized on the radially outer side of the wing-like member 854. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-like member 854 rotates at high speed, the back side of the wing-like member 854 becomes a shadow, which may make it difficult to effectively produce light emission in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is thought to be effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, but for this purpose, it is necessary to increase the area where the LEDs and the like are arranged. In other words, it becomes necessary to increase the area of the illuminated board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the size of the illumination board 850 is maintained smaller than the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, and only the visible position of the light is moved radially outward from the rotation trajectory of the wing-like member 854. It can be displaced. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance without increasing the manufacturing cost.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 81 and 82. The decorative member 853 is made of a light-opaque resin material and is coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform a production in which the appearance of the light changes between the inside and the outside of the decorative member 853, with the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, by emitting blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and emitting red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light can be distinguished. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the front-rear direction in the center thereof, and a circular opening 854a extending radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at intermediate positions between adjacent blade portions 854b. and.

The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-like member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor MT5, but a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing-like member 854 is not provided. The posture of the wing-like member 854 is controlled by the length of the drive time. In this configuration, the wing-like member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis and the center of gravity coincide with each other, and by minimizing idle rotation after the power supply to the drive motor MT5 is removed, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the wing-like member 854 assumed by the drive time and the actual posture of the wing-like member 854. Note that the drive motor MT5 may be configured as a stepping motor so that the attitude of the wing-like member 854 can be detected.

The intermediary member 857 is formed to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be made rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center toward the back side, a radial protrusion 858b that protrudes radially outward from the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body. A design protruding portion 858c is provided to protrude upward from the base.

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 with the radial protrusion 858b entering the notch 849a, and is inserted from the back side of the circular member 847 into the female thread formed at the tip. By screwing in the inserted fastening screw, the central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design protruding portion 858c can also function so as to come into contact with the wing-like member 854 and adjust the rotational manner of the wing-like member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design protruding portion 858c and the front surface of the wing-like member 854 are arranged close enough to each other to the extent that they rub against each other, the stopped posture of the wing-like member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increased resistance at the time of this rubbing. can be achieved.

As a result, the drive control modes of the wing-like member 854 include a drive mode in which it continues to rotate for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which it intermittently rotates about one rotation (which produces an irregular movement at the beginning of rotation). (driving mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stopping posture of the wing-like member 854 in the latter driving mode.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 79 and 80. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and mesh with a second-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the second-stage pinion 861. The rack member 862 includes a rack member 862 and a fall prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off the vertical slide member 820.

The second-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862, and a pinion with a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that is elongated from side to side and can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and a gear portion 862a on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the formation position of the gear portion 862a. A cylindrical protrusion 862b is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to have a ratio of 9:16. Therefore, the ratio between the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 in the left and right direction and the amount of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the left and right direction is maintained at 9:16.

The cylindrical protrusion 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. The plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear end of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the cylindrical protrusion 862b is placed in the transmission guide part 813. The thickness of the plate is such that even if the cylindrical protrusion 862b moves toward the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814, it will not fall off from the transmission guide portion 813.

Thereby, when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state, the rack member 862 can be prevented from falling off from the transmission guide section 813.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear part 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement of the rack member 862 is different from that of the small diameter pinion 861a. The horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862. Thereby, it is possible to secure a large width of horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 while keeping the horizontal width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but the details will be described later.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the route forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. Note that in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is an elongated member made of a resin material, and includes an elongated main body portion 871 formed in an elongated curved shape and having one side open. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction of the support hole 872, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 located close to and in the same direction as the support hole 872 and capable of arranging electrical wiring. , a plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open end of the elongated main body 871, and a resin mold for forming the claws 874 are removable. and a circular protruding portion 876 that protrudes from near the other end in the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871 in parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872 and has a circular cross section.

The elongated main body part 871 is a part in which the electrical wiring guided to the open side through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and includes a constricted part 871a having a short width in the middle part. The electrical wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end in the longitudinal direction (the end opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed).

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely pinches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the elongated main body portion 871 to the extent that no breakage occurs, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively misaligned. The constricted portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from shifting beyond the constricted portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed in a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted therethrough, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when crossing to the vertical slide member 820. In this embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the amount of displacement of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged to be accommodated on the open side of the elongated main body portion 871 from falling off from the elongated main body portion 871 . Further, since the space for removing the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 with a minimum area, the electrical wiring is connected to the opposite side of the open portion of the elongated main body portion 871. It can be prevented from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide section 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 includes a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. A path forming member 882 which is a member and is fastened and fixed to the base member 810 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open part, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side at a vertically distant position. A path passing through the upper open part 883 and the lower open part 884 is configured.

That is, the route forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a extending to one side at the edge, an upper open portion 883 that forms an upper open portion of the route by chipping the wall portion 882a, and a lower end of the route forming member 882. A lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a with a size that allows the insertion of an electrical wiring connector at the lower part, and a lower open part 884 is formed in the wall part 882a toward the upper open part 883 in a range that does not overlap with the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extended portion 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in the shape of a long groove within a range that does not overlap with the extended portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a portion below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. It is provided with a cylindrical protruding portion 887 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female thread formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the left-right direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a closest to the front side. It enters the back side of the wall portion 882a at the position where it is placed (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position near the lower end of displacement on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that forms a route along which the electric wiring is guided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the arrangement of the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap when viewed from the front.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870, the displacement in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is caused by the extension portion 885. and is regulated by the prevention plate 881. Further, the widthwise length of the route of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total widthwise length of the elongated main body portion 871 and the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. This makes it possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open part 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electrical wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion part 887 passes through to the back side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. Equipped with.

The cylindrical protruding portion 887 serves as a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the electrical wiring, and a fastening portion that fixes the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. 86 to 89, the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changing from the performance standby state to the performance upper end state is illustrated in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed from the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 89(a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line.

In FIG. 86, the performance standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved along the displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is placed at an intermediate position between the right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is placed at the intermediate right end state and the upper end state of the effect. 89, the upper end state of the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

86(a), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 88(a), and FIG. 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wiring guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and illustration of other shaped portions is omitted, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized. Further, by partially breaking the shaped portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the vertical movement.

86(b), FIG. 87(b), FIG. 88(b), and FIG. 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated with an imaginary line, and the horizontal slide member 840 is It is illustrated by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 for the purpose of illustrating only the horizontal displacement width.

Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 as the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 changes is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided into the inside of the wiring guide member 880 from the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, and after passing through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, is inserted into the wall part 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, and the details of the displacement will be described later.

The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that a vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocated in the vertical direction. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be explained.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction in the performance standby state (see FIG. 86). In the performance standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is placed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so the displacement rotation unit 800 is set in the performance standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

Further, in the production standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement locus of the horizontal slide member 840, it is avoided that the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent to the left and right sides.

The state in which the drive motor MT4 is drive-controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the production standby state, and the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the halfway right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine based on the output of the upper detection sensor SC8 that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the halfway right end state.

In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the performance standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the upward direction and maintains its posture.

That is, in the halfway right end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, so it is not supported as a support point for the wiring arm member 870. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the performance standby state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rightward displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 accompanying the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the performance standby state to the halfway right end state is performed without changing the attitude of the wiring arm member 870. Ru. This makes it possible to avoid collisions between the members due to a shift in displacement timing, which tends to occur when the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced together.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical sliding member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal sliding member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide section 813, but the displacement exceeds the width of the transmission guide section 813 in the left-right direction.

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the second-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide part 813, and the gear part 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear part 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are geared to the second stage pinion 861. will be combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch radius of the second-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

In this embodiment, since the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the second stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16, the left and right position of the transmission guide portion 813 is The horizontal slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction with a left-right width obtained by multiplying the amount of change by a constant (ie, 16/9=about 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the halfway left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 does not displace to the left and right outwards as much as in the performance standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-back direction.

In such an arrangement, the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 changes as shown in FIG. 88(a). That is, in the process from the halfway right end state to the halfway left end state, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 contacts the connecting recess 886c formed on the back side of the guide recess 886 than the front vertical recess. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced compared to the standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to change its posture after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In addition, during the downward displacement, the opposite holds true (after the attitude of the wiring arm member 870 does not change, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if a shift occurs between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, a collision between the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be avoided.

The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the only displacements are vertical displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can continue to be placed at the left and right outer ends where it is difficult to attract the attention of the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 can be guided by the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of vision.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacement rotation unit 800 reaches the upper end state of the effect, the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 The support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 ( (see FIG. 84) is maintained at a minimum.

In this way, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and back positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 that is configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down. By configuring this to be possible, an advantageous effect is achieved in that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, the horizontal displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. To be more specific, in order to avoid contact with the electric wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged to the right (inward from the left and right) in the performance standby state. In this embodiment, the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at a position to the right (inner side of the left and right) of the horizontal slide member 840, so the displacement and rotation unit 800 may be downsized to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to take measures. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is placed in a position closer to the front, sufficient horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be ensured, while the game board 13 placed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800 The degree of freedom in arranging components on the back side is reduced.

In this embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, it is particularly useful for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize opening 640 arranged on the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid etc. is likely to be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by configuring the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2 to be movable in the front-back direction by the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to avoid restricting the left-right displacement of the horizontal slide member 840, and to play the game. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13.

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal sliding member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal sliding member 840 by arranging the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 to the front side, and the horizontal sliding member 840 This prevents the displacement from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and in the upper position where the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be placed, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is placed to the rear side, so that the electrical wiring The DK2 is placed towards the back, leaving space in the front. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of members arranged on the game board 13 as a structure such as a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

The state changes of the electrical wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Note that the change in the state of the electrical wiring DK2 here refers to a change in the winding state of the electrical wiring DK2 in a state in which the electrical wiring DK2 is wound around a pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper part (the side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b exclusively extends vertically and is not preferably curved. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)), so the rigidity is lower than that of the portion of the lower winding portion DK2b that undergoes winding displacement. The higher the value, the better.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b, so that the cable tube exhibits a behavior with higher rigidity than the part that is wound and displaced.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is placed between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the direction of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electrical wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840, and the lower The winding portion DK2b is arranged below the wiring arm member 870 so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887.

The upper winding part DK2a of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823, can be displaced in a manner of expanding and contracting in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. It is composed of

The lower winding portion DK2b of the electrical wiring DK2, which is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 887, is displaced in a manner that expands and contracts in the radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In this embodiment, the respective planes intersect at right angles, and the plane where the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 is the first omitted part 824a, the second omitted part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

The displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by the portion of the wiring arm member 870 disposed inside the elongated main body portion 871 being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

From this, in this embodiment, the displacement required for the electrical wiring DK2 due to a change in the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b. Therefore, they will be explained separately below.

First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be explained. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise in front view around the cylindrical protrusion 823 from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and extends from the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point where it is guided to the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be able to be displaced in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as its limit, and is in the standby state where it widens most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(b)). In this case, a wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the horizontal slide member 840 displaces to the left, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 displaces to the left, pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and causing the upper winding to roll outward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protrusion 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, by protruding from the left end of the wiring guide member 844 a guide piece 844a that slopes downward toward the left, the upper winding portion DK2a is directed outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). This allows the upper winding portion DK2a to be properly pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be explained. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from a point hanging downward from the wiring arm member 870 around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 when viewed from the left side (viewed from the left and right outside). This refers to the part that passes through the front side and is wrapped in the forward rotation direction, and extends to the part located in the lower open part 884 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be movable in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and is in the production standby state where it is widest in the radial direction (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load (or at a position where there is a slight gap). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 in the performance standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is upwardly displaced as the vertical slide member 820 is upwardly displaced from the performance standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upwardly, and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upwardly. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is supplemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b radially inward about the cylindrical protrusion portion 887. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, thereby pushing the lower winding part DK2b and moving it downward in the radial direction around the cylindrical protruding part 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in an inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, the lower winding part DK2b is formed between the cylindrical protrusion 887 and the wall 882a (the cylindrical The lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the lower end position of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. This makes it possible to avoid the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840. (see) can be displaced using the front and back width to its full extent.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a large space below the wiring arm member 870 in which the lower winding part DK2b can be accommodated, so the length of the lower winding part DK2b can be made sufficiently long, and The allowable amount of vertical displacement can be increased.

FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of channels made of a resin member and opened on the front side. The ball flow lower unit 150 is formed in a path shape and is disposed at the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60.

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed to be able to receive the ball that has flown down the lower end LB1 of the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 near the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is an elongated box-shaped member whose front side is open, are fastened and fixed to the fixed plate part 151 from the back side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151. It includes a flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 that protrude inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the ball.

The plurality of protrusions 154 are arranged alternately on the left and right sides with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a ball between the left and right walls. Thereby, the flow of the ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 can be slowed down.

The functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be explained. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have the function of guiding the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 to a ball ejection channel (not shown). It has a function of improving the presentation effect by making the subsequent game ball visible to the player. In addition, in the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to immediately execute the payout of the prize ball and display the hold on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easier to notice a situation where a payout is not being made due to a problem on the gaming machine parlor side.

In addition, as explained below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second prize opening 640 by visually confirming the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1, so the position of the detection sensor is changed to the downstream of the intermediate flow path LM1, etc. The timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of displaying the hold may be delayed.

The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is passed through an intermediate flow path LM1 (see FIG. (see 27).

Like the guide channel DL1, the intermediate channel LM1 is formed to be able to guide the ball vertically downward while displacing the ball in a zigzag pattern from side to side. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to have the same flowing manner, the ball on the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game. Even if the ball is visually recognized, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information about which flow path the ball is flowing down during the right-handed game is information that is directly linked to the player's profit, and the information about which channel the ball is flowing down is information that is directly connected to the player's profit. This is a part where individual differences occur among pachinko machines 10 depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the flesh part of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and the ball collides with this position before passing through the through gate 67, or the ball collides with this position before entering the second winning hole 640. Since nails are installed that can cause balls to collide with each other, it is determined for each pachinko machine whether the balls are likely to flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during right-handed games. different.

During the probability change or time saving period when playing a right-handed game, the ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 flows down the guide route DL1, unless it enters the general winning hole 63 located on the downstream side. The ball passes through the out port 71 and is ejected from the game area, and does not benefit the player (it becomes a wasted ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. The reason why the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when paying attention to the guide route DL1 than when paying attention only to the second winning opening 640 is because the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency with which the ball flows down the guide route DL1, calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of occurrence of wasted balls in right-handed games, etc. It is expected that players will take this into consideration when deciding whether to continue playing the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 and the ball entering the second prize opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate channel LM1. Thereby, it can be made to seem as if the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning port 640 and has been discharged from the gaming area, so it flows vertically downward and reaches the specific winning port 65a when viewed from the front. If the ball flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it will be difficult to distinguish it from the ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, and there is a possibility that the game will be hindered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible for the ball to reach a position where it overlaps with the specific winning opening 65a in front view. (See Figure 2). This makes it easy to distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning port 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning port 640 and cannot enter the specific winning port 65a. .

The first receiving channel 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, and passes through the display area. Let the ball flow down towards the left and right center position. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81, the player is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81. , it is possible to make a player who is not paying attention to the right-handed ball path aware of whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640.

This allows the player to recognize whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving his/her field of view while keeping his/her attention on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where an important display is executed when the player looks away from the third symbol display device 81 for looking at the second winning hole 640, and the player misses the display, thereby making the game more comfortable. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 flows diagonally downward to the left on the right side of the first prize opening 64 when viewed from the front. Since this ball is decelerated by the protrusion portion 154, the residence time of the falling ball can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls that are visible in the game area when viewed from the front.

In addition, by ensuring a long left-right width of the downward flow path of the ball, the line of sight directed toward the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the downward flow path of the second receiving channel member 153 can easily intersect. Thereby, the ball flowing down inside the second receiving channel member 153 can easily enter the player's field of view.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, light guide plate presentation means 160, and decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the light guide plate presentation means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to come into contact with the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 is made of an opaque resin material and aligns the light guide plate 161, and an upper support member 162 is made of a light transmissive resin material and is attached to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and formed of a light-transparent resin material and constitutes a spherical flow path; A plurality of left and right side support members 165 are formed from a resin material and are configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a manner that presses both left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side, and an upper support member formed in a left and right elongated shape A horizontal board unit 166 is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 while passing over the upper side of the member 162 and extending to the front side of the center frame 86. A vertically placed board unit 167 is arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decorative means 170 includes a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transmissive resin material and arranged at the center left and right near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a first decorative member 171 made of a light-transparent resin material and arranged at the left side of the first decorative member 171. , a second decorative member 174 is disposed on the front side of the left side frame of the center frame 86; A third decorative member 177 is provided.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular center decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to the center thereof, and a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin for a title or the like representing the pachinko machine 10. Equipped with

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally long groove portion 171a recessed in the shape of a horizontally long groove on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows placement of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 of the light guide plate presentation means 160.

The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the front-rear direction in the upper part of the center frame 86. In this embodiment, the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, inside the center frame 86, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161, while the front position of the performance member 700 in the performance standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emitting performance by the performance member 700 in the performance standby state without being blocked by the light guide plate 161.

Referring to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed board unit 166 will be described. FIG. 96 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the horizontally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In addition, in the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back sides of the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is irradiated in the vertical direction along arrows D1a and D1b. On the back side of the first decorative member 171, the light reaching the reflective shaped portions 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a can be visually recognized conspicuously.

As a result, even when the light emitting means are arranged in a concentrated manner on the horizontal substrate unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (the light emitting range or the light emitting shape) that is visually recognized by the player depends on the formation range or the formed shape of the reflective shaped portion 171b. The images can be visually recognized in different ways.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal board unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the lower surface in a row in which the LEDs are arranged on the upper surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows: a corresponding row above and below, and a row parallel to the corresponding row and formed on the back side. Of the rows in which the LEDs serving as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface are arranged inside the horizontally long groove 171a, and the back row on the bottom surface is located outside the horizontally long groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the top surface and the front row on the bottom surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shaped part 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface can illuminate another light emitting target. Light can be irradiated.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface are arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light enters from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166b, such as an LED, arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 is used to illuminate the light guide plate 161.

Note that the upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal board unit 166. Thereby, the light emitted from the two rows of front and rear LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to clearly separate the light that is irradiated onto the display area side and the light that is irradiated onto the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shaped portion 171b, and has a flat front and rear surface. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontal substrate unit 166, strong reflection of the light can be avoided and visibility can be maintained.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specs, so-called different specs). It is configured so that it can be done. By configuring the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing pachinko machines 10 with different performance types, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

The margin member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate is different from the shape formed in the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, a striped groove is used). ) is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shaped portion 171b.

FIG. 97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in range XCVII of FIG. In this embodiment, when the horizontal board unit 166 is irradiated with light in the vertical direction along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shaped portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and becomes glittering. While it is visually recognized brightly, the light that reaches the margin member 173 is not mainly reflected, but is configured so that most of it is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized as slightly dark.

As a result, the shape of the margin member 173 can be seen as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction, so that light can be emitted in an arbitrary shape when viewed from the front. You can make it look like you are there. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if LEDs were arranged on the back side to produce a light-emitting effect.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 that is a thin plate member (sheet-like member) with low transparency colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Thereby, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

As a result, the gaming area formed on the front side of the base board 60 (particularly the left side) and the forming area of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front (including the area that overlaps the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area from being reduced due to the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped parts arranged front and back shifted on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are provided.

Like the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in a space between the part of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. Ru.

Thereby, instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide route DL1, a three-dimensionally visible light effect can be performed. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to perform a luminous effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. The brightness changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating light to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared to the case where light is irradiated toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from a fixedly arranged light emitting means such as an LED, the types of light effects can be easily increased.

For example, when the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with light from the left and right directions or the upper and lower directions, the position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front and rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is irradiated with the light when viewed from the front. Which position becomes brighter changes. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated or the back side is illuminated.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as a means for irradiating light from the left and right directions to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a portion of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 out of the light irradiated from the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

Thereby, the degree to which the mode of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display presentation mode of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light emitting device 330 is red, the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is red. This makes it easier to avoid the color of light that a person visually recognizes being purple (a color that is a mixture of blue light and red light). That is, the light seen through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily seen independently of the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150 are configured to be visible when viewed from the front, and all the balls are configured to flow down the same path, but the ball flowing down unit 150 of the second embodiment At 2150, the descending sphere is configured to flow down one of a plurality of paths. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 shows an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after being fired. As shown in FIG. 98, the lower ball flow unit 2150 differs from the lower ball flow unit 150 described in the first embodiment in that it is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 to the left. A third receiving channel 2155 is provided, which is a channel having a size that allows a ball to flow down.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a slope angle set to be gentler than that of the first receiving channel 152, and has an inclined portion 2155a whose lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The speed of the ball flowing down the slope 2155a is slower than the speed of the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallow angle of the slope. The ball flowing down the slope 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the slope 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the slope 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long time.

This allows the ball flowing down the slope 2155a to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, attention to the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without causing any discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be explained. In this embodiment, the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 in the same way, and flows along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D21 or flowing down in the second direction D22 along the third receiving channel 2155.

In this embodiment, the downward flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protruding portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153. Therefore, if the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, that ball will be guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur when, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 consecutively in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually observing the situation in which the balls flow down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning a prize opening 640 in a row.

Note that the mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening/closing plate configured to be able to switch between a state of allowing the ball to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state of restricting it using a driving means such as a solenoid is disposed in the ball flow down unit 2150. Alternatively, an electromagnet capable of generating a magnetic force may be provided at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force may be used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to cause the ball to flow down. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the downward flow path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to make the ball stay or return. Unlike the ball that flows down the gaming area, changing the falling path of the ball that enters the second prize opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so the ball that uses magnetic force as described above does not affect the subsequent game results. It becomes possible to switch the downstream route of the flow.

As described above, when switching the flow path of the ball with a device that uses electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the lottery result based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of cases where the lottery by entering the second prize opening 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the expectation of a jackpot for the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down 2155.

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be drawn to the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which serves as a guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the ejected ball (game It is possible to improve attention to the ball (which has already been ejected from the area).

As mentioned above, the fact that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 is due to the fact that the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640 is high, or the expected value of the jackpot in the lottery due to the ball entering the second winning hole 640. This suggests that the value is high.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in the middle of the ejection part 2155b, and control is performed so that the granular member 320 is ejected when it is determined that the ball has passed. .

As mentioned above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the production standby state (see FIG. 38) to the firing standby state (FIG. 40) in advance. it takes time. On the other hand, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second prize opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b from there. This flow time is used to control the injection device 400 to change its state.

Thereby, the granular member 320 can be controlled to be fired at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay that is expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after the ball enters the second prize opening 640. Compared to the case where the control is performed as follows, it is possible to make it easier to match the timing of the falling ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320.

For example, oil adhering to the ball may adhere to the first receiving channel 152, causing a drop in the flow speed of the ball, and in this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be ejected before the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155, which may reduce the performance effect.

In contrast, by controlling the granular member 320 to fire at the same time that the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed, the player can wait until the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving channel 2155, it is possible to improve the performance effect of a series of performances in which a powerful performance that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 is performed by firing the granular members 320. can.

Note that the arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) that is visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. The above-mentioned sequence of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his/her line of sight.

Note that control may also be combined in which the granular member 320 is not ejected when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a jackpot occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed so that the probability of the above-mentioned variable jackpot is increased.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of performances after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, the player who receives the ball from the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage where the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can avoid a decline in attention span.

In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, attention to the subsequent display performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Note that a detection sensor having the same function as the detection sensor SC21 may be placed at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passing timing of the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player is more advantageous when the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be symmetrically and discretely enlarged/reduced in the radial direction, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, , is configured to be able to form sections that are not bilaterally symmetrical in the radial expansion/contraction displacement. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference between the enlargement/reduction unit 3600 and the first embodiment is only in the production member 3700, and the main body member 601, front cover member 610, upper arm member 620, lower arm member 630, and transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the presentation member 3700 is placed at a midway position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is similar to the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, two on the lower side and one on the upper left While the sheets are radially enlarged with the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in a clustered arrangement state (not enlarged in the radial direction). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be explained.

FIG. 100 is a front view of rotary plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733.

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 in place of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 when viewed from the front. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-mentioned small-diameter circular arc portion 733a, large-diameter circular arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large-diameter circular arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connecting portion with the large diameter circular arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large diameter circular arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacently provided in the clockwise direction or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to rapidly approach the small diameter circular arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the assembled arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c The telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the large diameter arc portion 733b does not expand in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to cause a shift in the arrangement of the shielding design member 760. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 99, by arranging the shielding design member 760 asymmetrically, the center of gravity of the presentation member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 disposed at the upper right position remains in the grouped arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 shifts to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, the production member 3700 is subjected to a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front due to its own weight. This load can cause the presentation member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis, so that the shielding design member 760 can be changed in the radial direction around the rotational axis of the presentation member 3700 and in the rotational direction. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, the direction (i.e., , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and other than that, the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same, and the small diameter circular arc portion 733a and the large diameter circular arc portion 733c are different from each other. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 shifts in the state shown in FIG. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal and vertical center positions of the presentation member 3700. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained shifted, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems.

An example of a performance using this return of the center of gravity G31 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the production member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately, but the purpose of this is to avoid collision with other components. .

In this embodiment, measures are taken to avoid collisions with other components, and the effect member 3700 is controlled to be able to be vertically displaced and radially displaced at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to expand and displace the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction while moving the presentation member 3700 downward.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the presentation member 3700 and the radial expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the presentation member 3700 returns, so that the presentation member 3700 is It is possible to cause a posture change in the opposite direction to the rotation direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) assumed from the state.

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radial expansion and displacement of the presentation member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction can be achieved. However, as a result, it is possible to create a complex movement that also includes displacement in the rotational direction. Thereby, the presentation effect of the presentation member 3700 can be improved.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the performance standby state, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480, is completed before the translation member 410 is displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but rather shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed before the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, the downward displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started with the lid member 480 placed at the displacement end position on the retracting side, so that the player's line of sight is not obstructed by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member due to the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12(a) and FIG. 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the linear member 410 between the angle of 66 degrees and the angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (minorly displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, so when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are upwardly displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, making control easier.

In addition, in this mode in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) applied to the torsion spring SP2 is reduced compared to the case where the lid member 480 is also displaced. I can do it.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibrations may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. This makes it possible to avoid loading other vibration devices when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the production standby state, but in the fifth embodiment, After the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the abutment member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes over time in the arrangement of a projection 432 and the arrangement of a cylindrical protrusion 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of each configuration, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement changes occur. Further, a change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to a change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is launched, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see around the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least a portion of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained therein. Although it is possible that the rotation of the lid member 480 is inhibited by the granular member 320 colliding with the lid member 480, in this embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft side. Thereby, rotation of the lid member 480 can be made less likely to be inhibited.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven in the forward rotation direction with the granular member 320 placed on the lid member 480, the granular member 320 will collide as the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracting side (the small diameter side in FIG. 102). It falls onto member 420.

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is broken, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the translation member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the driving motor MT1 is set at high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, at the time of firing, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left and right center portions where the overhanging portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left and right direction is prevented. You can make it visible so that it becomes the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed depending on the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and the ejection mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the reverse direction. Thereby, it is possible to provide variation in the firing direction of the granular member 320, and it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are provided with a flat substrate and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction. An illumination board is provided on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are arranged in a bent manner. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 is a sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 2. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operating unit 500 is omitted. Further, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, in addition to the illumination board 332, the first light irradiation device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the illumination board 332, and a rear end close to the front end of the illumination board 332. A second illumination board 6334 is provided that is tilted away from 332.

The second illumination board 6334 includes light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the front side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light toward the partitioning member 310, and it is possible to improve the production effect of lighting up the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310.

In addition to the illumination board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is arranged in an inclined manner such that its back end is close to the back end of the illumination board 342 and its front end is away from the illumination board 342. A second illumination board 6344 is provided.

The second illumination board 6344 includes a light emitting means such as an LED that is arranged to be able to emit light from at least the back side. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700, displacement rotation unit 800, etc. of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged on the back side of the firing unit 6300, and the effect of the light emission effect can be improved.

Note that the arrangement of the illumination board is not limited to this. For example, only the second illumination substrates 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the illumination substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, or the light emitting means may be configured to be able to emit light from both sides.

Furthermore, for the purpose of obliquely directing the direction of light irradiation, a device that can change the orientation of the light emitting means may be constructed without increasing the number of illumination boards. Further, a light emitting means may be arranged at the intersection of the illumination substrates 332, 342 and the second illumination substrates 6334, 6344, so as to be able to emit light.

A substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, the schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. , FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

Note that arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction of the substrate box A100. Note that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and a box cover A200 and box base A300 that are connected in an unopenable manner (caulked structure). a box cover A200 connected by the sealing unit A400 and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end of the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400, and a main controller. A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and is a shaft that supports the board box A100 (box cover A200) in the short direction (arrows U, D). direction) and is formed as an axis perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

In addition, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the rotation axis A410 is located at one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall part A220 across the covering part A270, which will be described later); R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) opposite to one longitudinal side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main control device A110. Note that the main control device A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other explanations will be omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary pushbutton that is operated (turned on) when the operating section A122 is pushed in from the initial position and turned off when the push is released (the operating section A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main controller A110. Note that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on), and based on the click feeling, the main control is activated. The operator can detect the completion of input to the device A110. Therefore, this is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the key A140 inserted in the off position is rotated (clockwise in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on" position). A key-operated selector switch (mode It is configured as a changeover switch).

Note that in this embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Furthermore, in the off position of the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed, while in the on position, the key A140 cannot be removed.

Furthermore, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched depending on the on/off state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes RAM erasure), and When A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the winning probability value in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as described later. .

Here, as described above, since the board box A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, switch device A120 and key device A130), In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box A100, which is time-consuming.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and the effort can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121, A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pushing direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the protruding portions on the back side are soldered, whereby the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is arranged on the front side of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force (for example, a force that displaces the operating part A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction)) is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R. When a force in a parallel direction is applied and the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tilted, the legs on one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and key device A130 A tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, while a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come off from the holes, and the solder may peel off, which may lead to disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 employs means to solve this problem. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Note that since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the operator can visually check the display on the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, with the power of the pachinko machine A10 turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the on position, and while pushing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120 to the operating position, the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. Turn on the power. This activates the setting change mode, and the settings are changed each time the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In this embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are defined as the set value, and these values are cycled (for example, by pressing the operation part A122, the set value changes from the first value to the sixth value). 6, and when the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating section A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device 81 is a liquid crystal display (display device). The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

Note that the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Examples of other information include the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous setting values, and the like. In this way, by using the third symbol display device 81, the amount of information that can be displayed can be ensured (larger) than, for example, when using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operating state, and it is possible to improve operability and suppress operational errors. Further, by using the device (third symbol display device 81) that displays information regarding the game also, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting change mode (setting values are finalized). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Note that after changing the desired setting value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, leaving it in the ON position). However, also by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 of the key device A130 placed in the off position, the normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is activated.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing RAM erasure include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed in the off position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pressing the operation part A122 of the switch device A120), the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (with the key A140 still in the on position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is turned off. When the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the pachinko machine A10 placed in the off position, it will not start up in the normal mode and will be in an error state, and an error display will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third symbol display device 81, or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to check the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 to the on position, and then turn off the power to the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. As a result, a setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may be in a form in which they are not displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the off position. This ends the setting confirmation mode. Further, the off-edge of the key device A130 is detected, and upon this detection, a power restoration process is executed, and the normal mode is activated with the setting value set at that time.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, you can also turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10 and turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10 with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 placed in the off position. Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the setting value change in the setting change mode is completed (determined), a 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. An example of the predetermined mode is a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals.

In addition, the 7-segment display can display 4 digits by arranging 4 pieces in parallel, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (2 pieces) (for example, "01" in the setting change mode) However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02" is displayed, and the sixth value is "06".)

Next, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a front wall portion A201 extending from the four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and lower wall portion A203) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, each of these wall portions A201 to A205 is formed into a box shape with an open back side. Note that the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A two-step difference is formed on the standing end surfaces (the surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The step is formed by forming a first surface (first step) on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and forming a second surface on the outer side of the first surface (opposite to the inner space). A surface (first stage) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height from the front wall A201 is smaller) and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as "seat surface A206"). ).

The seat surface A206 is formed into a generally rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, with the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 being continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. A fastening hole A206a with a female screw threaded on the inner periphery is formed in four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of each wall portion A201 to A205 are connected). be done.

Therefore, the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) brings the outer edge side of the front side into contact with the seat surface A206, and inserts the screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, and is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201, and is fastened to the board box A100. It will be stored.

A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engagement piece A207 has a base that stands upright from the upper wall A202 and the lower wall A203 toward the back side (arrow B direction), and extends in one direction (arrow R direction) from the erected tip of the base. It is formed into a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as described later.

A portion of the front wall A201 is recessed toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall A210 that is located backward from the front wall A201 (towards the main controller 110), and each side of the operation wall A210 is connected to the front wall. The front wall portion A201 is formed by plate-shaped wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 is located in a first area formed by the front wall part A201 and on a side closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall part A210 is a part that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front (the length in the arrows L and R directions is the same as the length in the arrows U and D directions). It is formed into a rectangular shape with elongated dimensions, and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the longitudinal center of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 to the front wall portion A201, and connects the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed so as to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction closer to the main control device A110. Therefore, a space can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall part A220, which is connected to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210, and the first connection wall part A220 and The space as a whole (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded by combining the space on the front side of the operation wall A210.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall part A220 with respect to the front wall part A201 and the operation wall part A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to both expand the space on the front side of the operation wall A210 (in the direction of arrow F) and secure the space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall A230 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the transverse direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall A240 connects one side of the operation wall A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow R These are wall portions that connect one side of each side (direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for protruding the operation part A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and a main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are respectively formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the operation section A122 (approximately square when viewed from the front in this embodiment), and is approximately square in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R direction) of the operation wall section A210. placed in the center. A guide wall A251 is erected around the opening A250 from the front (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B), and also guides the displacement in the direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a part for regulating the fall (falling down), and is formed in the shape of a substantially square frame in front view surrounding the opening A250, and its inner circumferential surface is formed to be smoothly connected to the inner circumferential surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). The dimensions are set such that the tip is at a lower position (the tip of the operating portion A122 protrudes further outward (in the direction of arrow F) than the erected tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the push-in operation of the operating portion A122 from being obstructed by the guide wall A251, and it is possible to improve the operability of the operating portion A122.

However, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the guide wall A251 is higher than the tip of the operation section A122 pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on). It is also possible to set the dimensions to a position where the tip of the operating portion A122 is recessed inward (in the direction of arrow B) from the erected tip of the guide wall A251. This can prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed into the operating position (turning on) due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with other members.

In addition, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is such that the tip of the operation portion A122 that has been pushed to the operating position (position to be turned on) is approximately the same as the tip of the operation portion A210 from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set so that the height positions are the same. When pushing in the operating part A122, the operator's fingers come into contact with the upright tip of the guide wall A251, so the operator can recognize that the operating part A122 has been pushed to the operating position based on this contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 is provided on the operation wall portion A210 so as to protrude from its front surface (outer surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow F). The covering part A270 is a part that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape that stands up from the operation wall part A210. It mainly includes a portion A271 and a plate-shaped end wall portion A272 that closes the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 (forms an end surface), and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is stored in the internal space. Ru.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape with a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions that protrude outward in the radial direction from two opposing locations on the base portion A271a (positions having a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). A part A271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (direction of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall A210 has a shape that is approximately the same as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall A271 (base A271a and protrusion A271b) (i.e., a shape in which two opposing portions of the circle protrude outward in the radial direction). An opening is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the protruding tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed into a plate shape (cantilever beam) whose base end is fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and whose one end (opening A260 side) is free.

Here, the opening A260 is formed only in an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the area necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees to allow displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and a first sector-shaped opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portions (on one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and having a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). and a square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The square portions A272b are disposed in a posture that tapers radially inward when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and are formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the rotation center and a radius of rotation of a portion of the portion on the other side of the rotation center of different dimensions. Therefore, in the opening A260, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening have different sizes (radii).

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. These first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 are protrusions that extend in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and One end of the protrusion A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions where the phases are different by approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are formed respectively. The display section is a section that shows information about the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed in the off position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key A140 with its edge facing toward one end of the second protrusion A212 is placed in the off position. A140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed in series (in one row) (arranged in parallel) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Upright walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall section A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed into a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are arranged to face each other with the opening A250 in between, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A282 on one side and to the third erected wall A283 on the other side.

Further, the standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by each of these standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (Fig. 110 (see (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first standing wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connecting wall A230, and is formed into a plate shape that is substantially parallel to each of the second connecting wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 in between, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A291.

The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are connected to the first standing wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall A203 on the other side, respectively. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. Further, the fourth erected wall A284 is connected to the second erected wall A292 on one side and to the third erected wall A293 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 is formed in a size that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 (at a position outward from the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (arc) of the protrusion A271b on the peripheral wall A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surface (straight line) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall A203, respectively.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 are the The standing heights from the surface) are the same, and the end surfaces (faces in the direction of arrow B) of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the same as the seating surface A206. placed at the same height.

Therefore, in the standing walls A280, A290, the standing end surfaces of the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 are connected to the seating surface A206, and the standing walls A280, A290 are connected to the seating surface A206 and each of the standing walls A281, A293. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (forming the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206), the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls The erected end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimension (arrow U, D direction dimension) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is different from the length dimension (arrow L, direction dimension) of the first standing wall A281. R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280 (second standing wall A282 and third standing wall A283), the second standing wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opposing sides of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, by arranging the fourth erected wall A284 in a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume near the fourth erected wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of parts where the plate thickness is large, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects may occur in areas where the plate thickness is partially large and in the vicinity. bring about

On the other hand, the height of the fourth wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the heights of the first wall A281, the second wall A282, and the third wall A283. As a result, while ensuring the function of suppressing deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, the material volume near the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced, resulting in molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as will be described later, when the switch device A120 is tilted in the direction of the arrow D, the switch The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth erected wall A284, and its tilting can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than when it is brought into contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

The inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290 have a mark on the standing tip side (arrow B Taper surfaces A280a and A290a, which are sloped surfaces that approach the outer surface side as one goes in the direction (direction), are formed, respectively. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the erected tip of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is gradually reduced toward the erected tip side, and each erected wall A281 , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are made smaller in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are applied to the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the side of the standing ends of the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

An erected wall A208 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the front wall portion A201. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned upright walls A280 and A290, an upright wall A209 is erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in the shape of a box that connects plate-like bodies on four sides and is open on the side opposite to the front wall part A201. 4)). Further, the standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). is formed at a position corresponding to . Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects, respectively, are such that the height position of the erected end surface of one or more erected walls is higher than that of the remaining erected walls. The height position is set to be different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, it is spaced apart from the printed circuit board A119). ). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), Compared to the erected wall A209, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 can be more easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to ensure that the standing wall surrounding the highly important object is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in the shape of a substantially horizontally rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a rear wall portion A301 that stands upright from the four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It mainly includes wall parts (an upper wall part A302, a lower wall part A303, a left wall part A304 and a right wall part A305 that connect the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303) that are provided and formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. Note that the box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

A plurality of engaged parts A307 are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals on the upper wall part A302 and the lower wall part A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (in the direction of arrow D).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, a phase is set on the side opposite to the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 (in the direction of arrow L) by the length of the extending portion. The boxes are made to face each other in shifted positions, and the box cover A200 is pushed toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the space between the adjacent engaged parts A307, so that the box cover A200 is moved relative to the box base A300 in the extending direction ( slide in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters into the back side (in the direction of the arrow B) of the engaged part A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the direction of the arrow F is restricted).

Next, the main controller A110 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. 112(a) is a front perspective view of the main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller A110, and FIG. 113 is a main controller in portion CXIII of FIG. 112(a). FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110.

114(a) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of the main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, only the main components of the various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and illustrations of other components are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistor, capacitor, transistor) mounted on a board made of insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting these electronic components is made of conductive material such as copper foil. The insertion hole A112 is formed at four corners.

The printed circuit board A119 is attached to the board box A100 with the front side (the side on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the side in the direction of arrow F) facing the back side of the box cover A200 (front wall part A201). will be stored in.

In this case, at least areas AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 are in contact with the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114). (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In addition, in FIG. 114(a), only a portion of the area where the seat surface A206 comes into contact that is connected to the upright walls A280 and A290 is illustrated.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operating portion A122 so as to be able to be displaced (pushed), and a coil spring (disposed inside the main body A123) that applies a biasing force to return the operating portion A122 to the initial position. (biasing means (not shown)), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operating part A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Be prepared.

The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A123a, The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 face each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the part protruding from the bottom surface of the base A123a (part of the bottom surface of the base A123a, and the part from which the leg A121 protrudes) is abutted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a from which the legs A121 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Moreover, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall A210 may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a of the main body A123, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 includes a cylinder part A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a compatible key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder part A132 is arranged inside. A contact point whose contact is switched depending on the state of the main body A133 that holds the main body A133, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point thereof.

The main body A133 has a base A133a that is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder part A132 on its inner peripheral side (inside), and two locations on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). ), and an end portion A133c that forms an end surface on the tip side (in the direction of arrow F) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 from which the legs A131 protrude) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (on the arrow B direction side) from the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. An opening that is circular in front view is formed in the end portion A133c at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner tube A132a) through this opening. .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the front end side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering part A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is It is formed in a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270, so that the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is placed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

In addition, in this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that it may be configured such that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 are in contact with each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a of the main body A133, and are inserted into the holes opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side, as described above. The protruding part on the back side is soldered. Thereby, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 has a base portion A134a that has an opening formed approximately in the center and through which the main body A133 (base portion A133a and protrusion portion A133b) is inserted, and a base portion A134a that extends from two opposing sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. It is equipped with a pair of extending portions A134b that extend and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c that extend from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. is formed.

The extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a is made larger than the extension length of the reinforcement part A134c from the base part A134a, and the extension end surface of the extension part A134b (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is provided to protrude from the extending end surface of the extending portion A134b. The support body A134 is disposed on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and becomes independent by inserting the leg A134b1 into a hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 from the front side and soldering the portion protruding to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

Note that a gap may be provided between the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the extension part A134b and the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support body A134 may be raised and disposed from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be improved by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length of the extension part A134b from the base part A134a and the extension length from the reinforcement part A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to abut against the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and it is possible to more firmly prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Further, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

In addition, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape bent in a substantially dogleg shape or a substantially S-shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 while being elastically deformed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since soldering can be omitted, manufacturing costs can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement with the hole of the leg A134b1, the leg A134b1 may also be configured to be soldered. It is possible to more firmly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support body A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimension in the direction of arrows L and B, dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 114(b)) set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the plate-like body constituting the support body A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1 The hole in the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased, and when the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extension portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be approximately the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on two opposing sides of the support body A134, it is possible to restrict bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. This increases the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole and enhances the function of supporting the main body A133, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more firmly regulated (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the OFF position, and FIG. 115(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 when the key A140 is operated to the ON position. FIG. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 in FIG. It is a partially enlarged side view of board box A100 as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIb.

FIG. 117(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in a).

FIG. 119(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of box A100.

In addition, in FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and make it easier to understand, the internal structure is not shown and the cross section is given a single hatch to schematically illustrate the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in the end wall portion A272 that forms the tip end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be seen by a person committing fraud due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire directly into the opening A260, insert the tip of the foreign object such as a wire into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method is performed in which the opening A260 is reached by sliding on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion A210).

On the other hand, since the covering part A270 protrudes from the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210, if the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front (outer surface) of the operation wall A210. , the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering section A270 (the outer circumferential surface of the peripheral wall section A271) to stop further advancement (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main controller A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, and the peripheral wall A271 The path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the path formed by the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c) is bent. A wall against which the tip of the foreign object abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support body A134 (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). (horizontal dimension).

Thereby, the upper surface of the support body A134 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b hits, that is, the support body A134) Upper surface.In addition, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the support body A134, the inner surfaces of each standing wall A291, A292, A293 and the lower wall portion A203) are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protrusion A271b is formed in the peripheral wall A271 of the covering part A270, a protrusion A133b is formed in the main body A133, and the base A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

This allows the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R) to face the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of arrows L and R). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall A271, the base A133a, and the protrusion A133b) The wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) (i.e., the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface in the direction of arrow F) can be made to face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of arrow B). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (between the guide wall A251, the operation wall A210, the operation section A122, and the protrusion A123b) A wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall that the tip of a foreign object such as a wire that passes through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operating part A122 hits), i.e., The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.Also, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction has been changed by hitting the upper surface of the protrusion A123b, the inner surface of each standing wall A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall A203) is used as a route. can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the main control device A110 due to an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip side (one end side, the side in the direction of arrow F) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

This allows the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 to face each other in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, so that tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated).

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

An end wall portion A272 is formed at the protruding tip (on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the covering portion A270, and this end wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and tampering with the main control device A110.

In particular, in the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, square portions A272b extend radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the protruding distal end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the covering part A270 is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140), and the protruding end surface of the covering part A270 is open. All other regions of the tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) serve as the end wall portion A272. Therefore, the area of the opening A260 can be minimized, making it difficult for foreign objects such as wire to be inserted into the opening A260. Furthermore, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire will pass through. It can be difficult to do.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 have an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed and combined), the end wall part A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of square parts A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular part A272a. It is formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever beam whose base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) is free). Since it is formed in a shape of 1.5 mm, the shape can be simplified and its moldability can be ensured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall part A271 is formed in the covering part A270, and the end wall part A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the protruding tip side (direction of arrow F) of the peripheral wall part A271 is the opening A260. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction thereof, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be brought into contact. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, the tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and damage to the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) are made to face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, due to an operator's careless or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R) is turned into the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b (the surface in the direction of the arrows L and R). ), the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130 can be restricted.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and to prevent the key device A130 (leg A131) from being disconnected or having poor contact.

Here, for example, the operation section A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 may be carelessly or violently operated by the operator, or the operation section A122 may Or, due to a collision of another member with the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in the pushing direction or a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to the plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). If the switch device A120, key device A130, or key A140 is actuated, there is a risk that the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 will be tilted, and the box cover A200 (especially the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erecting walls A280 and A290 are arranged such that their erecting end surfaces ( 117(a) and 117(b)).

As a result, in addition to improving the rigidity of the operation wall A210 due to the upright walls A280 and A290 (functioning as ribs), this also improves the rigidity of the operation wall A210 and the covering section A270 (deformation prevention The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means). As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated). That is, the portion that comes into contact with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 to suppress its tilting is shared not only with the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is accordingly reduced. Can be dispersed. Also from this point of view, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of the foreign object such as a wire (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, the area AS1 where the upright end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F) come into contact. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, a path for foreign matter such as wire to enter the inside of the board box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the erected walls A280 and A290. In other words, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250, A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, its progress outside the space surrounded by the standing walls A280, A290 and the lower wall A203 is restricted. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Further, the standing walls A280, A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls A280, A290 are erected (functioning as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 be further improved by doing so, but also the rigidity of the operation wall part A210 can be further improved by Even if an external force is applied in any direction within the plane including the above-described structure, the function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270 can be reliably exerted. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (particularly the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the first standing wall A291 is arranged in an attitude that is perpendicular to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and The third erected wall A293 is arranged so as to be perpendicular to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the erected wall A290 can efficiently function as a support section (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall section A210 and the covering section A270.

That is, when an external force in the direction of arrows U and D or the direction of arrows L and R is applied to the key A140 among the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R, the standing wall While the load that A290 receives (the load capacity that the standing wall A290 should exert as a support part) is maximum, an external force is applied in a direction that is inclined by a predetermined angle with respect to the directions of arrows U and D or the directions of arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the external force will escape due to the rotation, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 will act as a support part) will be increased. load capacity) will be lower. As a result, by arranging the attitude of the erected wall A290 as described above, the erected wall A290 can efficiently perform its function as a support part (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270. be able to.

The standing walls A280, A290 (second standing walls A282, A292 and third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall part A203, so using the rigidity of the box cover A200, the standing walls The rigidity of A280, A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the box cover A200 as a whole can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall A210 and the lower wall A203 via the standing walls A280, A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as supporting parts (deformation suppressing means) that support the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which the electronic components are connected by soldering is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the surface of the printed circuit board A119 is the side facing the box base A300 (the side opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the areas AS1 and AS2 where the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abuts (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and such area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surface in the direction of arrow B) are made to easily come into close contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and the upright walls A280 and A290 are It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 collide.

The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 have tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the standing tips The area of the surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). Thereby, the surface pressure on the upright end surface that is brought into contact with the printed circuit board A119 can be increased, and it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the upright ends of the upright walls A280 and A290 (the surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), so that the moldability is improved. At the same time, insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the inside of the board box A100 can be suppressed.

That is, by reducing the area of the erected end surfaces by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a, A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the erected ends (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the erected walls A280, A290 is changed. The fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured by making the change gradual. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 come into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. (See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between (intrude between) the front end surfaces of the upright walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the inside of the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are protrudingly provided on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210. One end of these first protrusions A211 and second protrusions A212 is connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (base A271a or protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115(a) and FIG. 115( b)).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of each protrusion A211, 222 is used to further prevent the switch device A120 or the key device A130 from tilting. This can be reliably suppressed, and damage to the covering portion A270 can also be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210, there is a display section at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are respectively formed. Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as an instruction line for pointing to a position corresponding to predetermined information displayed on the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the off position. (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)), and one end of the second protrusion A212 is located at the same phase position as the narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A270 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer circumferential surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, causing the key A140 to cover the end surface in the direction of arrow U (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers) on the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). ), the first protrusion A211 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the first protrusion A211 is in the on position. When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in the direction (in the direction of the arrow L) in which the end face on the arrow L direction abuts against the covering part A270 (end face wall part A272), The second protrusion A212 is located on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted due to the action of an external force, the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface to be gripped by fingers) receives a load (the end surface of the key A140 comes into contact with the end surface of the key A140). (portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

Note that the second connection wall portion A230 can suppress the external force acting on the key A140 in the off position in the opposite direction to the case described above (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a). ), the first connection wall A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the opposite direction to the above case (force to displace the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) on the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115). (see (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall A210 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (no connection wall is formed). Further, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key device A130 The distance to the connection wall A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, and the key A140 may be moved by the arrow D. An external force that causes a displacement in the direction or in the direction of arrow L is likely to be applied. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side that suppresses the tilting of the key device A130 against such external force (the side that receives it), material costs can be reduced and rigidity can be ensured. It can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are disposed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (the outer edge, the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. With respect to the key A140, which has a longer (larger) length dimension and is in the off position, the square part A272b on the side far from the first connection wall part A220 (opposite side across the key A140) is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the side (outer edge) is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the length of the square part A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by fingers) of the key A140 in the on position. is shortened (smaller), and the rectangular portion A272b located on the side far from the first connection wall portion A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A240 side, the hand or other structure of the worker located on the side of these spaces may collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to collide with the key A140. According to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 on which the external force is applied in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is likely to be applied. Since the length dimension (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, by suppressing the surface pressure, damage to the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

The front outer surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the board box A100 includes a first area formed by the front wall A201 and an operation wall located closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. and a second region formed by the portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201) of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall part A220, second connection wall part A230, and third connection wall part A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (first region), it is possible to make the distance to the openings A250 and A260 longer for those who commit fraud, and The openings A250 and A260 can be made difficult to visually recognize, making it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Here, considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (inner space )). On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far away from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, operability will deteriorate.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily ensured, and as described above, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A100 from A260. However, when operating the switch device A120 or the key device A130, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) must be removed. The hands of the operator (operator) interfere with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downward inclination) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 to the operation wall A210. The space on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

When viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L, R) that extends in the other direction (arrows U, D) orthogonal to the one direction. 115(a) and 115(b)).

The key device A130 is arranged so that the key A140 in the off position is in the other direction (direction of arrows U and D) described above (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the OFF position has the surface gripped by fingers facing the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the OFF position when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is in a posture along the lateral direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

Thereby, a space can be secured on the side where the surface of the key A140 in the OFF position that is held by the fingers is desired (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115(a)). Therefore, when inserting the key A140 into or pulling it out from the key device A130, the fingers (e.g., thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 touch the step (first connection wall) connecting the first region and the second region. It is possible to suppress interference with the portion A220, the second connecting wall portion A230, and the third connecting wall portion A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (on the first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region), as described above. As the first connecting wall portion A220 is formed with a downward slope, when the key A140 is held and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, or vice versa), the key A140 is rotated downwardly. It is possible to prevent fingers different from the gripping hand from interfering with the step connecting the first region and the second region (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240). As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

For example, when grasping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall part A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connecting wall portion A220.

In addition, when holding the key A140 in the on position with the index finger and thumb, the operation wall A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A130 is used for operation with the little finger or ring finger. By locating the wall portion A210 (second region) on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction, the space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 is used for arrangement. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the OFF position to the ON position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In addition, in the switch device A120, the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating part A122 in the initial position is the same as that of the protruding part of the covering part A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position (standing height from the operation wall A210) of the tip end surface (the front surface of the end wall A272, the surface in the direction of arrow F). Therefore, interference between the operating portion A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (a first connection wall A220 and a third connection wall A connection surface (second connection wall A230) is formed on one side in the width direction (arrow U direction side), and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on the other side in the width direction (arrow D direction side). It is assumed that the connecting surface is not formed.

Thereby, the other side of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the lateral direction (the side in the direction of arrow D) can be opened. That is, this opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the outside space. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with fingers and operating it (inserting it into the key device A130, pulling it out from the key device A130, rotating it from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Utilize the space (external space) connected to the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger, ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). I can do it. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

Here, as described above, considering the heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the distance between the board box A100 and the main controller A110 (for example, the distance between the front of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) distance (internal space)).

In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first region) and the operation wall A210 (second region) In this case, the first connecting wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connecting wall portion A230 and the third connecting wall portion A240 are connected to the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially perpendicular to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward, interference with fingers is suppressed and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connecting wall A230 and the third connecting wall A240 are tilted downward. By not tilting (by making only the first connection wall portion A220 tilt downward), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 to accommodate heat dissipation from the main control device A110.

In this way, even if only the first connecting wall part A220 was tilted downward and the others (second connecting wall part A230 and third connecting wall part A240) were not tilted, interference with fingers could be suppressed. The operation wall A210 (second region) has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the operation wall A210 (second region) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region). ), the key device A130 is arranged in close proximity to the key device A130.

In addition, by forming the third connection wall part A240 on the other longitudinal side (the opposite side to the first connection wall part A220) of the operation wall part A210 (second region), the third connection wall part A240 The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 during manufacturing can be prevented from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Note that in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand, some of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main control device A110) are omitted, and Only the main components are shown with reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 120, as described above, in the pachinko machine A10, the hinges 18 (rotation shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side in front view. An inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis on the side where the inner frame 12 is provided so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

Here, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side as an axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, if the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees) ), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the board box A100 and opens the switch device A120 and key device in the manner described above (as explained in FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the opening angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, if the opening angle can only be approximately 45 degrees, the opening will cause the outer frame 11 and the inner frame to move into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the board box A100 is arranged such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the direction of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation shaft). 115(a) in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation shaft), and one longitudinal direction (arrow in FIG. 115(a)) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is disposed on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when you insert your hand into the back of the inner frame 12 (the front of the board box A100) from between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second area), The thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb are connected to the key device by forming the space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (i.e., the operation wall portion A210 (second region) into a horizontally long rectangle in front view). A space on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operating wall A210 by locating A130 on one side of the longitudinal center of the operating wall A210 (second region) It can be placed using

With this arrangement, the switch device A120 can be operated (depressed) with the thumb or index finger, and the key device A130 can be operated (pushed) when the key A140 is rotated. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger that grip the key A140, the space secured by tilting the first connecting wall A220 downward can be used. As a result, operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting changes (operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be located closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side as the axis for opening and closing the hinge 18, the board box A100 is further opened to the front side (toward the front side in the paper of FIG. 120) as the rotating shaft A410 is the axis for opening and closing. Also good. This allows the operator to stand in a position facing the front of the board box A100 in a position that does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and to operate the switch device A120 or The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) is connected to various devices (power supply device 115, dispensing control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoids 209, The other ends (connectors) of the electrical connection lines, one end of which is connected to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol retention lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), are respectively connected.

Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a possibility that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of multiple electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be reduced. There is a risk of sexual deterioration.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

Specifically, in this embodiment, at least one end of the electrical connection line (connector) of the plurality of electrical connection lines is connected to the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113, and the other end (connector) is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected, or even if both connections and disconnections are mixed). ), the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. This makes it possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency.

That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 Since the operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are prohibited, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operations of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) to the main control device A110 is secured and fraud can be suppressed, connects other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol holding lamp 84 to main controller A110). By allowing the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 even if the electrical connection line (electrical connection line for ).

That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front side (toward the front side of the paper in FIG. In order for the rotation of the device A110 to be unrestricted), it is necessary to release (unplug) the electrical connections.

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is moved to a predetermined position (switch device After rotating the key device A120 and the key device A130 to a position where they can be easily operated, it is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection wire that was released (unplugged) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110.

In particular, if the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire may be used to disconnect (unplug) the main controller A110. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is time-consuming.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is not necessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main control device A110 at a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, while reducing the labor and work involved in operating (setting changes) the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the entire back surface of the end wall A272 is formed as a flat surface, but in the eighth embodiment, the end wall A2272 is provided with protrusions A2273 protruding from its back surface. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box A2100 along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121(a). It is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). In addition, in FIG. 121(b), only a portion that is viewed in cross section is shown in order to simplify the drawing and make it easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 121, a protrusion A2273 is provided on the end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment so as to protrude from its back surface (inner surface, surface facing in the direction of arrow B). The protrusion A2273 is a part (protrusion) that extends in a strip shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall A2272 (the tip in the protrusion direction that protrudes radially inward from the peripheral wall A271). It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge.

Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposed to) the end part A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, and a range (position facing) along the outer edge of the square part A272b. the range between positions AP1 and AP3 including AP2, and the range between positions AP4 and AP6 including position AP5), and one side across the square part A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall part A271). In this range (range between positions AP1 and AP6), Formed continuously.

The protrusion dimension from the back of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the protrusion A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between position AP3 and position AP4, and from position AP3 to position AP2. It is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes toward the position AP2, and it is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and at the position AP2, it is set to the same value as the position AP3. Similarly, the protrusion dimension is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes from position AP4 to position AP5, and is gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from position AP5 to position AP6, and at position AP6 it becomes the same value as position AP4. Set. Moreover, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

In this way, by providing the protrusion A2273 in a protruding manner on the end wall A2272, the rigidity of the end wall A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R), and as the key device A130 is tilted, a force is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130. , when the key A140 comes into contact with the inner edge of the end wall A2272, damage to the end wall A2272 can be suppressed.

The protrusion A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposed to) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the protrusion A2273 is formed at a position that faces (opposes) the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130. ) can be made smaller to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in this embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protrusion dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 between the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. The value is set to approximately the same value as the facing interval between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion A2273 comes into contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

This eliminates the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133), and prevents foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, so the elastic deformation of the square portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever) with the outer edge free is utilized. As a result, the protrusions A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be firmly brought into close contact with the front surface of key device A130 (end part A133c of main body A133). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the back of the end wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). .

Moreover, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is in contact with the front of the end portion A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when inserting the key A140 into the key A140, deformation of the end wall portion A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the base end side (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271) of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of the arrow R) than the center in the longitudinal direction (in the directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) illustrates a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment has a different position in which the operation wall part A210 is formed and an opening A260 (covering part A270, key Although the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (guide wall A251, switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 (in the direction of arrow L) than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the operation wall A210 is Three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connecting wall portion A220, a second connecting wall portion A230, and a third connecting wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering part A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall part A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in this embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the side in the direction of arrow L). That is, the arrangement is opposite to that in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 is the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). position (see FIG. 120), the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and the box cover A3200 (operation wall A210) faces the front side of the Pachinko machine A3010. That is, it is set in a range of approximately 180° to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, since the user can operate while checking the display (information), it is possible to easily understand the operating states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, they can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (i.e., in a position that is difficult to see from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud cannot be carried out. (Unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) can be suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are arranged in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the substrate box A3100 assumes a desired posture (in this embodiment, a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel). In addition, it is preferable that the angle between the front of the operation wall part A210 and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

That is, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as wrapping one's hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 or the key device A130 while viewing the third symbol display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while checking the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information regarding setting changes), improving operability and reducing operational errors. can be more reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200 (the side in the direction of arrow L), and the operation wall A210 is provided with the switch device A120 and the key. A device A130 is provided.

As a result, the board is placed in a position where the surface of the board box A3100 on which the switch device A120 and key device A130 are arranged (the front of the operation wall A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed simultaneously. When the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)) It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the switch device A120 is operated more frequently than the key device A130.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220). will be placed. Thereby, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be placed at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (on the right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation part A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 can also be used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (space to avoid interference between fingers and box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point as well.

Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 reaches the above-mentioned second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fixes the substrate box A3100 in the second position). ). Thereby, when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, it is not necessary to hold the board box A3100 by hand, so that operability can be improved.

The regulating means is one that uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of a magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 in the second position (by applying a force that exceeds the attracting force, the first position (which is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the position), has a protruding member that is disposed in the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (e.g., a coil spring), and is disposed in the protruding position. The protruding member engaged with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and regulating the displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (the urging member from the protruding position When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , the substrate box A3100 is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the first position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a front schematic view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state where the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and when it is displaced to the first position. A (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated with a dashed line. Further, in FIG. 123(b), only the main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (positioning position and orientation) of the rotation axis A4410 and the number of arrangement, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 that protrude from each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 in a direction away from each other. A pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side (in the direction of arrows U and D) of the substrate box A4100 (on the side opposite to the operation wall A210, in the direction of arrow U), and are located in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow U) of the substrate box A4100. The substrate box A4100 is formed in such a manner that it protrudes outward from both ends (L, R directions) along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, when the board box A4100 is rotated around the rotation axis A4410, the movable range (rotatable range) is at the first position located on the back side of the inner frame 12 (disposed at the time of the game). 123(b)) in the direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall A210) is vertical. It is set in a range of approximately 90° to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e., a position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall A210 can be directed upward, and its open side (the side opposite to the second connection wall A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present, and the switch device A120 can be directed upward. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the first position, the front side of the operation wall A210 can face the back side of another component disposed on the inner frame 12. Therefore, separate parts can be made to face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and these switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be placed in positions that are difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 will not hit another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with the substrate box A4100, the substrate box A4100 cannot be placed in the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key A140 that has been forgotten to be removed from being illegally acquired.

In particular, in this embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located lower in the gravity direction (vertical direction) than the first position, so the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. If the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, then the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the operator aware that the board box A4100 is in a state where it cannot be placed in the first position.

Note that when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is located closer to the front side of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape is such that it fits into the hole. This makes it possible to reduce the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210, thereby suppressing unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusions 154 decelerate the balls flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you can increase the flow resistance of the ball by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, you can send air into the flow path, or you can adjust the speed of the ball's flow using magnetic force. You may do so.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the production member 700, and the width of the projection toward the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, by configuring the main body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 to be inserted into the back case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated. can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring it so that the insertion into the back case 510 is released when the operating member 183 is operated to shorten the extension width. Along with the displacement, the displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, it is possible to make the displacement regulating device 180 visible to the player.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by manual operation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulated state prior to the initial operation from power-on, it is avoided that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 starts displacing while the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. can do. This can prevent overload from being applied to the operating member 183.

Further, a highly cushioning material may be provided around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183. In addition, if a detection sensor is provided that can detect the arrangement of the operating member 183 without driving the displacement regulation device 180, and this detection sensor determines that the displacement regulation device 180 is in the regulation state. In this case, the zoom unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be placed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, it may be placed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof may be used.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630, so a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and the By configuring the cylindrical portion 183d of the operating member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d is extended, a change in the position of the lower arm member 630 in the left-right direction is prevented. I can do it.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of a device for regulating the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 disposed above the game area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by providing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 can displace the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the granular member 320 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partitioning member 310, breaking the granular member 320, or damaging the partitioning member 310.

For example, by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where it is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side (acting standby state), it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480. Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 that the granular members 320 can come into contact with during shipping, and since the amount of displacement of the granular members 320 can be suppressed, it is possible to avoid a situation where cracks occur due to collisions between the granular members 320. can.

In addition, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate presentation means 160, is configured to be able to extend into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in an extended state. An overhanging member configured to be able to limit displacement may be provided.

By configuring this overhanging member to be pushable from the front side of the lower support member 163 (front side of the game board 13), and configuring it so that it can be switched between an overhanging state and a non-overhanging state each time the push-in operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game machine parlor, the front frame 14 can be opened to operate the projecting member from the front side, thereby improving the operability of the projecting member.

Note that the manner in which the state of the overhanging member changes is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similar to the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between claws.

Furthermore, as another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 with the internal air pressure increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in a game machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before operating it, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with resin, and a magnet may be placed near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet at the time of shipment. On the other hand, during operation, by removing this magnet, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

In addition, in an embodiment in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, after the firing effect is executed, the operation is performed to generate magnetic force near the partition member 310 (for example, by moving the magnet close to the partition member 310). By arranging a performance accessory (that moves), a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) can be included in the firing performance.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an insertion hole is formed in the back case 510 that is aligned with the center axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed at a predetermined end position, and when shipped, A metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulation hole 657 through the insertion hole and fixed with tape, etc. After arriving at the game machine store, the clerk at the game machine store can remove the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be configured to be movable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may get dirty due to the tape used to fix it, and the metal or resin rods cannot be thrown away when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to another store, so it is difficult to store them. There may be a need to do so.

Additionally, if the storage of the metal rod or resin rod is left to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and if the metal rod or resin rod is shipped to another store without it, the quality of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be ensured. There is a possibility that it cannot be done. It can also be recognized that the displacement regulating device 180, which is fastened and fixed to the back case 510, is an improvement from this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 and the front-to-back width of the left-right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the back section lower part 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the front-to-back width of the left and right center portions 312b and the lower back section 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314. In this case, the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased below the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, so the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected can be reduced, so that the front plate portion 311 The probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision can be reduced.

Further, for example, the front-to-back width of the left and right portions 312a and the lower back section 314 may be expanded to the same extent as the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be made to enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Furthermore, the front-to-back width of the internal space IE1 does not need to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. In this case, the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, making it easier to avoid locally excessive loads being applied to the partitioning member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapered direction toward the front side, it is possible to easily move the scattered granular members 320 toward the front side.

Alternatively, for example, a bump-shaped portion may be provided in a part of the front plate portion 311 where the injected granular members 320 are expected to reach in a mass, and protrude in a raised manner toward the back side. good. This bump-shaped portion may be formed by installing and fixing a separate member on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or may be formed by forming a part of the front plate portion 311 to the rear side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 has a soccer ball shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be spherical, rugby ball-shaped, or star-shaped (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring it with members of a certain size, it is possible to create gaps between the members, so that when the firing performance is performed, the granular members 320 can be scattered violently.

In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and configured to emit the granular members 320 diagonally forward and upward, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the injection device 400 may be placed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161, or may be placed above the light guide plate 161. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. Note that when the injection device 400 is disposed at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the production standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is formed from a monochromatic (in this embodiment, red) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be formed by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to improve the appearance of the piles. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position of the granular member 320 in a stable posture in consideration of the center of gravity position, the colored layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as the collision member 420 may be used as the granular member 320, and a concave curved shape comparable to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. As a result, the way the granular member 320 flies and looks changes depending on whether the firing effect is executed with the curved shape fitting well or when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitting. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter and are gathered on the collision member 420 by gravity, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is configured to include a biasing means for biasing the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the performance standby state), and to return the granular member 320 to the initial position side by the biasing force of the biasing means. It's okay. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end portion is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular members 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the biasing means may be bonded to each other, or they may not be bonded but not separated, and a part of the biasing device may be disposed inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being disposed apart from the granular member 320.

Further, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, in the same way as the gravity acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, an air pressure adjusting means may be used to adjust the air pressure in the internal space IE1. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be influenced by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure in the internal space IE1.

For example, when increasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1. When the air pressure in the internal space IE1 is lowered in such a manner as to remove gas from the granular member 320, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side, including up, down, left, right, front, and back.

Note that in the case of causing a change in atmospheric pressure, it is preferable to close the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with a function of closing the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315. For example, when a flexible, thin, highly deformable deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protruding portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface of the right end portion facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the lower displacement end position not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, but also when it is in contact with the curved surface, so that the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right center portions of the collision member 420 have an upwardly curved curved shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a slope shape with a sharp center and descending in the left-right direction, or it may have a hipped shape. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharp center portion in the left-right direction. Therefore, the deviation in the left-right arrangement of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, it may have a planar shape perpendicular to the displacement direction, or it may have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310, and is dispersed by the collision.

Note that when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are concave downward, it is preferable that the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured in a curved shape with the left and right center portions convex upward; This makes it easier to avoid collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape when viewed from the side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the location where the granular members 320 are concentrated can be moved toward the upper half side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161, but the size is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be approximately the same size or larger than the visible area where the player can view the display in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. You can also do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the edge of the partition member 310 overlaps with the display on the third symbol display device 81 and is visible, so that the visibility of the display on the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the first embodiment, a single collision member 420 is used as a member that applies a load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 may be arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320, and may be operated cooperatively or individually by separate drive devices.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the linear motion member 410 contacts the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not contact the collision member 420, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pillar part protruding from the plate part 422 toward the back side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and may be configured to be able to come into contact with the front transmission member 440. In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the column is formed with convexes and convexes in such a manner that the radial length changes according to the angular arrangement, so that the position of the column is adjusted as the front transmission member 440 rotates. can be changed. Utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (slightly displaced).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement, but the manner in which the lid member 480 is displaced is not limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the entry may be made by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the irregularly shaped penetrating portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extending plate portions 485 disposed on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape concave toward the back side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the granular member 320 is spaced apart and accommodated below the lid member 480 in the performance standby state of the injection device 400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a protrusion may be formed that protrudes from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and this protrusion may be configured to be able to come into contact with the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally accumulated, by pushing the granular members 320 with the protrusion, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the granular members 320 are deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular members 320 being deposited, and the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken up.

Alternatively, it may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged to be inclined to both left and right outer sides as they move toward the retreating side tip of the advancing/retracting part 481, starting from the left and right center of the entrance side tip of the overhanging part 482. . In this case, as the lid member 480 is displaced on the entry side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 toward the left and right outer sides.

Furthermore, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be opposite, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction, or the protrusions may be formed with a combination of different inclination degrees, or the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions. A protrusion without a ridge (a protrusion extending on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis or a protrusion extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the rotation axis) may be used. Further, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

Note that the length of the protrusion is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may be protruded until it reaches a circle that is coaxial and the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or it may be configured such that the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the reciprocating portion 481 is constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protrusions has a shape that follows the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retracting portion 481, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained from the shape of the lid member 480. It can be played depending on the part.

When a protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the timing at which the protrusion acts is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is housed below the lid member 480, the front transmission member 440 is rotated by 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction based on the production standby state, and the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small steps in the forward and reverse directions. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the translation member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small increments, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be moved vertically. can be moved up and down.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collided with the protrusion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the granular members 320 can be rearranged, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be prevented from collapsing.

Furthermore, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (displaces upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, making it easier to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protrusion. be able to.

Note that the small forward and reverse rotations of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be caused to rotate in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate part 312 that is disposed to face the advancing/retracting part 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side, so that the lid member Although the case where the distance between 480 and the curved plate part 312 changes has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 is 480 and the curved plate part 312 may be configured to change. Further, the entrance side end of the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be configured to be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation axis O1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member that can change its posture may be disposed on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, abutment member 430, transmission arm In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, a case has been described in which the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all the members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be employed may be slightly larger.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 transmits the driving force by coming into contact with the linear motion member 410, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated between them, the front Load can be transmitted to the translation member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the translation member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, in the circumferential half of the transmission protrusion 446 that is disposed opposite to the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force with the protrusion 414 is disposed. On the other hand, by arranging a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force between it and the protrusion 414 on the opposite circumferential half, the repulsive force moves the linear motion member 410 to the lower end position. Since the load can be generated on the side to be maintained, it is possible to reduce the load at the time when the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 start contacting each other.

In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions: the groove forming part 442 formed on the front surface of the front side transmission member 440 and the groove forming part 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear side transmission member 460. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming a groove in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460 and transmitting the driving force via this groove, the number of objects to which the driving force is transmitted may be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which there is a possibility that it is unclear whether or not it is the timing to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 due to detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection results of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 are used to detect the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is possible. With this, it is possible to determine whether or not the drive in the forward rotation direction has passed through the firing state, so if the firing state has not been reached, reverse rotation is possible, and if the firing state has been exceeded, reverse rotation is not possible. It can be determined that this is possible.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, linear sliding).

In the first embodiment, by making the shapes of the extension claws 734 of the effect member 700 different on the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where the configuration is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by making the shapes of the extending claw portions 734 different, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is different for the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 than for the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. This balances the fact that the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 start displacing earlier due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 simultaneously move in all directions. It can be made to appear as if displacement has started.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 by bringing the rotary plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided to apply a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotary plate 730 is used both as a means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as a means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the assembled state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and is moved radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although a case has been described in which the second guided protrusion 744b that is placed receives a load from behind, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, or the load is transmitted to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b at the same time. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the telescopic displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude diagonally with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740, one protrusion can have a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the extending claw portion 734 disposed outside the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescoping displacement members 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, an overhang is formed on the outer circumference of the rotary plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b is configured to be able to be pushed outward in the radial direction by the overhang, so that the telescopic displacement member 740 is in the discrete state. Directed displacement can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower arm member 630 suppresses the posture change of the presentation member 700 at the lower end position of displacement, and loosens the degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 allowed at the vertical intermediate position. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of tolerance for the change in posture of the effect member 700 increases as it moves toward the lower end position of the displacement.

Further, although the degree of posture change is determined by increasing or decreasing the position where the acting force is generated on the presentation member 700, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be The contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the presentation member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the presentation member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the front surface of the main body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or on the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the presentation member 700 is easily tolerated in the front surface of the main body member 601 or in the part where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in areas where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be configured to gradually narrow as the presentation member 700 approaches the end of its descent.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increase/decrease device that can increase or decrease the displacement resistance of relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increase/decrease device may be a brake device that can increase/decrease frictional resistance, a device that increases/decreases displacement resistance using magnetic force, or a device that extends the lower arm member 630 to a position where the displacement can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily constructed by disposing a magnetic material in a portion disposed close to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 (for example, the auxiliary arm portion in which the arcuate hole 634 is formed). be able to.

In the first embodiment, as the arrangement position of the presentation member 700 goes downward, a large displacement in the expansion direction is allowed, and after the vertical position of the presentation member 700 is fixed, the expansion direction of the presentation member 700 is Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed such that the effect member 700 is displaced in the enlargement direction during its displacement in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of reducing the production member 700 (displaced inward in the radial direction) while the production member 700 is being displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 can be moved from side to side. The effect of changing from a vertically elongated posture to a vertically elongated posture can be offset, and a change in posture of the presentation member 700 in the forward tilting direction can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 is displaced up and down, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center of the center frame 86, and the presentation members 700 extend to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collective arrangement state, and change to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening the opening. The configuration may be such that the state changes to a state larger than that of the current state.

In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the presentation member 700, it is preferable to make an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16, separate from the glass unit 16 that covers the front side of the gaming area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17, the second layer glass unit is tilted from the same front and back position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 to the front side toward the top. It is preferable.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the postures of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to be inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is controlled by the biasing force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be formed intentionally, the effect of the attitude tilt of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily produced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wrapped around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by wrapping the cable tube around the portion disposed above the base end side through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the drive device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be changed appropriately.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the constricted portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixing device such as a binding band, or the direction of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 may be limited.

Furthermore, the position at which the electrical wiring DK2 is fastened can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 that is disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the constriction part 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. , a fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the connecting position.

Moreover, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electrical wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. That is, by narrowing the width of a part of the arrangement portion 635 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed, the arrangement may be such that the electrical wiring DK1 is sandwiched and the displacement is limited, or the inner side of the arrangement portion 635 may be narrowed. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixing device such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the arrangement portion 635 serving as a wiring route for the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the object to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 provided with the arrangement portion 635, or the presentation member 700 disposed on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction toward and away from the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes (front-back direction) corresponding to the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 on the vertical, horizontal, and horizontal planes. Although a case has been described in which this is the case, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the direction of displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front-rear, left-right, left-right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up-down direction; The direction may be inclined and displaced.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through these arm members. In this way, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be configured to be changeable by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by providing a drive device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the wing-like member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as follows.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state change of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the extended state or enlarged state occurs when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, in a case where the wing-like members 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 whose positions in the front and back direction are the same with respect to the presentation member 700 are arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the presentation members 700 in a discrete state, the presentation member 700 It may be configured such that the state can be changed to an enlarged state.

In this case, a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is also possible to avoid predicting a change in the state of the effect member 700 based on the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. Note that in this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing-like member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide route DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a curved channel with a longer left-right width than the guide route DL1, it may be curved in the front-back direction, or it may be formed as a channel that extends vertically without bending. .

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 flows down, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for the ball that enters the general winning port 63, or as a path for the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a, or may be used for both purposes. good. Furthermore, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path for the ball that has passed through the out port 71.

Moreover, since the arrangement of each winning a prize opening 63, 64, 640, 65 is set at an arbitrary position within the gaming area, the arrangement of the intermediate passage LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the gaming area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the gaming area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right sides of the gaming area, or may be arranged in front of the gaming area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along the path of the ball flowing down the game area in a front view.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left and right center side of the gaming area. Therefore, a route that does not reach inside the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the illumination board of the horizontal board unit 166 is arranged with the thickness direction matching the vertical direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Furthermore, the entire range of the illumination board is not limited to being hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination board may be configured so that the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED can be directly recognized without being shielded.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the guide hole 733 may be formed into a step-like shape so that sections in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and sections in which it stops occur alternately.

Further, by fixing the guide holes 733 formed in a step-like shape to some of the guide holes 733, it is possible to displace the shielding design member 760 so as to approach or come into contact with it at different displacement trajectories or at different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illumination boards, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate presentation means 160 may be configured with a plurality of illuminated boards. In addition, the portions (left and right long portions) of the decoration means 170 corresponding to the horizontally long grooves 171a are configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long grooves 171a are used as intersection positions of a plurality of illumination boards, and the intersections are By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the structure may be such that light can be visually recognized through the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing the number of light irradiation directions, the use is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard illumination substrates are used. For example, a light emitting means such as an LED may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by wrapping the flexible substrate or fixing it in sections. As a result, the optical axes of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of directions in which light can be irradiated can be increased. Moreover, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the embodiments described above, regardless of whether the number of configurations is single or plural, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations on the key device A130, but the number of such protrusions A133b (the number of formed protrusions) may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which one key device A130 is installed in the main control device A110, but the number of key devices A130 (number of installed keys) may be increased to two or more. .

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each structure with respect to other structures, the arrangement direction (direction, attitude, phase) of each structure with respect to other structures, or the arrangement of each structure with respect to other structures You may change the order of each. The arrangement order may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the operation wall A210 (second region). Although the case where the opening A260 (key device A130) is arranged in the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) is explained, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall part A210 (second area) It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (on the third connection wall A240 side).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering part A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall part A210 (second region). , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the direction in which the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) is parallel to the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows L, R) of the operation wall A210 (second region) The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle (greater than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A260 (covering part A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. For example, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments (that is, the order in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged in order from the side closest to the first connection wall part A220. ), or the order of only a part of the arrangement may be changed (for example, the arrangement order in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. ).

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering part A270 (end wall part A272), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other It may be formed in the part. That is, it does not need to be formed at a lower part of the outer surface of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, i.e., the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. Examples include A204 or the right wall A205, the back wall A301, the upper wall A302, the lower wall A303, the left wall A304, or the right wall A305 of the box base A300. Similarly, other portions include, for example, the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, or the third connection wall portion A240.

In each of the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the covering portion A270 is provided protruding from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operation wall portion A210, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height as the end walls A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 also serves as the end walls A272, A2272), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is formed. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length of the operating portion A122 to a position where it protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the operating wall portion A210. In addition, with the extension of the length dimension of the operation part A122, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the operation wall part A210.

In each of the above embodiments, when a recess is formed on the outer surface (front) of the box cover A200, A3200, and the part forming the recessed bottom of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, from the front wall A201) Although the case where the operation wall A210 is located at a lower position (on the side of the main controller A110) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A protrusion may be formed, and the portion forming the protruding tip surface of the protrusion may be used as the operation wall A210 (that is, the operation may be performed at a position one step higher than the front wall A201 (on the opposite side from the main controller A110). positioning wall portion A210).

In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100, but this is not necessarily the case. The stored items are arbitrary as long as the operator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a storage item, for example, has a connecting part that is connected to an opening/closing lid that opens and closes an outlet for discharging the balls from the ball flow path, and when the connecting part is operated as an operator, the opening/closing lid can be opened and closed. Examples include members (structures, devices) that open and close.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed as the operating means (switch device A120, key device A130), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other types may be used. The operating means may also be adopted. Examples of other types of operating means include tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, and toggle switches.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation mode of the operator (operation part A122, key A140) is pushing and rotation, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw when both ends are pressed alternately, like the operation button of a rocker switch), and tilting (for example, toggle). An example is a mode in which the operating lever is tilted to one side with the proximal end as a fulcrum, such as the operating lever of a switch.

In this case, the sliding direction of the operator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced operator, and the direction in which the tilting operator falls are in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable that the operating means be arranged in a parallel orientation. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) can be effectively utilized to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the above-mentioned operation modes, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is a shape formed only in the area corresponding to the displacement locus of the operator (the area necessary to allow displacement). Also good.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 held by fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and when no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or end surface of the key A140 gripped with a finger and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (circular ring) The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact with each other. That is, at least one of the surfaces or end surfaces of the key A140 in the OFF position or the ON position that is held by fingers is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When the key A140 is (rotated), the end face of the key A140 may be configured to slide against the end wall parts A272, A2272 (outer edge of the annular part A272a).

Note that there is a gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 to be held with fingers and the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), and a gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the key device A130 can be tilted at a specified angle with respect to the printed circuit board A119 (an angle that allows the key device A130 to be tilted). In other words, the angle is set to such a value that at least one of the gaps disappears (the key A140 or the key device A130 comes into contact) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is difficult to come off or be damaged or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed at only one location, or may be formed at three or more locations. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those positions (phases) in the circumferential direction are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusion A271b of the covering part A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction, but the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited to this. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are provided to protrude outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is provided to protrude radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protrusion is provided radially inwardly on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may also be adopted in which a recessed portion is provided and the protrusion of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A130. In this case, in order to cover the key device A130 with the covering part A270 (insert the protrusion into the recess), it is possible to continue the recess to the end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the base A133a (the protrusion). It is sufficient if an opening is formed in the end surface for inserting the part into the recess.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. may be concatenated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering part A270 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of such protrusions is , may be one, or may be three or more. When forming a plurality of pieces, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions that are different in phase by approximately 180 degrees from the first protrusions A211 and the second protrusions A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the OFF position and the ON position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211, the second protrusion A212, and other protrusions, and the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) ) and width dimension (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the cross-sectional disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination thereof. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (the vertical dimension from the front (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210) is along the extending direction. Although a case has been described in which the distance is constant, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

Note that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the rotation angle (phase difference between the on position and the off position) of the key A140 is set to 90 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) are set. It may also be set to (phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A272) is an area corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position. It is preferable that it be formed only in the area necessary to allow displacement. That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140; A second sector-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (opposite side to one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the embodiments described above, the key A140 has a radius of rotation of a portion on one side of the center of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) and In this example, the rotation radius of the other side is different from the rotation radius of the other side, but this is not necessarily the case. The distance to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface may be substantially the same. That is, the first sector-shaped opening and the second sector-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be formed. good. Examples of other front view shapes include a substantially square, substantially circular, substantially elliptical, substantially triangular, substantially polygon of pentagon or more, and a combination thereof.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is approximately parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200), but this is not necessarily the case. They are not limited to this, and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge (in each of the above embodiments, three sides) of the operation wall A210 is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A230). A240), and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200, A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 matches a part of the outer edge of the box cover A200, A3200. is arranged (formed), however, the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200, A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other arrangements may also be used. Other examples of the arrangement include a staggered arrangement, an irregularly distributed arrangement, a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually perpendicular lines), and the like. In addition, when disposed substantially in series (substantially in one row), the serial direction may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (box cover A200, A3200), or may be disposed substantially orthogonally. It may be.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the end wall portions A272, A2272 is formed as a flat surface, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. One or more protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is formed on the end wall when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). It is preferable to extend radially straight from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271) radially outward. Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such protrusions (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end walls A272, A2272, and the end walls A272, A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F). This is because the rigidity of the ribs can be used to suppress damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272.

Alternatively, the ribs may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front. A plurality of such ribs may be provided with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). Note that it may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the erected end face of the erected wall A209 is set back from the height position of the erected end face of the erected walls A208, A280, and A290 (i.e., from the printed circuit board A119). Although a case has been described in which the walls A208, A280, and A290 are located on the side separated from each other, the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, the amount of retreat of each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Furthermore, the amount of retreat of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may change.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat of the erected end surface from the reference plane. The further the printed circuit board A119 is from the fastening hole A206a, the weaker the regulation by the screw ASC is compared to the closer area. By making the distance of the upright end surface smaller from the reference plane, the farther the upright wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the amount of retreat from the reference plane. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 on all the erected walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, if the erected end surface of the erected wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is assumed to be the reference surface, the erected wall A280, the erected wall A290, and the erected wall A208 are arranged in the order of the fastened hole A206a ( Since the distance from the standing wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (i.e., the standing end face of the standing wall A208). It is preferable to minimize the amount of retreat from the reference plane.

Furthermore, each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may also be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may each be inclined with respect to the front wall portion A201 of the box cover A200 and A3200, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, or in addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol holding lamp 84.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the set value is not displayed on either the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when starting the setting change mode, regardless of the setting value before starting, update the setting value to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value), and press the operation part A122 of the switch device A120. A configuration may also be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to prevent setting values from being illegally acquired by illegal means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Furthermore, when changing settings during a game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting values. Note that in this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although the description has been omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided, and the inner frame with respect to the outer frame 11 is If the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-mentioned setting change is allowed, and the inner frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the configuration may be configured such that setting changes are prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Further, a second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions with the rotation axis A410 as the rotation center). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more by the second detection sensor, the above-mentioned setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device If the input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by the second detection sensor, the settings cannot be changed. It may be configured to be permissible. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized settings changes.

Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). In the case where both are provided, the first detection sensor detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more, and also detects opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 relative to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect an opening (rotation) of more than an angle. Note that examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened and closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have described a case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (i.e., whether it is connected or disconnected), , even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the configuration may be such that operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted. In this case, the setting value accompanying the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 Although we have explained cases in which the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (i.e., setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection status of other electrical connection lines (i.e., even if they are connected or disconnected), operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (i.e., when a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) It may also be configured such that setting changes are prohibited. Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from being operated illegally and paying out game balls.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion A2273 is extended in a stripe shape as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end wall A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 and AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be formed intermittently from the position AP1 to the position AP6, including the positions AP2 to AP5.

Note that the range in which the protrusion A2273 or a plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from position AP1 to position AP6, including positions AP2 to AP5, and this range may be reduced or expanded. . This range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410, so that the board box A3100 is in the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall part A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. 122). Although a case has been described in which the displacement structure is arranged in b), it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the board box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction of the inner frame 12 (in the direction of arrows L and R), and the board box is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (in the direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is placed in the second position, and the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F and B) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). An example is a mode in which the substrate box is disposed at the second position by being displaced (rotated) about A410 as the rotation center.

In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating shaft A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and at least one or both rotating shafts A4410 are It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300 is formed with a divided body of the rotating shaft A4410, and with the box covers A200, A3200 connected to the box base A300, one rotating shaft is formed from each divided body. A4410 may be formed.

The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and although the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described, it is also possible to form the rotation axis A410 in the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. It's okay. Further, similarly to the case described above, one rotating shaft A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed on each of the box covers A200 and A3200 connected to the box base A300.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Production that incorporates randomness>
A gaming machine comprising an action means, a displacement means configured to be able to be displaced by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured such that the displacement means has a plurality of displacement modes. A1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a displacement means that is displaceably disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and is displaced as a drive device such as a motor is driven (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095 ). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the movement pattern of the displacement means is poor, the presentation on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention level gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the auxiliary means changes the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention at a high level.

Note that the specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space constructing means that constitutes a space in which the displacing means can be displaced, or a pushing device that changes the displacement mode of the displacing means by displacing and pushing the displacing means by a drive device separate from the acting means. It can also be a means. Further, the drive device for the pushing means may also be used as a drive device for driving the action means.

In gaming machine A1, the acting means is capable of configuring a first state in which a first acting part can act on the displacing means and a second state in which a second acting part can act on the displacing means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the portions at which the action means act on the displacement means can be made different, so even if the action of the action means is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be different.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the acting means includes abutting means that applies a load by abutting against the displacing means, and is configured to be able to generate loads in a plurality of ways via the abutting means. A gaming machine A3 featuring:

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1 or A2, there are a plurality of types of load modes generated through the contact means, so that the displacement mode of the displacement means can be made into a plurality of types.

In gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable and includes a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and a first contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means. and a second abutting part different from the first abutting part, and the angle between the displacement direction of the abutting means and the first abutting part (or the tangent line of the first abutting part) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4 characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent to the second contact portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be made in multiple types. can be generated in the direction of

In gaming machine A4, the abutting means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first abutting part and the second abutting part, which are parallel to each other, are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the abutting means. A gaming machine A5 comprising:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, it is possible to apply a load to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with less energy loss. can be done. This makes it possible to ensure a large amount of displacement of the displacement means.

Any one of gaming machines A1 to A5 is provided with a load generating means configured to be able to generate a load for displacing the acting means, and the load generating means generates a load at a position where the displacing means are more densely arranged. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A5, it is possible to efficiently transmit the load to the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, the acting means is supported in a supporting manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on a side where it is easier to maintain a balance in arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the acting means. A gaming machine A7 featuring:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A6, the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained by changing the posture of the action means, so that local overload of the action means is prevented. This can be avoided.

Note that the cause of the change in posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, this may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When changing the posture of the acting means by balancing the load from the displacement means, it is possible to easily change the posture of the acting means by providing multiple lengths from the part facing the displacement means to the supporting position of the acting means. It is possible to generate multiple types of nuisance.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes a guiding means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacing means, and the guiding means is capable of guiding the displacement of the displacing means in one direction. and a second guide part capable of guiding the displacement of the displacement means in another direction, and the first guide part and the second guide part are arranged on a surface facing the displacement means. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied depending on the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8, the acting means is configured to be displaceable, and is configured such that the ease of maintaining balance of the displacing means changes depending on its arrangement, and is arranged at a position where it is easy to maintain balance of the displacing means. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A gaming machine A10 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or more members, and the members are configured not to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together and becoming a lump. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

In the gaming machine A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A10, the posture of the displacement means can be stabilized when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making holes in the member may be used.

<Changes due to advancing/retracting means that move back and forth within the range of displacement of the displacement means>
The arrangement means is configured to be able to be placed in a predetermined range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to be displaceable in an advance/retreat direction with respect to the range, and the advance/retreat means is configured to move into a predetermined part of the range, thereby displacing the range. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the width of the gaming machine B1 is configured to be changeable, and the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a first movable member that displaces left and right, and a second movable member that enters into a range created between the first movable members as the first movable member is displaced. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing/retracting means has a plurality of ways in which the width of the range changes when it enters the range, it is possible to configure the displacement means in a plurality of ways. It is possible to improve the displacement mode.

Note that the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball.

Further, there is no limitation on the method of configuring a plurality of types of changing modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advancing/retracting means. For example, the entrance side of the advancing/retracting means may be formed of an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by having parts with different widths entering the range, or the width of the range may be changed by changing the displacement width of the advancing/retracting means. The width may be made variable.

In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means configured to prevent the placement means from going in and out, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retracting means enters the range when it is in a non-changing state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the box-shaped means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that the advancing and retracting means can be inserted thereinto, and the box-shaped means is provided with an opening formed in such a manner that the positioning means cannot be inserted therethrough.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, it is possible to allow the advance/retreat means to enter the range through the opening, while preventing the arrangement means from falling out of the range.

Note that the arrangement of the openings is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the placement means will accidentally drop out of the range. Further, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, on the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to avoid that the load from the placement means is applied to the advancing/retracting means during displacement, and that the displacement of the advancing/retreating means is obstructed or damage occurs in the advancing/retracting means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, wherein the advancing/retracting means is configured to guide the arranging means in different directions depending on the direction in which it comes into contact with the arranging means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing and retreating means. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of performances, thereby improving the performance effects of performances using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance/retreat means is configured such that, in a state in which it enters the range, a gap between it and the opposing surface of the range is shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A game machine B4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, even if the arranging means is disposed on the side far from the advancing/retracting means, the advancing/retracting means can be moved to the arranging means in the entered state. It can be made to work.

Note that it may be configured such that there is no gap between the advancing/retracting means and the opposing surface of the range. Further, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and there is no gap in another part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing/retracting means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured such that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip, where the positional deviation from the axis is likely to be the largest, enters the range first, so that the deviation from the axis can be improved. It is possible to quickly respond to positional deviations and reduce the resistance to subsequent entry operations.

In the gaming machine B5, the representative tip portion includes a predetermined protruding portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the side receding from the range as the distance from the protruding portion increases along the axial direction. Game machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion during the approach process of the advancing and retracting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retracting means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhang in the axial direction.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing/retracting means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means displaced by the overhanging part It is possible to secure a location for the installation.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape where the range side is open. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is open before the advancing/retracting means enters, or the shape may be such that the range side is open when the advancing/retreating means enters.

Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the advance/retreat means, the transmitter and the advance/retreat means This means that the driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retracting means is configured to be changeable, and the contact area is determined by the approach of the advancing/retracting means into the range. A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured such that it reaches a maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is configured such that the contact area is maximized at the beginning of the approach where a large load is likely to occur when the advancing/retracting means starts contacting the arrangement means. By doing so, the load applied per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the advancing/retracting means and the transmission means can be improved.

Note that the mode of the advancing/retracting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for displacing outside the gaming area or a means for displacing within the gaming area.

<Synchronized operation of two members using transmission cam>
A drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and made up of one or more members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising: A first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target section of the displacement means in a first aspect; A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to a second target section.

A drive device used for displacing a displacement means in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means. There are gaming machines (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-202210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement devices in order to execute the motion performance of the displacement devices, the drive timings are shifted. There is a problem in that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with a first transmission section and a second transmission section, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target section or the second target section of the displacement means, respectively. With this structure, transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the second target part can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

Note that the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted simultaneously) may be used.

Moreover, when transmitting the driving force to the first target part and the second target part at the same time, it is preferable to arrange the driving force such that at least a part of the driving force is generated along the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to utilize the vehicle's own weight for driving force transmission.

The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first target section and the driving force transmission to the second target section occur at different times in the gaming machine C1.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, by keeping the maximum value of the drive resistance low, it is possible to suppress the driving force required of the drive means.

Note that driving force transmission here may mean a load in the traveling direction where the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or it can mean a load transmission caused by a displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target part and a second member having the second target part, and the displacement means has a displacement locus of the first member and the second member. The displacement locus of A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to transmit driving force to the second member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, the driving force can be directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means, and the driving force can be indirectly transmitted to the second member via the first member.

In the game machine C3, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member when the first member is displaced toward the predetermined position. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3, it is possible to avoid the first member being displaced from coming into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches a predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be smoothly switched. can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3 or C4, the driving force transmission mode can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. This makes it possible to avoid unintentional collision or contact of each member.

Any one of gaming machines C3 to C5 includes a biasing means configured to bias the second member in a predetermined direction, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the biasing force. A game machine C6 in which the first member is arranged on the side in the predetermined direction with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is placed in a predetermined position while the second member is placed on the opposite side in a predetermined direction with respect to the first member. I can do it. This makes it possible to determine the timing for displacing the second member against the urging force as the transmission means is displaced, and the timing for stopping the second member against the urging force.

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmitting section of the transmitting means is displaced toward the predetermined direction. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the urging force of the urging means. That is, the biasing force can be used supplementarily.

In any one of gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the second member, and in the non-contact state, the second transmission section is configured to control the displacement of the second member. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the movement of the user.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member is a displacement state in which it is pushed by the second transmission part and a displacement state in which it is separated from the second transmission part. can be configured.

In any of gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel to the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating section.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the regulating portion blocks the biasing force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member, so that the biasing force reaches the driving means. can be prevented (to a lesser extent).

Note that the mode of the regulating section is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits displacement to sliding displacement by regulating displacement, or a shaft support that limits displacement to rotational displacement.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means is in a first state in which it is displaced or stopped by receiving the driving force of the drive means, and in a first state in which it receives a load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced and stopped.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting load generation to times when the device is far away.>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the abutment abutting against the displacement means. and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means, the first means being configured to be able to change its state between the state and the non-contact state in which it is not in contact with the displacement means, and an object to which a load applied from the outside is transmitted to the first means is configured to be switchable. A game machine D1 characterized by:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the displacement means consisting of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means comes into contact with another movable body at the displacement terminal position (upper end position) and can receive a load. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the load from another movable body may be transmitted to the drive means via the displacement means, and the state of the drive means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) due to control, Since there is a possibility that there will be a difference in the state of the actual driving means, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

It is also conceivable that the load applied to the drive means may cause the operating resistance of the drive means to increase or decrease unstably, leading to accelerated deterioration of the drive means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. Furthermore, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the drive means, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, or the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to absorb the load. It may be configured so that this occurs only in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine D2 in the gaming machine D1, wherein the load that the displacement means receives from the first means and the driving force that the displacement means receives via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the game machine D2, the load applied to the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 is provided with a placement means arranged so as to collide with the first means, and is configured such that the collision of the placement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that:

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1 or D2, since the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, the load transmission between the transmission means and the displacement means is prevented. Can be blocked.

Note that the collision of the arrangement means may occur when the first means is in contact with the first means, or may occur when the first means is not in contact with the first means. If a collision of the arrangement means occurs in a non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the drive means can be suppressed.

In any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means, and the contact portion is bent in the direction of the load generated by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is configured flexibly to the extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second abutting part configured to be able to come into contact with each other, and the second contact part of at least one of the first means or the displacement means The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the contact portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb shock, so that it is possible to suppress load transmission to the driving means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is characterized in that it includes a biasing means for biasing the displacement means, and a standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of a displacement range in a biasing direction of the biasing means. A gaming machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where it waits for load generation from the transmission means). It is easy to set the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the first means and the displacement means are separated. Thereby, the driving means can be controlled easily and appropriately.

Furthermore, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the first means and the displacement means from inadvertently coming into contact with each other.

A gaming machine D7 in any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, wherein the first means is allowed to change its posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used to change the attitude of the first means, so that load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the urging force of the urging means. and the transmission means is in contact with the displacement means, displacing the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first biasing force of the biasing force is A gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to the means is disabled and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the position of the arrangement means changes in response to a collision).

<Regulating one of the forward and reverse rotations with conditions>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point from which the displacement mode changes, and from the reference position, a plurality of types of displacement means are provided. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced to the predetermined position.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in multiple performances (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, different operations correspond to whether or not the drive direction of the drive device is switched, so the type of performance can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the performance that will be executed from now on. There is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the perspective of increasing player interest because the player can predict what will happen.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the determination participation means can make it difficult for the player to determine the performance that will be executed from now on. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a hit performance and a miss performance may be different performances that involve displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if the displacement means is displaced to the predetermined position in one manner, it will be known whether the displacement from the predetermined position is correct (for example, a driving sound is generated). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, even if a displacement occurs (for example, a driving sound is generated), it can be difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not.

Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement velocity, or a displacement velocity pattern.

The gaming machine E1 includes a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and a regulating means for regulating displacement of the displacing means, and the regulating means is configured such that the driving means generates a driving force. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E2 is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the displacement means when the displacement means is not in use.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, the driving sound of the drive means can be suppressed when the displacement means is regulated, so that when the displacement means is regulated, it is possible to eliminate whether the driving direction is the forward direction when the game machine E2 is driven again after that. This can make it difficult to determine whether the direction is the opposite direction.

Moreover, unlike the case where the drive means continues to generate driving force when performing a long-time performance (long reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means regulated, generation of heat by the drive means can be suppressed.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the regulating means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced compared to the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is provided separately.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a determination involvement means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to determine in which mode the displacement is occurring among the plurality of types of modes. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the discriminating means can be configured so that it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode of the displacing means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to distinguish the displacement mode only in this case, it is easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means while the displacement mode is difficult to discriminate.

A gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming machine E4 is configured such that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E4, it is possible to switch the drive direction of the drive means while maintaining the displacement means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being discovered from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the drive means before notifying the propriety.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 is provided with a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that it also serves as a determining means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching can be used both, so that the detection sensor is The number of devices installed can be reduced.

<Sense of unity of multiple parts>
A gaming machine in which a first member and a second member are configured to be displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-231434 ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, so depending on the speed at which the first member and the second member approach each other, there is a risk that the first member and the second member may move back after contacting each other. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of maintaining the performance mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not to make them approach each other on the same straight line, but to change the direction and approach each other after approaching each other on a different straight line, so that the first member and the second member It is possible to avoid reversion and maintain the presentation mode easily.

In the game machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for coming into contact with each other; The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3, which is the gaming machine F1 or F2, and includes a load generating means capable of generating a load directed toward maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

Note that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that the player is likely to receive (for example, the performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (for example, the gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generation means may be changed accordingly.

Further, the load by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, generation of a load and elimination of the load may be switched in accordance with the above-mentioned changes in the situation. Note that the load generating means may be external.

The gaming machine F3 includes a displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and the load generating means A gaming machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the timing of load generation by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member, thereby eliminating the deviated timing. This can prevent loads from occurring.

Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In gaming machine F4, gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined state is a contacting state in which at least a portion of the first member is in contact with the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F4, it is possible to easily perform a performance in which the gap between the first member and the second member is filled.

A gaming machine F6 characterized in that in the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

A gaming machine F7, in any one of gaming machines F3 to F6, wherein the load generating means is configured to generate a load at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, so that the state is not limited to maintaining the state against displacement in one direction. It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even if the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid noticeable deviations in their arrangement.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded parts that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of loaded parts include a first loaded part and a first loaded part. a second loaded part having a larger displacement relative to the load generating means than the loaded part, and the load generating means applies a load to the first loaded part before the second loaded part. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Furthermore, the role of the load applied to the first loaded section and the second loaded section can be separated. For example, the first loaded part can be used to arrange the position at a predetermined position, and the second loaded part can be used to adjust the posture.

In any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating means has a portion that applies a load to the first member or the second member toward the side opposite to gravity, compared to other portions of the first member. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the opposing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, in other parts, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A gaming machine F10 characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F3 to F9, the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load generated during the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembly work is performed in a state of contact, it is easier to avoid load transmission between the first member and the second member, so the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the first and second members with contact surfaces as designed, thereby preventing situations where the load from the load generating means is more likely to cause misalignment, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling states of displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in attitude of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a displacement means configured to enable displacement consisting of a change in position and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, although the part that supports the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed with a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap to ensure displacement, so the position of the displacement means is There was a problem in that measures against changes were not sufficient and there was room for improvement from the perspective of suppressing changes in the posture of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the configuration of the action means can suppress the change in the posture of the displacement means. Thereby, even if the space in which displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid a collision between the displacement means and the wall member forming the space.

Note that the direction of the attitude change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or it may be oscillated about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

The gaming machine G1 in the gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the acting means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the acting force for suppressing a change in the posture of the displacing means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the change in posture of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the space for disposing the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means reciprocates, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse at the end of the displacement where the direction of displacement is switched. By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

In addition, for example, when the displacement means itself is scaled/contracted or rotated by the driving force installed in the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to collapse, so the driving force generation position By increasing the number of acting force generation positions, it is possible to suppress the posture of the displacement means from collapsing.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that in the gaming machine G0 or G1, the acting means is configured to support the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacing means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0 or G1, since the operating means supports the displacing means with a plurality of main supporting means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacing means, the displacing means is prevented from tilting. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machine G2, the acting means includes an auxiliary supporting means that supports the displacing means at a position different from the horizontal plane where the main supporting means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the displacing means is supported by the main supporting means and the auxiliary supporting means at three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line, so that the displacing means is improved. Posture changes can be suppressed in all directions.

In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as a guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added with a function not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means is capable of being displaced in such a manner that the area as viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is at a maximum at a displacement end position of the displacement means. The game machine G5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacing means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacing means is most effective. , it is possible to effectively suppress changes in the posture of the displacement means.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smoother. That is, while the displacement means is displacing, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the position where the acting force is generated is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases. , the problem is that the drive device becomes larger.

On the other hand, by configuring to reduce the number of acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid excessive displacement resistance of the displacement means and to avoid increasing the size of the drive device.

<Propeller unit wiring guide>
The electric wiring displacement means includes a displacement means, an electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and an electric wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the predetermined portion is configured to be able to be displaced to a side that avoids the displacement means when the gaming machine H1 is displaced toward a side that approaches the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member that interlocks with the displacement means, thereby limiting the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-157474 (see official bulletin). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue displacing beyond the electric wiring in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electric wiring outside, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the electric wiring displacement means is configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacement means, contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring is actively prevented. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

Note that there is no limitation in the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion. For example, it may be possible that there is a risk of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion if the predetermined portion remains stationary, or it may be the case that the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is closer than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be movable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is movable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H1, the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction can be avoided from being limited by the electric wiring.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H2, wherein the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined directional view, so that the displacement of the electric wiring causes the displacement in the predetermined directional view. The effect on visibility can be reduced.

Any one of gaming machines H1 to H3 includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stop means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged in the stop means.

Note that the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stop means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is arranged in a spiral shape in the stop means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer circumference of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be arranged in a movable member. In the case of being guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed in so as to displace the movable member.

A gaming machine H5 in the gaming machine H4, wherein the stopping means is disposed outward from a displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is disposed outward from the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, the stopping means is extended to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the amount of electrical wiring that can be accommodated in the stopping means can be increased, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means can be increased to compensate for the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is configured integrally with the displacing means, and includes a corresponding changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence change means.

<Flow path of the ball passing through the electric tube>
It is characterized by comprising a gaming area and a flowing down means for causing game balls ejected from the gaming area to flow down, and the flowing down means including a section configured to allow the gaming balls ejected from the gaming area to be visually recognized. A gaming machine I0.

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is made of a plywood board (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game balls discharged from the game area flow toward the back side of the base plate, they are hidden by the base plate, and the game ball cannot be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, he or she may get the impression that the game ball has suddenly disappeared from the game area.

In addition, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often placed close to each other, so even though the ball actually entered the out hole, it did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for a ball that has entered the ball. In this case, the player may feel distrustful that the prize ball is not paid out. That is, the conventional gaming machine had a problem in that there was room for improvement in the ejection of game balls from the gaming area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the falling means is configured with a section where the game balls ejected from the gaming area can be visually recognized, so the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down the section. By doing so, it is possible to check how the game balls are arranged from the game area. This makes it possible to improve the ejection of game balls from the game area.

Note that the ejection of game balls from the game area refers to all manners in which game balls are ejected from the game area. For example, the ball may be ejected through a prize ball opening, or it may be discharged through an out port where there is no prize ball.

The gaming machine I0 is arranged such that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can pass therethrough, and includes a benefit giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passing of the gaming ball, The means includes a first component that is configured to be able to guide a game ball toward a side that approaches the profit giving means above the profit giving means, and a first component that is disposed downstream of the first component and that is configured to guide the game ball toward the profit giving means. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, by visually recognizing the gaming balls flowing down the flowing means, the player can grasp how the gaming balls are discharged from the gaming area, and It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been ejected from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that players can play games comfortably. You can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined benefit is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a payout of a prize ball, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol or a second symbol, or other profits.

The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes an attention means formed inwardly of the gaming area, and a frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flowing means is arranged within the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is configured to cause game balls to flow down inside the means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing means allows the game ball ejected from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to make the player understand that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means that displays a variable pattern, a movable accessory that can be moved by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I2, wherein the downstream means includes a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Improvements to the board design and around the light guide plate>
The predetermined substrate includes a predetermined substrate including a light emitting means, and a disposed means disposed on the near side of at least a portion of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction, and the predetermined substrate has an area that is visually recognized as viewed in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine J0 characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is smaller than the visible area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an illuminated board having light emitting means such as an LED is placed on the back side of a base board with a gaming area on the front, and the surface of the illuminated board and the surface of the base board are arranged on the back side of the base board. There is a gaming machine in which the players are arranged substantially parallel to each other (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the area of the illuminated board that is visible when viewed from the front is large, so when irradiating LED light to a decorative member placed on the front side of the illuminated board, the field of view is illuminated. The decorative board may get in there, and the decorative member and the illumination board may appear to be overlapping in the front and back.

On the surface of the illumination board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and it usually does not have a high design quality. Therefore, when the decorative member and the illumination board are visually recognized as overlapping in the front and back, the appearance is poor and there is a possibility that the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of a predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area of the area visible when viewed from the area of the gaming machine J0 is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. It is possible to configure a region where only light can be seen without overlapping the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the predetermined board.

Note that the arrangement of the predetermined substrates is not limited at all. For example, it may be partially hidden so that the visible area is reduced, or it may be entirely covered so that no visible area is present.

Note that the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means disposed on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of a given substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the given substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between the two. It may be something that can be done.

Note that the light transmittance of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, the structure may be configured to have good light transmission, or may be configured to have low light transmission, or the degree of light transmission may be varied from part to part.

In the gaming machine J0, the placement means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surfaces of the predetermined substrate and changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. is provided with a low transmittance means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means, and the predetermined substrate is at least partially disposed inside the low transmittance means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined board can be hidden by the low-transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

Note that the direction changing means is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, it may be a movable accessory configured to be able to be displaced by a drive device, it may be a gaming area or channel through which game balls flow, or it may be a case member or decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

In the game machine J1, the game machine J2 is characterized in that the low-transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion that constitutes a predetermined pattern or figure shape.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1, the low-transmission means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone such as a window frame, it may be a bone that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer circumference, or it may be a bone that is composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns and has a series of meanings. It may be a part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3, in any of the game machines J0 to J2, wherein the predetermined board is arranged with an end surface of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined board when viewed in a predetermined direction can be minimized.

The gaming machine J3 includes a display means for executing a display effect that is visible when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a gaming area arranged in front of the display means, and the predetermined board is configured to cover the display area of the display means and the display area of the display means. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a gaming area in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, unlike the case where light is irradiated from the back of the gaming area to the front side and performing a light effect as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board is emitted. It is possible to perform a production in which light is irradiated on the player's side, or a production in which light is irradiated only on the gaming area side.

In the gaming machine J4, the gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board that forms the gaming area on the front side.

According to the game machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light emitting means is easier than when the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case where movable accessories etc. are arranged, for example. The degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electrical wiring that supplies electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back side of the game board to the outside of the back case, even when the back case side is visible from the window of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see all the way to the back of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electrical wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, if the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the back case, the space for placing the specified board will be limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but there is a method of placing the specified board on the back side of the game board. If so, the predetermined substrate can be placed at any position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrates can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
It includes a displacement means and a restriction means configured to be able to limit the displacement of the displacement means, and the restriction means has a first state in which it can act on the displacement means and a second state in which it cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 is configured to be able to change states, and is configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a movable accessory (displacement means) that moves downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the arrangement of the displacement means.

In other words, while gaming machines are configured to be able to operate normally after they have been installed, it is difficult to secure movable accessories even in situations where large vibrations or external forces may be applied to the gaming machine, such as during shipping. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a measure to secure the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning material in the area where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may place a heavy burden on the game hall.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be canceled by changing the state of the restriction means, so that the arrangement of the displacement means can be fixed and released easily.

On the other hand, unlike when the cushioning material is removed, the limiting means is not removed, so it is difficult to continue the game if the state easily changes due to external forces that may occur during the game. On the other hand, by configuring the limiting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems during the game.

A gaming machine K2 in the gaming machine K1, wherein the limiting means is configured to be able to change its state between the first state and the second state when power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, since the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the worker from having difficulty in performing the work during a power outage state or during recovery work from a power outage state.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to displace the operating section by a predetermined amount from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The operating portion is configured to be able to be displaced away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by a biasing force of the biasing means, and in the second state, the operating portion is configured to change its state away from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a separate position apart from the game machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operating section is placed at a separate position away from the reference position in the second state, there are no effects on the gaming machine after installation, such as opening and closing of the door. It is possible to avoid causing a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change of the limiting means due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the second state.

A gaming machine K4, which is any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, wherein the operating section of the limiting means is arranged outside the area forming means that forms the area in which the displacing means can be displaced.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, since the operating section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacing means is displaced due to the operation of the operating means, The displacement means can be prevented from coming into contact with the worker.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4 includes a biasing means for biasing the operating section of the limiting means in a predetermined direction, and the limiting means is configured to move the operating section from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The limiting means is configured to change its state as it is displaced, and the limiting means includes guiding means that guides the displacement of the operating section in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure a permissible displacement width (posture change width) of the portion.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, since the operating means is configured to be able to be displaced in a direction that intersects with a predetermined direction, the operating unit has a direction. When an unknown load is applied, it can be prevented from easily displacing in a predetermined direction, and it can be easily prevented from displacing the operating portion by a predetermined amount. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a change in the state of the restricting means due to unintended external force caused by opening/closing a door or the like.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be able to engage with the guiding means, the urging means is disposed at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is configured to engage with the guiding section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is placed at a position away from the center of the game machine.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K5, even if an external force in an unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating section does not displace with the engaging section as the fulcrum. (posture change) and can prevent a predetermined amount of displacement required for a state change from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing its state from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the limiting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means which is configured to be rotatable on a support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging part is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the clerk of the gaming hall can open the front door. This makes it easier to operate the control means. That is, since the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width becomes larger when the front door is opened (opposite side of the support shaft), the operating position of the restricting means can be moved closer to the front side.

In the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7, since the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side, it is possible to prevent an operator who works with the front door open from accidentally touching the limiting means. can do.

In addition, compared to the case where it is placed on the opposite side of the support shaft, the load applied to the restricting means when opening and closing the front door can be reduced, so that the restricting means is not in a state due to the impact caused by opening and closing the front door. Changes can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9, which is one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, characterized in that, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide displacement of the limiting means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means is reduced with the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone reduced. can be improved.

A gaming machine K10, characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with a prevention notification means for notifying that when electricity is applied in the first state, the continuation of the electricity-carrying state is to be prevented.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify that the state of the restriction means should be switched from the first state.

Note that the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by displaying an error message on a liquid crystal display device, notification may be made by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means may be turned on (or kept in an off state). You may also notify us by doing so.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, and an opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operating means. A game machine L0 characterized by:

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent unauthorized access to the control board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the control board is provided with an operating means, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it was time-consuming.

According to the game machine L0, the operating means is provided on the object and is operable, and the housing is formed with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means, so that the operating means can be operated through the opening. can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the effort can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering parts A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L0, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating device. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and the opposing portion covers at least a portion of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element. A gaming machine M2 is characterized in that some of the gaming machines are arranged facing each other.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the opposing part is arranged to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the container from the opening. Insertion can be suppressed.

A gaming machine M3 in the gaming machine M1 or M2, wherein the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing part is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. Can be secured. As a result, yield can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine M3, a gaming machine M4 is characterized in that a protruding part is provided on the opposing part.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, since the opposing part is provided with a protruding part, the rigidity of the opposing part can be increased and damage to the opposing part can be suppressed.

Note that the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion that extends in a stripe shape.

The gaming machine M5 in the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the protrusion protrudes from a surface of the facing portion on a side opposite to the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M4, since the protrusion is provided protruding from the surface of the facing portion on the side opposite to the first surface of the operating means, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By reducing the gap between the container and the surface, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the gap.

In the gaming machine M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the protrusion comes into contact with the first surface of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, since the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means, at such a contact point, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means are By eliminating the gap between the containers, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container.

In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the insertion direction by the operating element when inserting the operating element into the operating means, the opposing part will not move in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the proximal end side of the facing portion can be suppressed.

In addition, since the facing part is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, the elastic deformation of the facing part can be used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact with the protrusion. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of adhesion and suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires.

In any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the opposing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the opposing portion has an edge abutting the operating element inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object) increases. Additionally, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operating means becomes excessive, the operating means will also be displaced in the direction of the displacement, resulting in a large load on the base of the operating means (the part connected to the object). Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing part is formed so that the edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. By bringing the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) into contact with the edge of the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating element. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the housing includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be reduced. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

Here, if the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, if the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, if the operator carelessly moves the operating element) (If the operator is pressed in the lateral direction by colliding with another member, such as by inadvertently opening or closing the member on which the housing is installed, the operating means will also be tilted and the operation The load on the root of the means (the part that connects it to the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M10 in the gaming machine M9, wherein an external shape of the operating means at a base end side opposite to the one end side is larger than an internal shape of the covering part.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape at the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering part, so that the outer shape at the base end side of the operating means The gap between the cover and the cover can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means includes a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering part or the operating means is provided with a bulging part formed to bulge, and the other of the covering part or the operating means is Since the receiving part that receives the bulging part is provided, the gap between the bulging part and the receiving part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine M11.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M11, the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging part and the receiving part are brought into contact with each other, and the operating means can be operated. Excessive displacement (especially displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

A gaming machine M13 in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the housing includes an erected wall that is erected from its inner surface and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object.

According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

A gaming machine M14 in the gaming machine M13, wherein the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine M13, since the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, it is possible to block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface of the control board on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit by solder is the side on which the operating means is disposed. A gaming machine M15 characterized in that is set on the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface on which the electronic components are connected to the circuit of the control board by solder is the operating means. Since it is set on the opposite side to the side on which the wall is installed, it is easy to bring the tip of the standing wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the connection between the object (control board) and the wall is It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening hits, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the interior of the container.

In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, a gaming machine M16 is characterized in that the upright wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the upright tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines M13 to M15, the upright wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness of the upright tip is reduced, so that it does not come into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted between the object and the erected tip. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In the game machine M16, the thickness of the upright end of the upright wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface facing the operation means.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M16, the thickness of the erected tip of the erected wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side. Therefore, while improving moldability, it is possible to suppress insertion of foreign objects such as wires into the interior of the container. That is, by forming the tapered surface, the shape change is gradual and the fluidity of the resin within the mold can be ensured. On the other hand, when the erected tip of the erected wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

In any of gaming machines M9 to M12, the housing has one outer surface formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion protrudes from two areas.

According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is separated from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface of the side is formed and the covering portion is provided protruding from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Gaming machine M19, in any one of gaming machines M9 to M12, wherein the covering section projects from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering section.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering part projects from the outer surface of the container and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering part, so that wires, etc. This makes it difficult for the tip of the foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, if it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening because the opening cannot be seen due to a shield, etc., the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the game machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the housing, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire hits the outer surface of the covering part, and no further damage is caused. progress can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering part can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from being inserted into the housing.

<About the concept of the invention using the board box A100 (erected walls A280, A290) as an example>
The gaming machine L0 is characterized in that the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the housing is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. Game machine N1.

Here, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly operates the operator in a horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is installed is carelessly opened/closed) , when the operating element collides with another member and is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operating means may be damaged (for example, a connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so that it can come into contact with the outer surface of the operating means or the operator, so the operating means or the operator can be held in the housing. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating means by receiving it. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N1, the game machine N2 is characterized in that the storage body is provided with an upright wall that stands up from its inner surface and whose upright tip comes into contact with the object.

Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operating means, there is a risk that the container will be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the container is provided with an upright wall that is erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected tip comes into contact with the object, so that the erected wall serves as a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, since deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine N2, the gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed to surround the operating means, so that the standing wall is protected against tilting of the operating means in any direction. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the erected wall can block a path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, since the standing wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected, the rigidity of the container is improved. By utilizing this, the rigidity of the standing wall can be increased, and by connecting the inner surfaces with each other, the rigidity of the entire container can be increased. Therefore, the function of the upright wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that suppresses deformation of the container when the operating means is tilted can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the housing includes a covering part that covers one end of the operating means, so that the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering part. Therefore, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering section covers one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering section can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening comes into contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the housing.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing, the housing includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a striped manner, and one end of the protrusion extends from the outer surface of the housing. A gaming machine N6 characterized in that it is connected to a covering part.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion that projects from the outer surface and extends in a stripe shape. Since one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part, the protrusion can function as a rib and the covering part can be supported by the protrusion. Therefore, by bringing the operating means into contact with the inner surface of the covering part, it is possible to suppress tilting of the operating means, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress damage to the covering part at that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

Further, since the covering portion is provided to protrude from the outer surface of the container, the height of the protruding portion of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area where the covering part covers the operating means (the area where the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire is suppressed, and the area where the covering part contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting or displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container, and to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

In gaming machine N6, gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the container is provided with a display section formed on the outer surface thereof to display predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display section formed on the outer surface of the container and displaying predetermined information, and the display section is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an instruction line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display section. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and when an operator is inserted into the first surface and displaced, the operating means is operated and the housing is opened. A game characterized in that the body includes a facing part facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing part is formed such that an edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container from the opening.

In addition, since the opposing part is formed so that its edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means, the operating element (i.e., the position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) can be placed on the edge of the opposing part. It is possible to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operator by making it come into contact with the part. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N9 in the gaming machine N8, wherein the opposing portion is disposed to face at least a part of the first surface of the operating means excluding a displacement locus of the operating element.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed in at least a part of the first surface of the operating element excluding the displacement locus of the operating element. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while preventing the insertion of the operator into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operator from being inhibited, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Further, by increasing the area of the facing portion that contacts the displaced operator, excessive displacement (particularly displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operator can be easily suppressed. As a result, excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed to be able to displace the operating element to a first position, and the operating means is configured such that a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing part are in a position where they are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part is the second position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to the second position is in a position where the opposing part comes into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering part. Since the position where the operator is displaced to the first position or the second position is in contact with the opposing part, the operator displaced to the first or second position is in contact with the opposing part. By using the protrusions, it is possible to effectively suppress damage to the facing part and the covering part when they come into contact with each other.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that: is formed.

Here, by being able to operate the operating means through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, the effort can be reduced. However, there is a possibility that fraud may be committed by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the housing has one outer surface formed by a first area and a second area located closer to the object than the first area, and the second area Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be arranged around the opening. This increases the distance to the opening and makes it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening. In other words, fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that at least a part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is sloped downward from the first area to the second area. O2.

Here, in consideration of heat dissipation from the object (control board), it is necessary for the container (board box) to ensure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far away from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming an opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the interior of the container through the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first region and the second region, which hinders the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability when operating the operating means may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, so the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the space connected to the second area can be expanded by the amount of the downward slope, thereby improving the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction perpendicular to the one direction, and the operation means is configured to operate the second area. A gaming machine O3, which is operated by inserting and displacing a child, and wherein the attitude of the operator when inserted into or pulled out from the operating means is a posture along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, where the length along one direction is larger than the length along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted into or pulled out from the operating means, the attitude of the operating element is along the other direction. By orienting the child-gripping surface in the longitudinal direction of the second region, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the child-gripping surface. Therefore, when inserting the operator into or pulling out the operator from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operator from interfering with the container. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the second area with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second area is connected from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is tilted downward toward the area.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second region, and the connecting surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second region is located on the second region. Since the operator is tilted downward from the first area to the second area, when the operator is gripped and displaced, it is possible to prevent fingers different from the one gripping the operator from interfering with the container. For example, when the operator is grasped with the index finger and thumb and the operator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface and the space on the other longitudinal side in the second region are This can be secured as a space for moving the little finger side, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O4, since the connecting surface is formed on the other longitudinal side of the second area, the operation can be performed using the connecting surface (first area) on the other longitudinal side. Means can be protected. For example, damage to the operating means can be suppressed by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. Further, by making the position of the opening difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container through the opening.

In addition, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly, that is, the area of the first region can be increased by that amount, that is, the area of the first region can be expanded to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any of gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. The gaming machine O6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the lateral direction in the second region, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the lateral direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the lateral direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the operation means, pulled out from the operation means, or displaced (e.g. rotated)), the gripped fingers (e.g. thumb and index finger) The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surface is inclined downwardly from the first region to the second region. A gaming machine O7, which is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is tilted downward from the first region toward the second region, and the other Since the connecting surface is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, the container is designed to accommodate heat dissipation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of descending the connecting surface. The volume of internal space can be secured. That is, the reduction in volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward slope of the connecting surface can be minimized.

The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft rotatably supporting the base body, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. The two regions are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the transversal direction thereof is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is located farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Game machine O8.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 is provided with a base body on which a storage body is arranged, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal axis in the second area is The direction is substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when operating the operating means in the space formed by rotating the base body about the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, a space for allowing the operator's hand to access the operating means can be secured by the space formed by the downward slope of the connecting surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for accommodating a target object, comprising a display device disposed in a gaming area, and an operating means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is disposed on the control board (object), there is a problem in that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P1 includes a display device disposed in the gaming area and an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and information regarding the operation of the operating means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, the operating state of the operating means can be easily understood based on the display on the display device. Further, by disposing the display means in the gaming area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information regarding the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine P1, the gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, operations can be performed while checking the display (information), so operability can be improved and operational errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed.

The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the housing is movable to a position where the surface of the housing where the operating means is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P2, the container can be moved to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily operate the operation means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, it is possible to more reliably improve operability and suppress operational errors.

The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed at a side farther from the center of the housing from the position where the housing is supported.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on the side farther from the center of the container than the position where it is supported. When the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operating means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time, the operating means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. It can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operating means from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operating means includes a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is located on the side farther from the pivoted position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in a.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, there are a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, has a higher frequency than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the position where it is pivoted, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the frequently operated operating means (first operating means), it is possible to prevent the fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the target object, A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line to the object.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operating means can be operated. In other words, if the operation is allowed regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, there is a risk that the operating means will be easily manipulated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the work efficiency associated with the operation of the operating means will be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q1 is provided with an operating means that is disposed on the object and formed to be operable, one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the connection of the electrical connection lines with the object is connected to the object. Since the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the state, fraud can be suppressed and work efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q1, the gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, since the container is formed to be displaceable, the container can be placed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operating means is not operated, it can be placed at a predetermined position (for example, a position where it is difficult to be seen from the outside), and therefore fraud can be suppressed. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (pulled out) from the object, so the operability of the operating means is changed depending on the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operating means is allowed to be operated while at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve work efficiency. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection wire to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means may be disconnected even if other electrical connection wires are disconnected (unplugged) from the object. By allowing operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, in order to allow operation of the operating means, for example, an extension line is interposed between the object and the other electrical connection line, and the other electrical connection line is released (pulled out). This avoids the trouble of reconnecting the target to the target object.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operation of the operating means is prohibited in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object. Q4.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections are (If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so it is possible to suppress unauthorized operation of the operating means.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is displaceable, other electrical connection wires that are released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, arrange it for easy operation) are connected to the container. After displacing the object, for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (unplugged) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation can be performed. Since the operation of the means can be permitted, work by operating the operation means is possible. <About the concept of the invention using board boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine equipped with a container for storing a target object, comprising an operation means disposed on the target object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and disposed during a game. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that the operating means is movable to a position where it is easier to operate.

A gaming machine including a board box (container) that accommodates a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operating means is provided on the control board (object), there is a problem in that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the storage body is formed to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than the position where it is disposed during the game. Since it can be moved to any position, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

A gaming machine R2 in the gaming machine R1, wherein the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted portion as the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivoted part as the center of rotation, so that the housing is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the housing body has a separate member facing the operating means at a position where it is disposed during the gaming.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, since a separate member of the housing faces the operating means at the position where it is disposed during a game, the operating means cannot be operated illegally. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and in the state where the operating element is inserted, the operating element is brought into contact with the separate member, so that the operating means A gaming machine R4 characterized in that the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element touches another member. By being in contact with it, the container cannot be moved to the position where it is placed during the game, so forgetting to remove the operator can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being used illegally.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A gaming machine X1 characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A gaming machine X2 characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A game characterized in that in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine X3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
There is a game machine that is used for displacing the displacement means and includes a first drive device for vertically displacing the displacement means and a second drive device for rotationally displacing the displacement means (for example, as disclosed in patents Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-202210).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can stabilize the displacement of the displacement means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members, and a driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement means. a first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target portion of the displacement means in a first aspect; and a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the second target section of the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the driving force transmission to the first target part and the driving force transmission to the second target part occur at different times. configured.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion. The displacement locus of the first member and the displacement locus of the second member are configured to partially intersect, and the first member is configured to be able to abut against the second member at a predetermined position, In the abutting state, a driving force can be transmitted to the second member via the first member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, it is possible to shift the timing of driving force transmission to the displacement means.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the path of driving force transmission can be switched.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
18 hinge (part of support shaft)
19 hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specified winning opening (part of profit granting means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 center frame (frame means)
150 ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 first receiving channel (first component, second component)
153 Second receiving channel member (second component)
154 protrusion (part of deceleration means)
161 light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decoration means (placed means)
171a horizontally long groove (low transmission means)
171b reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 displacement regulating device (limiting means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of the guide means)
183 operation member (operation section)
183f engaging part
184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 compartment member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-like means)
312 curved plate part (first guide part)
314 Back compartment lower part (second guide part)
315 Unusual penetration part (open part)
320 granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 shaft part (regulating part)
410 Linear member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protruding part (second contact part)
414 protrusion part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 buffer member (second contact part)
430 contact member (part of displacement means, first member, regulating means)
432 protruding part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 groove forming part (second transmission part, means involved in discrimination)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of operating means, contact means, advance/retreat means)
482 overhang (representative tip)
489a first contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c 3rd contact surface (contact surface)
510 back case (part of area configuration means)
630 lower arm member (part of the action means)
633 support hole (main support means)
634 arcuate hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 production member (displacement means)
730 rotating plate (load generation means, displacement generation means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b First guided protrusion (first loaded part)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded part)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a wall (part of the stopping means)
886 guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of the stopping means)
DK2 electrical wiring
DK2b lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of the flow means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generation means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
11 outer frame
12 inner frame (base body)
18 hinge (rotation axis)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 board box (container)
A110 main control device (object)
A119 printed circuit board (target object, control board)
A120 switch device (operation means)
A122 operation unit (operator)
A123b protrusion (first surface)
A130 key device (operation means)
A133b protrusion (receiving part)
A133c end (first side)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 box cover (container)
A203 lower wall (standing wall)
A210 operation wall (opposing part)
A211 first protrusion (protrusion)
A212 second protrusion (protrusion)
A220 first connection wall (connection surface)
A230 second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surfaces)
A250 aperture
A260 aperture
A270, A2270 covering part
A271 peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a base (covering part)
A271b protrusion (bulge)
A272, A2272 end wall part (coated part, opposing part)
A272a annular part (opposing part)
A272b square part (opposing part)
A2273 protrusion (protrusion)
A280, A290 standing wall
A280a, A290a tapered surface
A281, A291 first standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (container)
A410, A4410 rotation axis

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specified winning slot (part of profit granting means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow means)
152 First receiving channel (first component, second component)
153 Second receiving channel member (second component)
154 Projection (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 Horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 Decoration means (placed means)
171a Horizontal groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflective shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement regulating device (limiting means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guide means)
183 Operation member (operation section)
183f Engaging portion 184 Coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 Partitioning member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-like means)
312 Curved plate part (first guide part)
314 Lower part of rear compartment (second guide part)
315 Irregular-shaped penetration part (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 Shaft part (regulating part)
410 Linear member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protruding part (second contact part)
414 Projection part (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Buffer member (second contact part)
430 Contact member (part of displacement means, first member, regulating means)
432 Projection part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, means involved in discrimination)
446 Transmission protrusion (first transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of operating means, contact means, advance/retreat means)
482 Overhang (representative tip)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Back case (part of area configuration means)
630 Lower arm member (part of action means)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Performance member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generation means, displacement generation means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b First guided protrusion (first loaded part)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded part)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Lateral slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall part (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (correspondence change means)
887 Cylindrical protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electrical wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 Intermediate channel (part of flow means, first component)
MT1 Drive motor (drive means)
IE1 Internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 Coil spring (part of load generation means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotation axis)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Board box (container)
A110 Main control device (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch device (operating means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b Protrusion (first surface)
A130 Key device (operation means)
A133b Projection (receiving part)
A133c end (first side)
A140 Key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposing part)
A211 First protrusion (protrusion)
A212 Second protrusion (protrusion)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surfaces)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering portion A271 Peripheral wall portion (covering portion)
A271a Base (covering part)
A271b Projection (bulge)
A272, A2272 End wall part (covering part, opposing part)
A272a Annular part (opposing part)
A272b Square part (opposing part)
A2273 Projection (protrusion)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft

Claims (3)

comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means,
The transmission means includes a first transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the first target portion of the displacement means in a first aspect;
A gaming machine comprising: a second transmission section configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the second target section of the displacement means in a second aspect different from the first aspect. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the driving force transmission to the first target part and the driving force transmission to the second target part are configured to occur at different times. The displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion,
The displacement locus of the first member and the displacement locus of the second member are configured to partially intersect,
The first member is configured to be able to come into contact with the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the abutted state, be configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the second member via the first member. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that:

Images